SGTA 2023-No Password

FINAL EXCLUSIVE JEE ADVANCED REVISION TEST SCHEDULE -(FOR RANK GETTING SCORE & TARGET 10K)
S.NO TEST DATE EXAM MODEL PHYSICS TEST SYLLABUS CHEMISTRY TEST SYLLABUS MATHS TEST SYLLABUS
Electric Field a n d force,
O rg a nic ch e mistry: Electro nic effects, re actio n Q u a dra tic e q u a tio ns ,Se q u e nce a n d series:
Electric p o t e n tial a n d
in t erm e dia t es, A ro m a ticity, K a a n d K b of (Sp ecial series in e q u alities),M a trices a n d
e n erg y,Electric flu x a n d g a uss
org a nic co m p o u n ds. D e t ermin a n ts( A djoin t pro p erties, d e t ermin a n t
la w , G ra vit a tio n al field ,
Perio dic t a ble pro p erties, syst e m of e q u a tio ns),Bin o mial
Po t e n tial a n d electrical
1 27-04-23 SGTA-I C h e mical b o n din g ( m ore focus o n M. O .T , T h e ore m (E xclu din g pro ble ms o n Bin o mial
orbit als
VSPERT, h y bridiz a tio n, F A J A N Rule) C o efficie n ts)
SEMI GTA-1 (2010-P1 &P2)
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

100% Syllabus
PAPER SETTER:HYD-SN(SUBBA REDDY)
O rg a nic ch e mistry: M ore focus o n pre p ara tio n

a n d pro p erties of A lk a n e a n d A lk e n e. A rES
C a p acit ors w it h dielectrics re actio ns
, R C Circuits,Pro ble ms o n P- block – pre p ara tio n a n d pro p erties of B oro n
t h erm al A lu min u m , a n d silico n co m p o u n ds, pro p erties Straig h t lin es ,Circles (E xclu din g syst e m of
p o w er,Po t e n tio m e t er, M e t er a n d struct ure of o xid es, o x y acid’s of N ,P,S, a n d circles), C o nic sectio n (T a n g e n t a n d n orm al)
2 04-05-23 SGTA-2 brid g e Cl, h y p o, in t er h alo g e ns , co m p o u n ds of x e n o n .
M e t allurg y(C o nce n tra tio n of ore ,calcin a tio n,
ro astin g, sm eltin g, cy a nid e process, refinin g
m e t h o ds)
SEMI GTA-2 (2015-P1 &P2)

SYLLABUS:60%-SEMI GTA-2 + 40%- SEMI GTA-1
PAPER SETTER:NLR-RAYUDU
It
O rg a nic ch e mistry: M ore focus o n pre p ara tio n
Bio t-sa v art la w , A m p ers la w ,
a n d pro p erties of A lk yl h alid e , SN 1, SN 2,SN i
M o tio n of ch arg e d p article in
re actio ns V ect ors (Fin din g a v ect or u n d er giv e n
m a g n e tic a n d co m bin e d field,
D & F block ele m e n ts , K M n O 4 & K 2 Cr2 O 7 co n ditio ns, sk e w lin es), 3 D G e o m e try (Lin es
M o tio n al E M F, F ara d a y’s la w ,
C o- O rdin a tio n co m p o u n ds. a n d pla n es)
A . C circuits (LR, CR, a n d LC
3 11-05-23 SGTA-3 circuits, LCR Series)
Syst e m a tic a n alysis ca tio ns a n d a nio ns.
SEMI GTA-3( 2016-P1 &P2)

SYLLABUS:60%-SEMI GTA-3 + 40%(SEMI GTA-1&2)
PAPER SETTER:VIJ-GS
Refractio n a t sp h erical
O rg a nic ch e mistry: C h e mical re actio ns of
b o u n d ary, T hin le ns
A lco h ols, Ph e n os, A n d E t h ers.
(C o m bin a tio n of le nses a n d
Poly m ers ( N C ERT ) Differe n tial C alculus (E xclu din g m e a n v alu e
curv e d mirrors,b ase d
A t o mic struct ure (t o t al) t h e ore ms, m a xim a a n d minim a, Re d uctio n
pro ble ms), Prism, YDSE,
St oichio m e try – F ocus o n E q uiv ale n t co nce p t form ulas a n d fu nctio n al e q u a tio ns), Limits,
4 18-05-23 SGTA-4
Polarisa tio n, B o hr’s m o d el
a n d H-sp ectra, Ph o t o electric
effect, Q - V alu e of n ucle ar
,re d o x re actio ns
St a t es of m a tt er – Distrib u tio n of m olecular
differe n tia bility, t a n g e n t n orm als, In t e gral
calculus(B asic m o d els of in d efinit e in t e gra tio n
v elocities, co m pressibility fact or, v a n d er w al d efinit e in t e gra tio n are as)
re actio ns, O rg a n pip es,
co nst a n t , critical p h e n o m e n a
D o p pler’s effects
SEMI GTA-4 (2017-P1 &P2)

SYLLABUS:60%-SEMI GTA-4 + 40%(SEMI GTA-1, 2 &3)
PAPER SETTER:HYD-MDP-ASHOK
O rg a nic ch e mistry: Pre p ara tio n a n d pro p erties

C o nserv a tio n of lin e ar of C arb o n yl co m p o u n ds.
m o m e n t u m, M o m e n t of M ore focus o n im p ort a n t N a m e
in ertia, La w of C o nserv a tio n re actio ns.T h erm o d y n a mics-ty p es of e n t h alp y of
of a n g ular m o m e n t u m, re actio n (form a tio n, co m b usio n, n e u traliz a tio n) P & C (E xclu din g divisio n in t o gro u ps),
Rollin g w it h o u t slip pin g, h ess’s la w , b orn-h a b er cycle .Io nic e q uilibriu m- Pro b a bility (B a y e’s t h e ore m),St a tistics
5 25-05-23 SGTA-5 C O M a n d C ollisio ns, Fluid b u ffer co nce p t, salt h y drolysis, Ksp, co m m o n
d y n a mics b ase d pro ble ms io n effect
C h e mical kin e tics- d e t ermin a tio n of ord er of
re actio n, A ctiv a tio n e n erg y co nce p t.
SEMI GTA-5 (2018-P1 &P2)
SYLLABUS:60%-SEMI GTA-5 + 40%(SEMI GTA-1, 2,3 &4)
PAPER SETTER:HYD-HYD-DN-RK
E xcess pressure in b u b ble a n d

O rg a nic ch e mistry: A cidic stre n g t h of
dro p, Surface e n erg y,
C arb o x ylic acid, H V Z re actio n, D ecarb o yla tio n.
T h erm o d y n a mic process,
A min es, Dia z o niu m salts P O C ( Bro min e w a t er,
T h erm al C o n d uctivity,
K M n O 4, Lucas re a g e n t ,est erifica tio n , N e u tral Trig o n o m e try u p t o tra nsform a tio ns
T h erm al ra dia tio ns, V ernier
F e Cl3, 2,4- D N P , Tolle ns, F e hilin gs, SC hiffs , , ,Trig o n o m e tric e q u a tio ns
C allip ers, Scre w G a u g e
Io d o form , C arb yl a min e, H insb erg Test)
6 01-06-23 SGTA-6 (Pro ble ms m ainly in v olvin g
Solu tio ns,Electro ch e mistry
z ero errors)
SEMI GTA-6 (2022-P1 &P2)

SYLLABUS:60%-SEMI GTA-6 + 40%(SEMI GTA-1, 2,3 4 &5)
PAPER SETTER:HYD-HYD-DN-VENKAT REDDY
Test
S GTA Semi Grand Advance
so
OUTGOING SR Date: 27-04-2023
Time: 3 HRS SGTA- 01 Max Marks: 252
JEE-ADVANCE-2010-P1-Model
Time: 3:00 Hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 252
CHEMISTRY
+Ve - Ve No. of Total
Section Question Type
Marks Marks Qs marks
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 8) Questions with Single Correct Options +3 -1 8 24
Questions with Multiple Correct Choice
Sec – II( Q.N : 9 – 13) +3 -2 5 15
(partial marking scheme)(+ 1)
Questions with Comprehension type
Sec – III(Q.N : 14 – 18) +3 -1 5 15
(2 comprehensions: 3 + 2 = 5 Q)
Sec – IV(Q.N : 19 – 28) Questions with Integer Answer type +3 0 10 30
Total 28 84

MATHEMATICS
+Ve
Marks
- Ve
Marks
No. of
Qs
Total
marks
Sec – II(Q.N : 37 – 41) +3 -2 5 15
Sec – III(Q.N : 42 – 46) +3 -1 5 15
Total 28 84
PHYSICS
Sec – II(Q.N : 65 – 69) +3 -2 5 15
Sec – III(Q.N : 70 – 74) +3 -1 5 15
Total 28 84
Narayana IIT Academy
CHEMISTRY: Max. Marks: 84
SECTION – I
(SINGLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains EIGHT (08) questions. Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which
ONLY ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -1 in all other cases.
1. Which of the following groups shows electron donating inductive effect (+I)
    
  
 
A)  N H 2 ;  OH B)  R;  S H C)  O  ;  CH 3 D)  O  ;  F 
    
2. Which of the following compound is aromatic

A) Benzene B) Cyclopropenyl cation
C) Azulene D) All are aromatic
3. Which of the following molecular orbital is gerade with zero nodal planes
A)  *2 p z B)  *2 p y C)  2 s D)  2 p y
4. The hyperconjugative stabilities of tert-butyl cation and 2-butene, respectively are due to
A)   p (empty) and    * electron delocalisations
B)    * and    * electron delocalisations
C)   p (filled) and    electron delocalisations
5.
D) p (filled)   * and    * electron delocalisations
How many sp2 hybridised atoms are there in the given cation?
H
H
A) 8 B) 9 C) 10 D) 12
6. Oxidising power of in chlorine in aqueous solution can be determined by the parameters indicated
below:
1
1  diss H 
Cl2  g    Cl  g    Cl   g    Cl   aq 
eg H  hyd H 
2

2I 1
1
The energy involved in the conversation of Cl2  g  to Cl   aq 
2
(using the data,  diss  240 KJ mol ,  eg  349 KJ mol 1 ,  hyd  381 KJ mol 1 ) will be
1
A) -610 KJ mol 1 B) -850 KJ mol 1 C) +120 KJ mol 1 D) +152 KJ mol 1
7. Rank the following reactions, (a), (b) and (c), in order of DECREASING heat of hydrogenation
2H2 2H2 2H2
a) b) c)
A) b  a  c B) c  a  b C) a  b  c D) b  c  a
Page 2
8. Which will be the least stable resonating structure among the following is/are
O O O
O
N N N
N
O O O
A) B) C) O
D)
SECTION – II
(MULTIPLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 5 multiple choice questions. Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its
answer, out of which ONE OR MORE THAN ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options& +1 partial marks, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all other cases.
9. Consider the following ionization steps:
M  g   M   g   e ; H  100 eV
M  g  
 M 2   g   2e ; H  250 eV
Select the correct statement(s)
A) I.E1 of M(g) is 250 eV B) I.E1 of M+(g) is 150 eV
C) Electron gain enthalpy of M+(g) is -100 eV D) I.E2 of M(g) is 150 eV
10. Choose the correct mentioned order for the given species
A) F   Cl   Cl  F (First ionization energy)

B) N 2O3  N 2O4  N 2O5 (Acidic strength of oxides)
C) O  S  Se (Electron affinity)
D) N  P  As  Sb (Electron negativity)
11. 3 Center  2e  bond is present in

A) AlCl3 dimer B) BeH 2 dimer C) B2 H 6 dimer D) NO dimer
12. Which of the following statement(s) regarding inductive effect is/are true?
A) It operates through sigma bond
B) It is a permanent effect
C) –I effect produced by two chlorine is greater than the same produced by one fluorine but from
same position
D) It has stronger effect than resonance effect in major cases.
13. Which options among the following can have more stable resonating structure(s) than the given
one?
H OH
N
+ +
A) B)
O
O
C) H2C H D) O O
Page 3
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
This section contains 2 groups of question. Two groups has 5 multiple choice questions based on a paragraph.
Each question has 4 choice (A), (B), (C) AND (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Paragraph for Questions 14, 15 and 16:
The trigonal bipyramid is not a regular shape since the bond angles are not all the same. It
therefore follows that the corners are not equivalent in ClF3 molecule. Lone pairs occupy two of
the corners, and F atoms occupy the other three corners. These different arrangements are
theoretically possible, as shown in figure
(i) The most stable structure will be the one of lowest energy, that is the one with the minimum
repulsion between the five orbitals. The greatest repulsion occurs between two lone pairs. Lone
pair bond pair repulsions are next strongest, and bond pair-bond pair repulsions the weakest.

A rule of thumb can be theorised, that the position having maximum repulsion amongst them are
occupied at equatorial points. Therefore (3) structure is right.
(ii) Since double bond occupies more space compared to single bond therefore it will prefer
equatorial position.
(iii) More electronegative element will occupy axial position in case of trigonal bipyramidal
geometry
(iv) In case of sp 3d2 hybridisation lone pairs should be placed opposite to each other because all
the corners are identical.
14. Actual shape of the molecule BrF5 is similar to the molecule

A) PCl5 B) XeF4 C) PCl4 D) None of these
15. The d- orbital involved in all sp3d, sp3d 2 and sp3d2 hybridization as common is
A) d x2  y 2 B) d z 2 C) Both d x2  y2 & d z 2 D) d xy
16. The shape of SF5 can be
A)  only B)  and  only C) V only D) &
Page 4
Paragraph for Questions 17 and 18:
According to molecular orbital theory when a pair of atomic orbitals combines they give rise to a
pair of molecular orbitals. The number of molecular orbitals produced must always be equal to the
number of atomic orbitals involved. The overlapping of orbitals means the overlapping of the
wave of electron. Wave can overlap within the same phase or in the opposite phase. When the
electron waves of two atomic orbitals overlap within the phase a bonding molecular orbital will be
formed and it will have lesser energy than the atomic orbitals from which it is formed. If the
electron waves of the two atomic orbitals overlap in the opposite phase an anti-bonding molecular
orbital will be formed and it will have more energy than the atomic orbitals from which it is
formed.
17. Which of the following statement is correct?
A) The ionization energy of Oxygen atom is less than the ionization energy of O2 molecule
B) The ionization energy of Nitrogen atom is less than the ionization energy of N2 molecule
C) The ionization energy of Fluorine atom is less than the ionization energy of F2 molecule
D) The ionization energy of Hydrogen atom is more than the ionization energy of H2 molecule
18. The correct statement among the following is

A) The energy required to remove an electron from pbonding molecular orbital is more than to
remove  p bonding molecular orbital in oxygen
B) The energy required to remove an electron from pbonding molecular orbital is more than to
remove  p  bonding molecular orbital in Nitrogen
C) The energy required to remove an electron from peroxide ion is less than that to remove super
oxide ion

D) The energy required to remove an electron from C2 molecule is less than that to remove from
C 2-2 (acetylide) ion
SECTION – IV
(INTEGER ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 10 questions. The answer is a single digit integer ranging from 0 to 9 (both inclusive).
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
19. Successive ionization energies data of a 3rd period element in eV/ atom is
IE1 IE2 IE3 IE4 IE5 IE6 IE7 IE8 IE9
10.49 17.77 30.20 51.44 65.02 220.42 309.60 372 424.4

The group from number of element in long form of periodic table [as per 1-18 convention] is
Sum of digit value of Q is
20. If an orbital accommodates 3 electrons, no. of elements possible in 5 th period is ‘x’. Find the value
x
of is
9
21. Find the total +M groups attached to the benzene
Page 5
22. Among the following total number of aromatic species are?
23. Among the following, in how many which process energy is released
a) N  g   e   N   g  b) Be  g   e  Be   g  c) O  g   e   O   g 
d) Mg   g   Mg  g   e e) O  g   O   g   e f) O   g   e  O  g 
g) H   g   H  g   e h) O   g   e  O 2   g  i) Mg   g   Mg 2   g   e 
j) P  g   e   P   g 
24. Effective nuclear charge of ‘carbon’ (As per slater’s rule) is ‘X. YZ’, numerical value of (Z - X+Y)
25. The ratio of bond order in CO32  ion and SO32  ion is _____.
26. How many of the following species have fractional bond order
C22 , O22 , O22 , CN  , NO  , O2 , C2 , Li2

27. The sum of the number of lone pairs of electrons on each central atom in the following species is
TeBr6  ,  BrF2  , SNF3 and  XeF3 
2  
(Atomic numbers: N  7, F  9, S  16, Br  35, Te  52, Xe  54 )
28. Among MnO4 , MnO, Mn2O, MnO2 , MnO42 , Mn2O3 compounds, how many compounds are more
ionic than MnO4 . (as per Fajan’s rule)
MATHEMATICS: Max. Marks: 84

SECTION – I
29. Complete set of values of ‘a’ for which 4 x  a.2 x  a  2  0 has at least one solution in (1, 2) is
 18   18 
A)  ,   B)  0, 2  C)  2,  D)  2,  
5   5
30. The sum of the real values of ‘x’ which satisfy the equation
1 1 2
 2  2 is
x  4 x  50 x  4 x  66 x  4 x  90
2
A) -60 B) 4 C) -4 D) 12
Let p, q, r  R  and 27 pqr   p  q  r  and 3 p  4q  5r  12 , then p 3  q 4  r 3 is equal to

3
31.
A) 3 B) 6 C) 2 D) 12
Page 6
1 1 1 1 3 7 n2  n 1
32. If f  n   1     ....  and g  n   1    ....  , then
2 3 4 n 2 3 n
n  n  1
A) g  n   f  n   2n 2  2 B) g  n    f  n  n
2
n  n  1 n  n  1
C) g  n    f  n D) g  n    f  n
2 3
5 2016 
33. If A    , then the value of det  A2015  5 A2014  equal to
1 403 
A) 5 B) – 1 C) 1 D) – 2016
34. If every element of a square non- singular matrix A of order n is multiplied by K and the new matrix
is denoted by B. Then A1 and B 1 are related as
1 1
A) A1  K B 1 B) A 1  B C) A1  K n B 1 D) A1  K  n B 1
K
The number of distinct terms in the expansion of  x  y 2    x 2  y  is

13 14
35.
A) 27 B) 29 C) 28 D) 25
 k
1
36. Value of S    k
Cr  is

k
k 1 r  0 3
2 1 1
A) 2 B) C) D)
3 3 2
SECTION – II
37. If a1  a2  a3  a4  a5  a6 , then the equation  x  a1  x  a3  x  a5   3  x  a2  x  a4  x  a6   0
has
A) Three real roots B) A root in  , a1 
C) A root in  a1 , a2  D) A root in  a5 , a6 
38. Let x  111....11,

  y  444....44,
  z  777....77
  , w  999....99
  , then choose the correct option(s)
20 digits 20 digits 10 digits 10 digits
49 x  9 z 2
7 49 x  9 z 2 2
16  x  y 
A)   B)C) 9 y  4 w2  8 w D)    10  1
10
14 w 9 14 w 9 5  zw
  
39. The value of  lying between & and 0  A  and satisfying the equation.
4 2 2
1  sin 2 A cos 2 A 2 sin 4
sin 2 A 1  cos 2 A 2 sin 4  0 then
sin 2 A cos 2 A 1  2sin 4
  3    3
A) A  ,   B) A   C) A  ,   D) A  , 
4 8 8 5 8 6 8
Page 7
Given 8 C1 x 1  x   2.8 C2 x 2 1  x   3.8 C3 x3 1  x   ....  8. x8  a0  a1 x  a2 x 2  ....  a8 x8 , then
7 6 5
40.
A) a0  a1  8 B) a0  a1  0
C) a0 . a1  0 D) a0  a1  a2  a3  ....  a8  8
41. If a, b, c are non-zero real numbers such that 3  a 2  b2  c 2  1  2  a  b  c  ab  bc  ca  , then

which of the following is/are correct
A) 2a,  2b, 2c are in A. P B) 2a ,  2b, 2c are in G. P
C) a,  2b, 2c are in H. P D) 3a  c  2b
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Consider two quadratic polynomials as P  x   x 2  2 x  a 2  15a  27, Q  x   x 2   3  b  x  b,
where a, b  R
42. If graph of y = P(x) lies above and below the x – axis, then the largest integral value of a is K,
K
where is equal to
3
43.Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

A) 12 B) 3 C) 1 D) 4
If the minimum value of Q(x) is positive, then sum of all integral values of ‘b’ is P where
P
5
is
equal to
A) 7 B) 35 C) 5 D) 9

Let f : R  R be a function defined as f  x    x  1 x  2  x  3 x  6   100 . If g  x  is a
g  x
polynomial of degree  3 such that  f  x  dx does not contain any logarithmic function and
g(-2) = - 10, then
44. Which of the following is incorrect

A) f(x) = 0 has all four distinct real roots
B) f(x) = 0 has two real and two imaginary roots
C) f(x) is many one and in to function
D) real roots of the equation f(x) = 0, have opposite sign

A) Degree of g(x) is 2 B) Minimum value of f(x) is – 84
C) Degree of g(x) is 3 D) minimum value of f(x), occurs when x = 2
46. Which of the following is correct

A) Minimum value of g(x) is – 42 When x = -2 B) Minimum value of g(x) is - 21 when x = 2
4 g  x  4 g x
C)  dx  D)  dx  
0 f x
  2 0 f x
 
Page 8
SECTION – IV
47. All the values of k for which the quadratic polynomial f  x   2 x 2  kx  k 2  5 has two different
zeros and only one of them satisfying 0 < x < 2 lie in the minimum possible interval (a, b), then the
value of (a + 10b) is equal to
48. If the roots of x 4  ax3  bx 2  cx  d  0 are real and positive, then the minimum value of
 a  b  c
is equal to
2 d
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
49. If the sum 1   2  1  2  2  1  2  2  .....  1   equal to n 
1999   2000 
2 2 2
1 2 2 3 3 4 n
Where n  N . Then (n – 2000) is equal to
1 1 1 1
50. The sequence is defined as follows: a1  , an 1  an2  an n  N , S    ..... 
2 a1  1 a2  1 a100  1
then [S] is (where [.] denotes greatest integer function)

51. Let A   aij  1  i, j  3 be a 3 x 3 matrix and B  bij  1  i, j  3  be a 3 x 3 matrix such that
3 det  B 
bij   aik a jk . If det  A   4 , then the value of is
k 1 4
1 1
xn xn
52. Let I n  
x 2012  1
dx, J n  
x 2013  1
dx  n  2012, n  N & the matrix A  aij  33
where
0 0
I I , i j J  J j 3, i j
aij   2012 i i & the matrix B   bij 33 where bij   2016  j . Then the value
 0, i j  0, i j
of {trace  A1   det  B 1   210 } is equal to
53. Let An ,  n  N  be a matrix of order  2n  1   2n  1 , such that aij  0,  i  j and

aij  n 2  i  1  2n,  i  j where aij denotes the element of ith row and j th column of An . Let
 102 
  Tn 
Tn   1   sum of the elelments of An  . Then the value of  n 1
n
 is equal to (where [.]
 520200 
 
represents the greatest integer function)
1
 n  n  r n r  r x
lim   1 nCr    Ck x k 2 k   x 2  x    e n
r
54. then  
x 0
 r 0  k 0  
 
Let  n  2  3 . Then the value of Lt  n   n  is equal to
n
55. (where [.] denotes G.I.F)
n 
Page 9
2018
r 1 m.2n  1
56. The value of 
r 1 r ! 2018  r  !
is
2018!
, where m is odd natural number, then sum of digits of n
is equal to
PHYSICS: Max. Marks: 84

SECTION – I
57. A point charge q is placed at the apex of a thin hemi spherical surface (surface passes through the
charge). Flux through it’s curved surface is
q q  1  q
A) B)  1  C) D) Zero
2 2 0 2 0  2 2 0

58. The electric potential in vacuum is   x, y, z   ax 2 where a is a constant of suitable dimensions. The
total charge contained in a cube whose faces intersect the respective coordinate axes perpendicularly
at x   L, y   L and z   L is
A) Zero B) 2a 0 L3 C) 4a 0 L3 D) 16a 0 L3
59. The diagram shows three infinitely long uniform line charges of charge per unit length
2 ,3 and  Cm-1 placed on the X, Y and Z axes respectively. The work done in moving a unit
positive charge from (1, 1, 1) m to (0, 1, 1) m is equal to (centers of the wires are coinciding with
origin)
 ln 2  ln 2 3 ln 2
A) J B) J C) J D) Zero
2 0  0 2 0
60. Electric potential at the centre of a cube having uniform volumetric charge density ‘  ’ and side ‘a’
is V0 . Then electric potential at the tip of a square pyramid having same volumetric charge density
(  ) of base area 4a2 and height ‘a’ is
V V 2V 4V
A) 0 B) 0 C) 0 D) 0
4 6 3 3
Page 10
61. A hollow non conducting sphere A and a solid non conducting sphere B of equal radii R and masses
m and 2m are kept at a large distance apart on a rough horizontal non conducting surface. Charges
on A and B are Q and 2Q respectively. Charges are uniformly distributed and remain constant and
uniform as spheres come closer. Friction is sufficient to support pure rolling. Kinetic energy of the
K
two spheres just before collision is K A and K B . Find B
KA
2 3 42 25
A) B) C) D)
7 5 25 42
62. A satellite is orbiting around the Earth in a circular orbit. It’s orbital speed is V0. A rocket on board
is fired from the satellite which imparts a thrust to the satellite directed radially away from the centre
of the earth. The duration of the engine burn is negligible so that it can be considered instantaneous.
Due to this thrust a velocity variation V is imparted to the satellite. Find the minimum value of the
V
ratio for which the satellite will escape out the gravitational field of the earth
V0
1
A) B) 1 C) 2 D) 2

2
63. Two planets have masses M and 16 M and their radii are a and 2a , respectively. The separation
between the centers of the planets is 10a .A body of mass m is fired from the surface of the larger
planet towards the smaller planet along the line joining their centers. For the body to be able to reach
at the surface of smaller planet, the minimum firing speed needed is
45GM 45GM 30GM 30GM
A) B) C) D)
4a 2a 4a 2a
64. If a body is projected from Earth’s surface with a velocity 15gR (where ‘g’ is acceleration due to
gravity on Earth’s surface and R is radius of Earth) it’s final velocity at an infinite distance from
Earth in inter stellar space is
A) 2gR B) 13gR C) 11gR D) gR
SECTION – II
65. Two satellites S1 and S2 revolve around a planet in coplanar circular orbits in the same sense.
Their periods of revolution are 1h and 8h respectively. The radius of orbit of S1 is 104 Km .
Choose the correct option(s)
A) When S1 and S2 are at closest separation angular speed of S 2 as observed by an astronaut in
7
S1 is rad hour 1
4
Page 11
B) When S1 and S2 are at closest separation angular speed of S2 as observed by an astronaut in

S1 is rad hour 1
3
C) When S1 and S2 are at largest separation angular speed of S2 as observed by an astronaut in
3
S1 is rad hour 1
5
D) The time interval in which they will be in closest separation regularly is 8 7 hour
66. Two charges A and B of equal magnitude are placed as shown in fig.1. B is fixed and A is
moving in anticlockwise sense in the circle shown in fig.1. Fig.2 and fig.3 represent the variation
of electric field intensities E x and E y along x and y-axes at the origin due to these charges with
respect to angle covered by the line joining origin and charge A with x-axis. Then (speed of
particle A<<c(speed of light))

A) A is negative charge B) A is positive charge
C) B is negative charge D) B is positive charge
67. A small dipole having dipole moment P is placed in front of a fixed solid uncharged conducting
1
sphere as shown in the diagram. Choose the correct option(s). ( K  where  is permittivity
4
of the medium)
KP cos 
A) The net electric potential at point A lying on the surface of the sphere is
r2
KP cos 2 
B) The net electric potential at point A lying on the surface of the sphere is
r2
C) The electric potential at point A lying on the surface due to induced charges will be
KP cos   cos   1
r2
D) The electric potential at point A lying on the surface due to induced charges will be
KP cos  1  cos  
r2
Page 12
68. A cube is made from six thin insulating square faces, each square having side ‘d’ and carrying a
uniformly distributed charge of Q. The magnitude of electric flux leaving the sixth face, due to the
electric field of other five faces, is  . The magnitude of electrostatic force on each face of cube is
F. Then,
5Q Q Q2 Q2
A)   B)   C) F  D) F 
6 0 2 0 2 0 d 2 0 d 2
69. Two Non-conducting spheres of radii R1 & R2 carrying uniform volume charge densities   and  
respectively are placed such that they partially overlap as shown in the figure and the overlapping
region is cavity. At all points in the cavity which of the following statements is/are correct about
the electric field and electric potential
 
R1 R2
A) The electric field is zero

B) The electric potential is constant
C) The electric field is constant in magnitude
D) The electric field has different directions at different points
SECTION – III
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot (PARAGRAPH TYPE)

A particle of mass m and charge –q revolves in an elliptical orbit around a fixed charge +Q. The
shortest and longest distances of the moving particle from the fixed charge are a and 4a, at points
A and B, respectively. At point C, the velocity vector of the particle makes angle  with line QC as
shown, where QC  2a
70. Speed of the revolving particle at point B will be

3kQq kQq 8kQq kQq
A) VB  B) VB  ` C) VB  D) VB 
5ma 10 ma 5ma 5ma
 1 
71. Radius of curvature of the path of the revolving particle when it is at point A  k   will be
 4 0 
8a 5a 2a 5a
A) RA  B) RA  C) RA  D) RA 
5 8 5 2
72. The angle  is equal to
 1   3  2  3
A) sin 1   B) sin 1   C) sin 1   D) sin 1  
 3  4   3  4
Page 13
In order to investigate the interaction between a point charge and a conducting spherical shell, the
method of spherical image charges can be applied. Firstly, we can consider a simple situation of
two point charges +Q1 and –Q2 in space. In the field produced by them the locus of points of zero
1  Q1 Q2 
potential is given by   0
4 0  r1 r2 
r1 r2
Q2
Q1
r1
  constant. According to Appollonius theorem, points with this property lie on a sphere
r2
called “Appollonius sphere”. Therefore zero potential surface is a sphere.
If a spherical metal shell (of Radius R) is earthed (see diagram) and a point charge ‘Q’ is placed
inside it at a distance ‘d’ from centre  d  R  , electric field inside the shell (along with the points
on the shell), due to the actual charge and induced charge will be as if it were produced by the
actual charge Q and a negative point charge outside the spherical shell. The latter charge is what is
called a “spherical image charge”. The spherical shell then can be considered the “Appollonius
sphere” mentioned above.

d
O Q
73. What is the force of interaction between grounded sphere and charge ‘Q’ mentioned in the
paragraph?
KQ 2 Rd KQ 2 d KQ 2 d KQ 2
A) B) C) D) 2
 R2  d 2   R2  d 2  R d2
2 1/2
R3
74. The value and location of image charge will be

d
A) “ Q ” to the right of Q and outside the sphere
R
R
B) “ Q ”to the right of Q and outside the sphere
d
d
C) “ Q ” to the left of Q and inside the sphere
R
R
D) “ Q ”to the left of Q and outside the sphere
d
Page 14
SECTION – IV
75. A particle having a charge 1.6  1019 C is fixed in space and another particle having a charge
1.6  10 19 C is projected with a kinetic energy 1.44  10 9 eV from an infinite separation from the
fixed charged so that the perpendicular distance between its initial direction of motion and the fixed
charge is 6m as shown in figure. The closest distance of approach of the particle (in meter) is
(neglect any external or internal gravitational forces on the particles)
76. A charge Q is distributed uniformly in a solid non conducting sphere of radius R. If a point charge q
R
of mass ‘m’ is released from rest from a distance from center of the sphere, its velocity on
3
Qq
reaching the surface of the sphere is V  the value of n is (assume no resistance for the
n 0 mR
motion of the particle and neglect gravitational interaction )
77.
The electric potential V in volt in a region of space is given by V  a x 2  a y 2  2 a z 2 where ‘a’ is a
constant of appropriate dimensions. What is the radius (in m) of circle of equipotential curve
corresponding to V=6250V and z  2m . ( a  1.25  103 V / m 2 )
78. A system consists of a uniformly charged sphere of radius R and it’s surrounding medium filled by a

charge with the volume charge density   , where  is positive constant and r is the distance
r
from the center of sphere. The value of charge on the sphere is found to be Q  n R 2 for which the
electric field intensity E outside the sphere is independent of r. then find the value of n.
79. The electric potential varies in space as V  3 x  4 y volt, where x and y are in meter. A particle of
mass 37.5mg and carrying a charge 1 C starts from rest from point (2,3,2)m under the influence of
this field. Velocity of the particle (in ms 1 ) when it crosses x-z plane is
80. A thin ring of radius R carries a non-uniform charge of linear density   0 cos  as shown in fig.
Magnitude of net dipole moment of the ring is n R 2 0 . The value of n is
Page 15
81. A charge Q is uniformly distributed on the surface of thin spherical shell of radius R. Then the value
B
R Q
of  E.dl between two points A and B on the surface which are at a separation is n  .
A
2 4 0 R
The value of n is
82. Two point charges q and -2q are kept at a separation d in x-y plane. The locus of zero potential
points (except at infinity)due to these charges in x-y plane with the origin of co-ordinates at q is a
2d
circle of radius . The value of n is (taking electric potential due to a point charge at infinite
n
distance from it as zero)
83. An electric dipole of dipole moment P and moment of inertia I is kept in a uniform electric field of
strength E, with its dipole moment making an angle 600 with the direction of field. If it is released
nPE
from that position its maximum angular velocity is   . The value of n is
I
84. Two equal point charges are fixed at x   a and x   a on the x-axis. Another point charge Q is
placed at the origin. The change in the electrical potential energy of Q when it is displaced by a
n
small distance x along the x-axis, is approximately proportional to x 2 . The value of n is

S NO NAME OF THE FACULTY
PAPER SETTER:
SUBJECT MOBILE NO
M SWAMY RANGA REDDY
1 CHEMISTRY 9849349070
@JBH
B SRINIVASARAO
2 PHYSICS 9550912649
@JBH
GANESH
3 MATHEMATICS 9908210140
@BH
Page 16
OUTGOING SR SGTA-01 Date: 27-04-2023
Time: 3 Hrs. ADV MODEL (2010- P1) Max. Marks: 252
KEY SHEET
CHEMISTRY
1) C 2) D 3) C 4) A 5) C
6) A 7) D 8) A 9) BCD 10) ABC
11) BC 12) ABC 13) ABCD 14) D 15) B
16) D 17) B 18) C 19) 6 20) 3
21) 3 22) 4 23) 4 24) 4 25) 1

26) 0 27) 6 28)
MATHEMATICS
5
29) D 30) C 31) A 32) C 33) D
34) C 35) C 36) A 37) ACD 38) ACD
39) ABCD 40) ACD 41) BD 42) D 43) A
44) A 45) C 46) C 47) 7 48) 7
49) 0 50) 1 51) 4 52) 9 53) 2
54) 3 55) 1 56) 6
PHYSICS
57) A 58) D 59) B 60) C 61) D
62) B 63) A 64) B 65) BCD 66) BC
67) BC 68) BC 69) C 70) B 71) A
72) C 73) A 74) B 75) 2 76) 6
77) 1 78) 2 79) 1 80) 1 81) 0
82) 3 83) 1 84) 4

SOLUTIONS
CHEMISTRY:
1. Alkyl group shows I effect O  shows +I effect
2. Benzene Cyclopropenyl cation and Azulene are aromatic
3. Molecular orbitals formed by ‘s’ orbitals are symmetric (gerade) with zero nodal plane
4. Cation has empty p orbital while alkene has  * orbital to accept  electrons.
5. All carbons have ‘  ’ bond thus sp2 hybridisation is possible
6. By using Hess law
7. More is the stability of alkene, less is the heat of hydrogenation
8. Same charge on adjacent atoms, destabilise the compound
9. M  g  
1E2
100 eV
M g  
1E2
150 eV
 M g2
10.
11.
EN values decreases from N to Sb
AlCl3 has 3C  4e bond

‘NO’ has odd e  bond
12. Resonance effect is more stronger than inductive effect
13. Conceptual
14. BrF5 has square pyramidal structure
15. sp 3 d  d z 2
sp3 d 2  d x2  y2 , d z 2
sp 3 d 3  d x2  y 2 , d z 2 , d xy
16. SF5  Geometry  Octahedral

Shape  Square pyramidal
17. Conceptual
18. Conceptual
19. After loosing 5 th valency e-, the given species acquire noble gas configuration Group number  15 .
Sum of digit  1  5  6
Page 2
20. Normally 5th orbit accommodate 18 elements. If every orbital accommodate 3 electrons, total
elements become 27.
21. OMe,  OCOMe,  NMe2 are groups shows +M effect due to the presence of lone pair on attached
atom of benzene ring.
22. Except B, C, E all are aromatic
23. Process of c, d, f, j involves release of energy
24. Z*  Z 
 6   0.85  2  0.35  3
 6  1.7  1.05
 6   2.75  3.25  X .YZ 
Z  X Y  5  3  2  4
B. O of CO32 4 / 3
25.  1
B. O of SO32 4 / 3
26. C22  3; O22  1; O22  3; CN   3; NO   3; O2  2; C2  2; Li2  1

27. TeBr6 
2
 1;  BrF2 

 2; SNF3  0;  XeF3   3
28. According to Fajan’s rule, small anion, large cation with small charge are favorable for ionic bond
formation.
MATHEMATICS:
29.
Page 3
30.
31.
32.
33.

34.
35.
k
1 1 k
2k
36.  k  k
Cr  
3k
 k
Cr  
3k
r 0 3 r 0
Page 4
37. Let f  x    x  a1  x  a3  x  a5   3  x  a2  x  a4  x  a6   0
Note that f  x    as x  
f  a1   3  a1  a2  a1  a4  a1  a6   0
Similarly f  a2   0 , f  a3   0 , f  a4   0 , f  a5   0 , f  a6   0
Thus f  x   0 has a root in each of the following intervals  a1 , a2  a3 , a4  &  a5 , a6  .
Thus f  x   0 has three real roots.
38.
39.
n
C1 x 1  x   2.n C2 x 2 1  x   3.n C3 x3 1  x   ....  n. x n   r. nCr x r . 1  x 
n n 1 n 2 n 3 n r
40.
r 1
n
n n 1
  r.  Cr 1 x r . 1  x 
n r

r 1 r
n
 n 1   r 1
 n
r 1
 n 1
Cr 1 x x r 1 . 1  x 
n
 n 1  r 1
 n x  Cr 1 x r 1. 1  x 
n 1
r 1
 n x  x  1  x  
n 1
nx
On simplifying we get  a  b    b  c    c  a    a  1   b  1   c  1  0
2 2 2 2 2 2
41.
 a  b  c 1
42.
43.
44, 45& 46.
Page 5
47.
48.

49.
50.
Page 6
2
51. B  A AT  B  A AT  A AT  A  16
52.
53.

54.
55.
Page 7
2018
r 1 1 2018 1  2018 2018 2018

56. 
r 1 r ! 2018  r  !
 
 2018 ! r 1
 r  1 2018
C r  
 2018 !  r 1
r C r  r 1
2018
Cr 


1
2018!
 
2018.2 2017   2 2018  1 
1
2018!
 2016.22017  1
1

2018!
 63.2 2022  1
n  2022
PHYSICS:
q
57. Flux through the closed hemi spherical surface is
2 0
Flux through flat (circular) surface = flux through cone of semi vertex angle 450
q q  1 
  2 1  cos 45    1 
4 0 2 0  2
∴ Flux through curved surface = flux through closed hemi spherical surface – flux through flat

surface
q q  1  q
   1  
2 0 2 0  2  2 2 0
58.   x, y, z   ax 2
  
Ex    2ax, E y    0, Ez  0
x y z
E  E xiˆ  E y ˆj  E z kˆ  E xiˆ  2axiˆ
At x   L , flux is entering the cube perpendicular to faces and flux through remaining faces is zero
(∴ field is parallel to remaining faces)
   EA  2  2aL   2 L   2
2
(  Side length of each face  2L )
qin
  16 aL3   16aL3  qin  16aL3 0
0
59. Potential difference between two points at perpendicular distances r1, r2 from a charged wire is
 r
V2  V1  ln 1 .
2 0 r2
Where r1, r2 are perpendicular distances of initial and final points from the wire.
W  V2  V1  Q
r1  2 m, r2  2 m for wire along X- axis, r1  2 m, r2  1 m for both the wires along Y& Z- axes
 r 2 2  2 3 2 4 
W   ln 1  ln  ln  ln  ln 2  ln 2 J
2 0 r2 2 0 2 2 0 1 2 0 1 2 0  0
Page 8
60. Electric potential at the centre of a cube of side length ‘a’ having charge Q is
1 KQ
V0  (Where Q  V )
4 0 a
Electric potential at the centre of a cube of side length ‘2a’ having same volume charge density  is
1 8Q
V K  4V0 (Charge in new cube   8V  8Q )
4 0 2a
Cube of side length ‘2a’ is combination of 6 pyramids each of base area 2a  2a and height a.
4V 2V
 Electric potential at the tip of pyramid  0  0
6 3
61. Let v1 and v2 be the speeds of hallow and solid spheres just before collision. Using COAM about
point O on the ground
2 v 2 v  42
0  mv1 R  mR 2 1  2mv2 R  2mR 2  2   v1  v2
3 R 5 R 25
1 2 12 v2 1 5

KA  mv1  mR 2 12  mv12 
2 23 R 2 3
1  2 1 14
K B  2mv22 1    mv22
2  5 2 5
K B 42  v22  25
  
K A 25  v12  42
GM
62. V0        i 
r
Speed after firing of the rocket is given by V 2  V02  V 2
1 GMm V 2  V 2 GM V
To escape mV 2  0 0   V02  V 2  2 V02  1
2 r 2 r V0
63. For the body to reach the surface of smaller planet (starting with minimum initial speed) it should be
able to just reach the null point between the planets. Let r be the distance of null point from the
Centre of larger planet
G  16 M GM 4 1
    r  8a
10a  r  r 10 a  r
2 2
r
Page 9
Let v be the minimum speed of projection from the surface of larger planet. Conserving total energy
of the system between the point of projection and null point
G16 Mm 1 2 GMm G16 Mm GMm
 mv    0
2a 2 8a 8a 2a
1 2 15GMm 15GMm 45GMm 45GM
mv    v 
2 2a 8a 8a 4a
64. From conservation of mechanical energy

GMm 1 GMm 1 2
 
2
 m 15gR   mv
R 2  2
Where M = mass of Earth and V is final speed of the body
gR 2 m 1 1  GM 
 m  15gR  mv 2  V  13gR  g  2 
R 2 2  R 
65. Let 1 and  2 be their angular speeds about and v1 and v2 be their linear speeds in their orbits
r2
v1 v2
r1 S1 S2
1h 8h

1 
2
1
rad h 1 , 2 
2
8
rad h 1
T2  r 
and 12   1  

T2  r2  
1  r1 
3
    r2  4 r1
64  r2 
2 2
v1  r11  10 4  Kmph  2  10 4 Kmph , v2  r22  4 10 4    10 4 Kmph
1 8
When they are at closest separation angular speed of S2 as seen by an astronaut in S1 is
vrel 2 104   10 4 
   rad hour 1
r2  r1 3 10 4 3
v1
r2 r1
S2 S1
v2
When they are at largest separation angular speed of S2 as seen from S1 is

vrel  10 4  2 10 4 3
   rad h 1
r1  r2 5 10 4
5
Let t be the time interval in which they will be at closest separation periodically. In this time if S2
rotates through angle  . S1 rotates through 2  
Page 10

S1 S2
1t  2    1t  2  2t  t  8 7 hour

66. For   00 , E y  0 , E x is maximum along –ve x-axis and as  increases from 0 to , E y increases
2
from 0 to maximum along negative y-axis. If A is negative and B is negative E x  0 for   00 and
if A is negative , B is positive E x is maximum and will be along positive x-axis.
 A should not be negative and B should not be positive.  A is positive and B is negative
67.

Net electric potential at A = net electric potential at center due to dipole and induced charges
KP cos 0 KP cos 2 
 2
 0   0 ( potential due to induced charges at center is zero)
 r  r2
 cos  
 
Net electric potential at A = potential due to dipole at A +potential due to induced charges at A
KP cos 2  KP cos 
  Vinduced
r2 r2
KP cos 2  KP cos  KP
 Vinduced    2 cos   cos   1
r2 r2 r
68. Consider two closed Gaussian surfaces S1 just enclosing the cube and other S2 just inside the cube.
Consider one of the faces of the cube (say A)
S1
S2
 dF cos
C B dF
A
Let  be the flux through face B of cubical Gaussian surface S1 due to remaining five faces of cube
and   be the flux through the same face B due to face A of the cube.
Page 11
1  6Q  Q
Then       
6  0  0
Flux through face C of cubical Gaussian surface S2 due to face A of the cube is also   and flux due
to remaining five faces is  .  and   are in opposite directions through face C.
Flux through face A of the cube due to remaining five faces is equal to flux through face B of cubical
Gaussian surface S1  flux through face C of cubical Gaussian surface S2  
Net flux through face C of cubical Gaussian surface S2 is zero ( charge enclosed by S2 is zero)
B and C are faces of cubical Gaussian surfaces S1 and S2 on either side of A respectively.
Q Q
     0       2   
0 2 0
Consider a small element of area dA of face A. E be the intensity of electric field due to remaining
faces at this element
Force on the element is dF  E dq  E dA
 Force on the face A is F   dF cos    E dA cos     d    where  flux through face A
due to remaining five faces
Q Q Q Q Q2
F    2 
A 2 0 d 2 0 2 0 d 2

69.

r1
P 
r2
C1  C2
d
Consider a point P inside the cavity. Cavity is equivalent to super position of materials of charge
densities  and -  of the spheres. So the combination is equivalent to two solid spheres having
uniform charge densities  and -  superposing in the region of cavity.
 Net electric field at point P due to both the spheres is
  

  
 r  r 
1  r2

       
E
 r1
3 0

3 0
2

3 0

d
3 0

 d  r2  r1  d  r1  r2  d  C C 
1 2
i.e., the field inside the cavity at any point is same both in magnitude and direction and its direction

is parallel to the line joining the centers ( d ). i.e., Field inside the cavity is uniform and electric
potential is not same at all points.
70& 71.
Conservation of angular momentum  4aVB  aVA  VA  4VB
Energy equation at A and B gives,
1  Qq  1  Qq 
mVA2  k    mVB  k 
2

2  a  2  4a 
1 kQq
 mVB2 16  1  3
2 4a
Page 12
3 kQq 2 kQq kQq
VB2     or VB 
4 a 15m 10ma 10 ma
2 2
mVA kQq ma kQq 8
 2 R 16   a
R a kQq 10ma 5
72. Angular momentum equation at B and C  mVc sin  2a  mVB  4a

2V
 c  B
sin 
1 kQq 1 kQq
Energy equation  mVc2   mVB2 
2 2a 2 4a
1  4  kQq 1
 mVB2  2  1    10mVB2
2  sin   4 a 4
4 2
  5  1  6 or sin  
sin 
2
3
73& 74.
A d
B q
O Q

x
Let the image charge be q outside the sphere at a distance x from centre.
1  Q q 
VA  0      0..... 1
4 0  R  d R  x 
1  Q q 
VB  0      0.....  2 
4 0  R  d x  R 
R  d  R  x R  d   x  R
 and 
Q q Q q
By subtracting
2 d 2 R  R 
 q Q
Q q  d 
And substitute back,
R  d  R  x
 d
Q RQ
 R R  d   R  xd
R2
R 2  xd  x 
d
Qq Qqd 2 Q 2 Rd
So F   
4 0  x  d  4 0  R 2  d 2  4 0  R 2  d 2 
2 2 2
Page 13
75.
Let r be the closet separation, v0 and v be the velocites of the particle at infinite separation and at
closet separation respectively. From conservation of angular momentum of the particle about the
fixed charge
vd
mv0 d  mvr  v  0
r
From conservation of T.E
1 1 1 q  q  1 1 q2
mv02  0  mv 2    m(v 2  v0 2 )  
2 2 4 0 r 2 4 0 r
1  v0 2 d 2  1 q2
 m  2  v0 2   
2  r  4 0 r
2d r 
2 2
1 1 q2
 mv0   
 4 0 r
2
2  r
 d 2  r2  2.56  10 38

1.44  10 9  1.6  1019  2   9  109

 r  r
d 2  r2  r  6  r2  r  r2  r  6  0  r  2m
Q  3R 2  r 2 
76. Potential at a distance r from center of the sphere is V 
4 0 R  2 R 2 
R Q 4
Potential at a distance from center of the sphere is V1   and potential on the
3 4 0 R 3
Q 1 1 Qq 1 Qq
surface V2  and mv 2  V  q  (V1  V2 ) q  mv 2   v
4 0 R 2 2 4 0 R 3 6 0 mR
77. Equipotential curve corresponding to z  2m and V=6250V is in x-y plane and its radius is
r  x 2  y 2 . V  ax  ay  2 az
2 2 2
a ( x 2  y 2 )  6250  2az 2  ar 2  6250  2  1250  2  1250

1.25  103 r 3  1250  r  1m
Q
78. Intensity of electric field due to the sphere at a distance r from its center is E1 
4 0 r 2
Intensity of electric field due to a thin spherical shell of radius x and thickness dx of the surrounding
medium at a distance r from center of the sphere is
1  4 x 2 dx 1  
dE    x 2 dx  xdx
4 0 r 2
0 r 2
x 0 r 2
r r
x 
Total field due to surrounding medium E2   dE   dx  E2  (r 2  R 2 )
R
 r
R 0
2
2 0 r 2
Page 14
Q   1 Q  R2 
Net field strength E  E1  E2   ( r 2
 R 2
)     
4 0 r 2 2 0 r 2 2 0 r 2  4 0 2 0 
dE
For E to be independent of r,0
dr
2 Q  R2  Q  R2
 3    0    0  Q  2 R 2
r  4 0 2 0  4 0 2 0
v  v 
79. E i j  3i  4 j
x y
The particle moves in the direction of the field and crosses x-z plane at a point (-1/4, 0, 2)
4 y  y1 3  0
  2   8  4 x  9  x  1/ 4m
3 x2  x1 2  x
Potential at (2,3,2)is V1=18V, and potential at (-1/4,0,2) is V2= - 0.75V
1 2 1
mv  (V1  V2 ) q  (37.5  10 6 )V 2  18.75  106  V  1ms 1
2 2
80.

Dipole moment due to elemental charges A and A is dp  dq  2 x
dp   ( Rd )  2 R cos   dp  20 R 2 cos 2  d
  
 1  cos 2
2 2 2

Total dipole moment p   dp   2 R cos 2  d   2 R  d
2 2
0 0 





  2 
2 2 2
 
2 2
   R d   R  cos 2 d   R   0   R
2 2 2 2
0 0 0 0
 
 
2 2
B
81. Potential at any point on the surface of shell is same.   E.dl  0

A
82.
Kq K  2q
Potential due to these charges at a point p (x,y) in x-y plane is V   0
x2  y2 (d  x) 2  y 2
Page 15
Kq 2Kq
i.e, 
x y
2 2
(d  x) 2  y 2
( d  x ) 2  y 2  4( x 2  y 2 )  d 2  x 2  2dx  y 2  4 x 2  4 y 2
2dx d 2
 d 2  2 dx  3x 2  3 y 2  x 2  y 2    0  (1)
3 3
Equation (1) is in the form of x 2  y 2  2 gx  2 fy  c  0 which is equation of a circle.
Therefore the locus of zero potential points is a circle with center at (-g, -f)=(-d/3, 0)
d2  d 2  4d 2 2d
and radius r  g 2  f 2  c   0   
9  3  9 3
83. Gain in rotational KE= loss in potential energy of the dipole

1 2 1 1 PE
I   PE (cos 0  cos 60)  I  2  PE    
2 2 2 I
84.

Kq 2 KQq Kq 2 KQq KQq Kq 2 2a
Ui    2 and U f      KQq  2
2a a 2a a  x a  x 2a a  x2
PE  U f  U i
 a 1  a2  a2  x2  2 KQqx 2
 2 KQq  2
a x
2
 
a
 2 KQq 
  a2  x2  a

 a3
 x 2
 a 2   PE x 2
 
Page 16
OUTGOING SR Date: 27-04-2023
Time: 3 HRS SGTA- 01 Max Marks: 237
Time: 3:00 Hour’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 237
CHEMISTRY
Sec – I (Q.N : 1 – 6) Questions with Single Correct Options 5 0 6 30
Sec – II( Q.N : 7 – 11) Questions with Integer Answer type 3 0 5 15
Sec – III(Q.N : 12 – 17) +3 -1 6 18
(2 comprehensions: 3 +3 = 6 Q)
Sec – IV(Q.N : 18 – 19) Questions with Matrix matching type 8 0 2 16
Total 19 79

MATHEMATICS
Section
Sec – I (Q.N : 20 – 25)
Question Type
Questions with Single Correct Options
+Ve
Marks
5
- Ve
Marks
0
No. of
Qs
6
Total
marks
30
Sec – II(Q.N : 26 – 30) Questions with Integer Answer type 3 0 5 15
Sec – III(Q.N : 31 – 36) +3 -1 6 18
Total 19 79
PHYSICS
Sec – I (Q.N : 39 – 44) Questions with Single Correct Options 5 0 6 30
Sec – II(Q.N : 45 – 49) Questions with Integer Answer type 3 0 5 15
Sec – III(Q.N : 50 – 55) +3 -1 6 18
Total 19 79
CHEMISTRY: Max. Marks: 79
SECTION – I
This section contains 6multiple choice questions. Each question has FOUR options (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which
1. Properties of the elements of which of the following pairs do not resemble?
A) Li and Mg B) Be and Al C) Mg and Al D) B and Si
2. With respect to the compounds I-V, chose the incorrect statement
A) The acidity of compound I is due to delocalization in the conjugate base

B) The conjugate base of compound IV is aromatic
C) Compound II becomes more acidic, when it has a –NO2 substituent
D) The acidity of compound follows the order I  IV  V  II  III.
3. Which of the following is most ionic?

A) CaF2 B) Al2O3 C) MgBr2 D) BeO
4. In which of the following, both are having same number of total electrons and iso-structural?
NO3 , CO32  , ClO3 , SO3
A) NO3 , CO32 B) SO3 , NO3 C) ClO3 , CO32 D) CO32 , SO3
5. Which of the following molecular species has unpaired electrons

A) N2 B) F2 C) O2 D) O22
6. The increasing order of the atomic radii of the following Group 13 elements is
A) Al  Ga  In  TI B) Ga  Al  In  TI C) Al  In  Ga  TI D) Al  Ga  TI  In
SECTION – II
7. The total number of compounds having at least one bridging oxo group among the molecules given
below is
N 2O3 , N 2O5 , P4O6 , P4O7 , H 4 P2O5 , H 5 P3O10 , H 2 S2O3 , H 2 S 2O5
8. The maximum coordination number of carbon in Al2  CH 3 6 is
9. How many of the following are more acidic than benzoic acid?
COOH
COOH
COOH
OH HO
OH
Page 2
COOH COOH OH
CH3
CH3
NO2
OH
COOH COOH
COOH
COOH
OCH3
SO3H
OCH3
10. Consider the following compounds

How many compounds have higher value of heat of combustion than heat of combustion of
11. How many of the following are meta directing (Major) groups
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Each question has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) AND (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
According to valance shell electron pair repulsion theory the shape of the molecule depends upon
the repulsion between the electron pairs present in the valance shell. The repulsion between two
lone pairs is greater than the repulsion between a lone pair and a bond pair, which in turn is greater
than the repulsion between two bond pairs. The magnitude of repulsion between bonding pairs of
electrons depends on the electronegativity difference between the central atom and the other
atoms.
12. The shape of which of the molecule is pyramidal?

A) SF4 B) XeO3 C) XeF4 D) BF3
Page 3
13. Which of the following pair of species have identical shapes?
A) I 3 , XeF2 B) ClF3 , BF3 C) PCl5 , BrF5 D) CH 4 , XeF4
14. Hybridisation of silicon in SiO2 and SiC respectively is

A) sp, sp 2 B) sp, sp 3 C) sp 2 , sp 3 D) sp 3 , sp 3

A and B are structural isomers of C6H10. Both the isomers decolourise Bayer’s reagent. A on
ozonolysis produces 5-oxohexanal, whereas B on ozonolysis produces 2-methylpentane-1,5-dial.
Answer the following questions
15. Compound B is
A) 1-methyl cyclopentene B) 1-methyl cyclopent-2-ene
C) 2-methyl cyclopentene D) 3-methyl cyclopentene
16. Compound A on oxymercuration-demercuration gives

OH CH3
CH3
CH3
OH
OH
A) B) C) D) OH
17.
Compound A and B are respectively on hydrogenation, produces are
A) B)
C) D)
SECTION – III
(MATRIX MATCHING TYPE)
This section contains 2 groups of question. Each question contains statements given in 2 columns which
have to be matched. The statements in Column – I or labeled choices A, B, C and D, while the
statements Column- II are labeled p, q, r, s and t.
18. Match the Column I with Column II:
Column II
Column I
(Hybridisation of
(Compound)
underlined species)
A. BF3  Cl   __
X p. sp 3

B2 H 6  NH 3   H 2  __
Y
B. q. sp 2
(1 : 2)

B2 H 6  6 H 2O   2 Z  3H 2
C. r. sp
Z  H 2O 
 W
__  H
D. 2 NaBH 4  I 2 
 __
P  H 2  2 NaI s. 3 centre 2e- bond
t. Planar molecule
Page 4
19. Match each set of hybrid orbitals from List I with complex(es) given in List II:
List I List II
A. dsp 2 p.  FeF6 4

B. sp 3 q. Ti  H 2O 3 Cl3 
3
C. sp 3 d 2 r. Cr  NH 3  6 
D. d 2 sp 3 s.  FeCl4 2
2
t.  Ni  CN  4 
MATHEMATICS: Max. Marks: 79

SECTION – I
If both the roots of  2a  4  9 x   2a  3  3x  1  0 are non-negative, then

20.
5 5 5
A) 2  a  B) 2  a  C) a  D) a>3
2 2 2
5 5 5
21. If log14 , log 3 x 11 , log x 61 are in H.P then x is
3 
7
A) 2 or 3 B) 1 or 4 C) 1 or 5 D) 4 or 5
22. If the recurrence relation an  3.an 1  4 n 1  n  1, a0  2 then the number of positive integral
divisors of a10  310 equals
A) 11 B) 15 C) 21 D) 24
23. Number of triplets of a,b & c for which the system of equations, ax-by=2a-b and
(c+1) x+cy = 10 – a + 3b has infinitely many solutions and x = 1, y = 3 is one of the solutions, is
A) Exactly one B) Exactly two C) Exactly three D) Infinitely many
If number of terms in the expansion of  x  2 y  3 z  are 45, then maximum value of nCr is
n
24.
A) 70 B) 126 C) 35 D) 56
The last two digits of the number  23 are

14
25.
A) 01 B) 03 C) 09 D) 41
SECTION – II
26. The sum of the integral solutions of the equation x  1   x   x    x   x  where [.] and {.} denotes
the greatest integer and fractional part function, is equal to
Page 5

1
27. Let  
1  3 x  2 x 2 r 0
ar x r for x close to zero, then the value of  a3  a2  is equal to
28. Let  an  is an infinite geometric sequence with first term 2cotx and common ratio sin 2 x and  bn  is
 
an infinite geometric sequence with first term sin2x and common ratio sin 2 x. If x   0,  , then the
 4
  

minimum value of   ai   b j  is equal to
 i 1 j 1 
 2 1  3 4  3 4 
29. Let three matrices A    ; B  and C    then
 4 1  2 3  2 3 
 ABC   A  BC 2   A  BC 3 
tr  A   tr    tr    tr    ....  (where tr  A   trace of A )
 2   4   8 
   
n n
Cr
30. The value of lim   e  x , then x is equal to
r 0 n  r  3 
n r
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
1 2 0 
There exists a matrix Q such that PQP = N, where P   2 1 0  Given N is a diagonal matrix
T
 
0 0 1 
of form. N  diag.  n1 , n2 , n3  where n1 , n2 , n3 are three values of n satisfying the equation
det .  P  nI   0, n1  n2  n3
[Note : I is an identity matrix of order 3 x 3.]
31. The value of the det .  adjN  is equal to [Note: adj M denotes the adjoint of a square matrix M]
1 1
A) 4 B) C) D) 9
4 9
32. If QT  Q   I , then the value of  is equal to

1
A) – 1 B) 0 C) 1 D)
3
33. The trace of matrix P 2012 is equal to [Note: The trace of a square matrix is the sum of its diagonal
entries.]
A) 32011  2 B) 32012 C) 32012  2 D) 32011
Page 6
If A is a symmetric and B is a Skew symmetric matrix of same order and A+B, A – B are non
singular and C   A  B   A  B  then
1
C T denotes transpose of C 
34. C T  A  B  C is equal to
A) A+B B) A – B C) A D) B
35. C T  A  B  C is equal to
36. CT AC 
SECTION – III
37. Match the Column I with Column II:
Column I Column II
If a, b, c are positive real numbers such that

a b c
A. 9  25a 2  b 2   25  c 2  3ac   15b  3a  c  , then 30      p. 1210
b c a
Let a1 , a2 ...... be a sequence such that
B. 10 q. 270
a1  1 and an  an 1  n 2  n  2 then ai 1
i 
 15 
C. If   1  1  1
  a then 1088 a  r. 146
 k  1 2  k  2  
 2k
k 1
3 5 7 9
D. If S n      ... to n terms then 1  s. 1681
4 36 144 400 1  S 40
t. 450
n
1
38. Match the following from Column – I to Column – II For n  2, nCr  Cr and an  
r  0 Cr
Column - I Column -II

A. p. n  an 
n
r
C
r 0 r
B.

n
nr q.  an1 
r  0 Cr
n
C. n
1 r. n

r 1 r  C r 
 an 
2
D. n 1
1 s. 1
  n  r  C   an1 
r 0 r 2n
t. an
n
Page 7
PHYSICS: Max. Marks: 79
SECTION – I
39. A point charge  q1 and another point charge  q2 are kept at a small separation. An electric line of
force starting from q1 at an angle  with line AB reaches  q2 at an angle  with the line AB as
shown in the figure. Then ( q1 & q2 in the options are magnitudes of charges)
q1
A)    B)   
q2
 q     q   
C)   2sin 1  1 sin    D)   2 cos 1  1 sin   
 q2  2   q2  2 
40. A point charge q is placed at a distance r from the centre of a thin metallic spherical shell of radius R
as shown in fig. Electric potential at point A is

1 q 1 q 1 q q 1 1 
A) B) C) D)   
4 0 R 4 0 r 4 0 R r
2 2 4 0  r R 
41. The gravitational potential due to a particular mass distribution in space is given by
2 3 4
V    where x , y , z are in metres and V in J/kg. Then choose the INCORRECT statement.
x xy z
A) Magnitude of gravitational force acting on a particle of mass 2 kg kept at a point (1m, 1m, 1m) is
2 26 N
B) work done in moving a particle of mass 2 kg from (1m, 1m, 1m) to (2m, 2m, 2m) against the
gravitational force is 1.5 J
C) At y  1.5 m, there will be no component of gravitational field along x-axis
D) At z  4 m , magnitude of potential gradient along z- axis is 1 S.I unit
42. A bullet is fired vertically upwards with velocity v from the surface of a spherical planet. When it
reaches its maximum height, its acceleration due to the planet’s gravity is 1/4th of its value at the
surface of the planet. If the escape velocity from the planet is Vesc  V N , then the value of N is
(ignore energy loss due to atmosphere)
A) 2 B) 3 C) 5 D) 6
Page 8
43. A body is projected from the Earth’s surface with a velocity equal to half the escape velocity from
that point at an angle 450 with horizontal. The maximum height attained by the body above the
Earth’s surface is (nearly)
R
A) 0.125 R B) 0.19 R C) D) 0.9 R
3
44. An electric dipole of dipole moment 10 29 C .m is kept in an electric field of strength 1000 Vm 1 with
it’s dipole moment in the direction of the field. What is the work done by the electric field if the
dipole is rotated in the field so that it’s dipole moment makes an angle 60 0 with the field from it’s
initial position?
A) 5  10 27 J B) 8.66  10 27 J 27
C) 5  10 J D) 1.13  10 27 J
SECTION – II
45. A satellite of mass ‘ m ’ is orbiting around the earth of mass ‘M’ radius ‘R’ in a circular orbit of
 dE 
radius 4R. If it starts losing energy at a constant rate      due to friction, it following a
 dt 
3GMm
spiral patch and falls on the surface of Earth in time . Find the value of n.
nR
46.Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

A spy satellite S1, travelling in a circular orbit above the equator is taking pictures at quick intervals.
The satellite S1, moves in the direction of rotation of Earth and takes pictures of complete equator in
8 hour. Another satellite S2 moving in the same plane as S1 but in opposite sense of rotation of S1
takes pictures of complete equator in 6 hour. r1, r2 are radii of circular paths of S1and S2 respectively.
2/ 3
r1  3 
If   , find the value of n.
r2  n 
47. A point charge ‘q’ is placed at the centre of a circular plane surface of a cone. A shaded section
ABDCA shown at the slant surface of the cone. If the electric flux through the shaded section is
n q
 where ‘n’ and ‘m’ are minimum possible integers. Find ‘ n  m ’ (Given length
m 80 0
AB  h / 2 )
Page 9
48. In a perfectly insulating but viscous medium, a system consists of an insulating charged hollow
sphere (having charge Q) and a small dipole as shown. The sphere is fixed and the dipole is
movable, which is released when the dipole is at a distance L   l  from O( centre of the sphere).
The speed of the dipole when the distance reduces to L/2 (assume the drag force to be constant and
nQql FL
of magnitude F0 acting on each charge) is  0 . Find the value of ‘n’ (neglect the
4 0 mL2
m
gravitational force)
49. A non-conducting solid sphere of radius R  5 cm has its centre at the origin O of the coordinate
system shown in the figure. It has a spherical cavity of radius r  1 cm whose centre is at (0, 3cm).
106
Solid material of the sphere has a uniform positive charge density   coul.m-3. Assume the

dielectric constant of the material of the sphere to be 1. The potential in volts at point ‘P’ when
rounded off to the nearest integer value is found out to be ‘5z’. Find the value of ‘z’

SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
Consider a star and two planet system. The star has mass M. The planets A and B have the same
mass m, radius a and they revolve around the star in circular orbits of radius r and 4r
respectively  M  m, r  a  . Planet A has intelligent people living on it and they have achieved
a very high degree of technological advancement. They wish to shift a geostationary satellite of
their own planet to a geostationary orbit of planet B. They achieve this through a series of high
precision maneuvers in which the satellite never has to apply brakes and not a single joule of
energy is wasted. S1 is a geostationary satellite of planet A and S2 is a geostationary satellite of
planet B. Neglect interactions between A and B.
Page 10
50. If the time period of the satellite in geostationary orbit of planet A is T, then its time period in
geostationary orbit of planet B is
A) T B) 4 T C) 8 T D) Data insufficient
1/3
m
51. If the radius of the geostationary orbit in planet A is given by rG  r   , then the time in
M 
which the geostationary satellite will complete one revolution is
I) 1 planet year = time in which planet revolves around the star
II) 1 planet day = time in which planet revolves about its axis
A) I B) II C) both I and II D) neither I nor II
52. If planet A and B, both complete one revolution about their own axis in the same time, then the
minimum energy needed to transfer the geo-stationary satellite of mass m0 of planet A to geo-
stationary orbit of planet B is
Gm m0 GM m0 3GM m0
A) B) C) D) Zero
4r 4r 8r

A ball of radius R carries a positive charge whose volume charge density depends only on the
 r
distance r from the ball’s center as   0 1   , where  0 is constant. Assume  as the
 R

permittivity of the ball.
53. The magnitude of electric field as a function of the distance r from the center inside the ball is
given by
  r r2  0  r r 2  0  r r 2  0  r r 2 
A) E  0    B) E     C) E     D) E    
  3 4R    4 3R    3 4R    4 3R 
54. The maximum electric field intensity is

R R 0 R 0 R
A) Em  0 B) Em  0 C) Em  D) Em 
9 3 2 6
55. Electrostatic potential at a point on the surface of the ball is

2 0 R 2 4 0 R 2  R2 0 R 2
A) B) C) 0 D)
3 9 12  2
Page 11
SECTION – III
56. Column I gives certain situation in which electric field is represented by electric lines of forces in
x-y plane. Column II gives corresponding representation of equipotential lines in x-y plane. Match
the figures in column I with the figures in column II
Column I Column II
y
y Higher potential
A) p) x
x
Electric line
of forces
Lower potential
y
y Lower potential
B) q) x
x
Electric line
of forces

Higher potential
y y
Lower
potential
C) x r) x
Electric line Higher

of forces potential
y
y
Higher
potential
D) x s) x
Electric line Lower

of forces potential
Page 12
57. A point charge q is placed at a distance 3R from the centre of a neutral solid metal sphere as
shown in figure. Then match list- I with list- II (Point 1 is at center of the sphere)
3
R
2
4 1 q
3R
List I List II
A) Net electric potential at point 1 p) Zero
Electric potential at point 2 due to 1 q
B) q)
induced charges on the sphere 4 0 3 R
1 q
C) Net electric potential at point 2 r) 
4 0 6 R
Electric potential at point 3 due to 1 q
D) s)
induced charges on the sphere 4 0 10 R
q 1 1 
t)   
4 0 R  3 10 

PAPER SETTER:
S NO NAME OF THE FACULTY SUBJECT MOBILE NO
M SWAMY RANGA REDDY
1 CHEMISTRY 9849349070
@JBH
B SRINIVASARAO
2 PHYSICS 9550912649
@JBH
GANESH
3 MATHEMATICS 9908210140
@BH
Page 13
OUTGOING SR SGTA-01 Date: 27-04-2023
Time: 3 Hrs. ADV MODEL (2010- P2) Max. Marks: 237
KEY SHEET
CHEMISTRY
1) C 2) D 3) A 4) A 5) C
6) B 7) 5 8) 5 9) 6 10) 6
11) 5 12) B 13) A 14) D 15) D

A-p;B-p,t; A-t;B-s;
16) C 17) C 18) 19)
C-p;D-p,s C-p;D-q,r
MATHEMATICS

20)
25)
B
C
21)
26)
A
1
22)
27)
C
8
23)
28)
B
2
24)
29)
A
30) 2 31) D 32) B 33) C 34) A

A-r,B-p, A-r,B-r
35) B 36) C 37) 38)
C-q,D-s C-q,D-q
PHYSICS
39) C 40) B 41) D 42) A 43) B
44) C 45) 8 46) 4 47) 5 48) 3
49) 7 50) D 51) C 52) C 53) A

A-s,B-r, A-q,B-r
54) A 55) C 56) 57)
C-q,D-p C-q,D-t
SOLUTIONS
CHEMISTRY:
1. Li and Mg; Be and Al; B and Si are diagonally related
2. Compound N is more acidic due to aromatic character of anion
3. According to Fajan’s rule, small anion, large cation with small charge are favourable for ionic bond
formation
4. NO3 and CO32  has same number of e-
5. According to MOT, O2 has unpaired e- in  * 2 p y orbital
6. Ga has smaller radius than ‘Al’ due to less screening effect of 3d electrons in Ga.
7. N 2O5 , P4O6 , P4O7 , H 4 P2O5 , H 5 P3O10
8.
H H
H
Al(CH3)2
(CH3)2Al
CH3
9. Conceptual
10. More is the stability of alkene, less is the heat of combustion. Heat of combustion increases with
number of carbons of compound

11. Conceptual
12. Conceptual
13. Conceptual
14. In SiO2 and SiC, no Pi bonds. Thus silicon under goes sp3 hybridization
15. Conceptual
16. Conceptual
17. Compound A= ,
Compound B=
X   BF3Cl  , Y  B3 N 3 H 6 , W  H 3 BO3 , P  B2 H 6

18.
 FeF6   sp3d 2
4
19.
Ti  H 2O 3 Cl3   d 2 sp3
3
Cr  NH 3 6   d 2 sp 3
 FeCl4   sp3
2
Ni  CN  4  dsp 2
2
Page 2
MATHEMATICS:
  2a  3  4  2 a  4   0
2
20.
 4a 2  20a  25  0
  2 a  5   0 this is true
2
2a  3
Sum of the roots  1
2a  4
 2a  3   2a  4 
 0
2a  4
1 5
 0a  22 a 
2a  4 2
21.
22.

23. put x=1 & y=3 in 1 st equation  a  2b & from 2nd equation
9  5b a b 2a  b
c ; now use   ; from first two b=0 or c=1
4 c 1 c 10  a  3b
if b  0  a  0& c  9 / 4; if c  1; b  1; a  2
24.
25.
 23   529    530  1  7C0  530   7C1  530   .....  7C6  530   1
14 7 7 7 6
 100 M  3710  1  100 M  3709
26. x=1+{x}[x]
  x   1 1   x   0
Where [.] greatest integer traction {.} fractional part function
Page 3
1 1 2 1
27.   
1  3x  2 x 2
1  x 1  2 x  1  2 x 1  x
 2 1  2 x  4 x 2  8 x3 ....  1  x  x 2  ....
  2  1   2 2  1 x   23  1 x 2 ....

  ar x r  ar  2 r 1  1
r 0

2 cot x 2
28. a
i 1
i 
1  sin x cos x sin x
2

sin 2 x 2sin x

j 1
bj  
1  sin x cos x
2
 
2 2sin x
a  b
i 1
i
j 1
j  
cos x sin x cos x
2 1  sin 2 x 
  2 cot x
cos x sin x
min imum value  2
 3 4   3 4  1 0 
BC    BC   I

29.   
 2 3   2 3  0 1 
 A  A
tr  A   tr    tr  2   .....
2 2 
1 1
 tr  A  tr  A   2 tr  A  .....
2 2
t  A
 r  2tr  A  2  2  1  6
1  1/ 2 
n
Cr  n nC 1
n

30. li m   lim   r r  x r  2 d x 
n 
r 0 n  r  3  rn 
 r0 n 0 
1
 n
x 
r 1
  x 
n
   x 2 li m  n C r    d x    x 2 lim  1    d x
 n  r  0  n    n   n  
0 0
1
  x 2e x d x  e  2
0
31, 32& 33.
Page 4
34, 35& 36.

37.
15
11 1  1 1 1 
C)  2  k  k  1   2  k  1  k  2 
k 1
Page 5
38.
PHYSICS:
39. Flux through any point charge comes through 4 solid angle.
Flux through the cone of semi vertex angle   flux through the cone of semi vertex angle 
q1 q
 2 1  cos    2  2 1  cos  
4 0 4 0
  
q1 2 sin 2    q2 2 sin 2  
2 2

 q   
  2sin 1  1  sin   
 q2  2 
40. Potential at any point inside the shell=potential at any point on the surface
Potential at A=potential at C due to ‘q’ and induced charges
1 q 1 q 1  q  1 q
=    
4 0 r 4 0 R 4 0  R  4 0 r
2 3 4
41. V  
x xy z
 v v ˆ v ˆ   2 3  3 4
E iˆ  j k  E   2  2  iˆ  2 ˆj  2 kˆ
x y z x yx  xy z

E at 1,1,1  iˆ  ˆj  4kˆ

Therefore force on 2kg = m E  2 26 N
Work done by external agent in moving 2kg mass is Wext  V2  V1  m   2.25  3  2  1.5 J
At y  1.5 m, Ex  0
1ˆ
At z  4 m, Ez  k
4
Page 6
1 th
42. At height R from the surface of planet acceleration due to gravity is of that value at the surface
4
GMm 1 2 GMm GMm 1 2
So,   mv  and   mvesc  0
R 2 RR R 2
GM 2GM
 v and vesc   2V
R R
 vesc  v 2
43. Let h be the maximum height attained and v be the velocity at maximum height. From
conservation of angular momentum
Ve
m cos 45  R  mvr (where r  R  h )
2
Ve 1 V R 1 2GM R GMR
 R  vr  v  e   v
2 2 2 2 r 2 2 R r 4r 2
From conservation of energy
2
GMm 1 Ve GMm 1 2 GM 1 1 GM GM 1 GMR
 m   mv    2   
R 2 4 r 2 R 2 4 R r 2 4r 2
3  8r  R
    6 r 2   8 rR  R 2  6 r 2  8 rR  R 2  0
4R 8r 2
8R  64 R 2  4  6  R 2 8R  2 10R 4R  10R

r r  Rh   h  0.19 R
12 12 6
44. P.E of the dipole U   P.E   PE cos 

Work done W  U   U 2  U1   U1  U 2   PE cos 0    PE cos 60 
PE PE 1000 1029
  PE     5  1027 J
2 2 2
GMm GMm GMm

45. Ei   and E f 
2r 8R 2R
 GMm   GMm  3GMm 3GMm 3GMm
Loss in energy E     t  t
8R  2R  8R 8R 8R
46. In 8 hour the Earth rotates through 1200 and point A on the equator moves to A' . The satellite will
 1
scan the entire equator if it completes  1   revolutions in 8 hrs
 3
4
 T1  8
3
T1  6 hour = time period of revolution of S1.
Page 7
3 th
For S2 the satellite can scan the entire equator in 6 hours if it completes revolution in that time.
4
2/ 3 2/ 3
3 r13 T12 r 6  3
T2  6  T2  8h . 3
 2 hence 1     
4 r2 T2 r2  8  4
r
47.  tan 530
h
r 4
h
h 3

Flux through slant surface of cone containing shaded section
q q
1  cos 530   1  cos 37 0 
2 0 2 0 
q  4 3 q 1 q
  5  5   2 5  10 
2 0 0 0
q h
.
10  0 2
through shaded section 
2 4h / 3
3q
  n  3, m  2 nm 5
160  0
48. dWdrag  dK  dU
L/ 2 V L /2
2 KQql

L
2 F0 dx   2mv dv 
0
L
x3
dx
KQ  r2 
49. v1   3    35.4 volt
2R  R2 
KQ
v2   0.24 volt
 0.05
v  v1  v2  v  35.4  0.24  35.16 volt
Page 8
50. Period of rotation about its axis is not given for either planet.
51. For geostationary satellite, time period = 1 planet day

Let T = 1 planet day
T0  1 planet year
4 2 3 4 2  m  3 4 2 3
T 
2
rG   r  T 
2
r  T02  T  T0
GM Gm  M  GM
52. The energy of any geostationary satellite is the sum of kinetic energy of satellite, interaction
energy of satellite and its own planet and interaction energy of satellite and star. Both planets have
same mass and same length of day. Geostationary satellite planet system will have same
interaction energy in either planet. Also, kinetic energy of both satellites will be same. But the
satellite star system will account for the energy difference
GMm0
Ui   U satellite  planet
2r
GMm0
Uf   U satellite planet
2  4r 
GM m0  1  3GM m0
Emin  U f  U i  1   
2r  4  8r

53. The given charge distribution in the ball is not uniform but varies w.r.t distance from the centre. In
order to calculate the electric field due to it, the ball can be assumed to be made of various concentric
spherical shells. Let us consider one such spherical shell having radius r and thickness dr. Volume of
the elementary spherical shell  4 r 2 dr
Hence, charge contained in this volume
 r  r
dq  4 r 2 dr   4 r 2 dr 0 1    4 0 1   r 2 dr
 R  R
Hence, charge contained with the volume of a sphere of radius r  r  R  is
r
 r  r3 r4 
q   dq  4 0  1   r 2 dr  40   
0
R  3 4R 
Now the electric field E at a distance r from the centre of ball can be calculated as if the charge q is
concentrated at the centre of the ball.
1 q 1  r3 r 4  1 0  r r 2 
E  4 0    2    3  4R 
4 r 2 4  3 4R  r  
dE 1 2r 2R
54. When E is maximum 0   0 r
dr 3 4R 3
2R
i.e., E is maximum at r 
3
  1 2R 1 4R2  0 R
 Emax  0     
  3 3 4 R 9  9
Page 9
KQtotal 1
55. Vsurface  Where K 
R 4 
Qtotal = Total charge enclosed within the ball
R
 r  R3 R4   R3 
Qtotal  4 0  1   r 2 dr  40     4 0 
0 
R  3 4R   12 
4 K 0 R3 0 R 2
Vsurafce  
12 R 12 
56. Electric field is uniform in all the cases. Equipotential lines in x-y plane shall be normal to
corresponding electric lines of force. Also direction of electric field is from region of higher
potential to lower potential.
57. Net electric potential at point 1  electric potential due to charge q + Electric potential due to
induced charges
1 q
i.e., V1   0 ( Potential due to induced charges at centre of the sphere  0 as they are
4 0 3R
equal in magnitude opposite in nature and all are on the surface)
Electric potential at any point inside or on the surface of the sphere  electric potential at centre of
the sphere
 Net electric potential at point 2  Net potential at point 1
1 q


4 0 3R
Net electric potential at point 2  Electric potential due to charge q + electric potential due to
induced charges
1 q 1 q 1 q
 Electric potential at point 2 due to induced charges   
4 0 3R 4 0 2 R 4 0 6 R
Net electric potential at point 3  Electric potential due to charge q + electric potential due to
induced charges
1 q 1 q
i.e.,   V3 (induced)
4 0 3R 4 0 10 R
q 1 1 
V3 (Induced)    
4 0 R  3 10 
Page 10
OUTGOING SR’s Date: 04-05-23
Time: 3 Hrs SGTA-2 Max. Marks:264
PAPER-I
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
PHYSICS:
+Ve - Ve No.of Total
Sec – I(Q .N : 1 – 8) Questions with Integer Answer Type 4 0 8 32
Sec – II(Q .N : 9 – 18) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 4 -2 10 40
Matrix Matching
Sec – III(Q .N : 19 – 20) 8 -1 2 16
(+ 2 / -1 for every match)
Total 20 88

CHEMISTRY:
Matrix Matching
Sec – III(Q .N : 39 – 40) 8 -1 2 16
Total 20 88
MATHEMATICS:
Matrix Matching
Sec – III(Q .N : 59 – 60) 8 -1 2 16
Total 20 88
Narayana IIT Academy 04-05-23_Sr.Outgoing_JEE-ADV_(2015_P1)_SGTA-2_Q.Paper
PHYSICS Max Marks : 88
SECTION – I
(INTEGER ANSWER TYPE )
Marking scheme +4 for correct answer , 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
1. A voltmeter, an ammeter, and a battery of emf 8V are connected in series as shown in figure. It
is found that when a certain resistance is connected in parallel with the voltmeter, the reading
of the voltmeter becomes one - third, while the reading of the ammeter becomes 3 times. Find
the initial reading of the voltmeter (in volt).
V A
E  8V
2. In the given circuit, the potential difference across the 6 F capacitor in the steady state in volt
is
12V 1
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot 4V
3. H1 is the heat produced in resistance R when A and B are connected for a long time with no
charge on the capacitor initially, Heat produced in the resistance is H 2 when B and C are
connected for a long time. The energy supplied by the battery during charging is ________ times
H1 .
C R
A B
E C
4. A heater is designed to operate with a power of 1000 W in a 100 V line. It is connected in

combination with a resistance of 10  and a resistance R to a 100 V line as shown in figure.
What should be the value of R so that the heater operates with a power of 62.5 W?
Page 2
5. The figure shows a metre – bridge circuit, with AB = 100cm, X  12  and R  18  , and the
jockey J in the position of balance. If R in now made 8 , through what distance will J have to
be moved to obtain balance in the multiples of 10 cm?
- +
X R
A J B
6. When a dielectric slab of thickness d/2(Area same as plates) is inserted between the plates of
parallel plate capacitor (with d as the separation between the plates), capacitance of a capacitor

becomes 4/3 times the initial value. Find the dielectric constant of the slab.
7. A capacitor is filled completely with a dielectric slab and a certain potential difference is
applied to its plates. The energy stored in the capacitor is U. Now, the capacitor is disconnected
from the source and the dielectric slab is pulled out of the capacitor. The work performed
against the forces of the electric field in pulling out the slab is 4U. Then the dielectric constant
of the slab is:
8. The circuit was in the shown state from a long time. Now the switch S is closed. The amount
of charge that flown through the switch ‘S’ is 25xC then the value of x is (Assume all the
capacitors are uncharged before connecting in the circuit)
Page 3
SECTION – II
This section contains 10 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its answer,
out of which O NE OR MORE than O NE option can be correct.
9. In the circuit shown in the figure, switch S is closed at time t = 0. Select the correct
statements.
A) Rate of increase of charge is same in both the capacitors

B) Ratio of charge stored in capacitors C and 2C at any time t would be 1 : 2
C) Time constants of both the capacitors are equal

D) Steady state charges on capacitors C and 2C are in the ratio of 1 : 2
10. An electrical circuit is shown in the given figure. The resistance of each voltmeter is infinite
and each ammeter is 100 . The charge on the capacitor of 100 μF in steady state is 4 mC.
Choose correct statement(s) regarding the given circuit.
A) Reading of voltmeter V2 is 16 V
1
B) Reading of ammeter A1 is zero and A2 is A
25
C) Reading of voltmeter V1 is 40 V
D) Emf of the ideal cell is 66 V
Page 4
11. In the circuit shown, A and Bare equal resistances. When S is closed, the capacitor C charges
from the cell of emf  and reaches a steady state.
A) During charging, more heat is produced in A than in B

B) In steady state, heat is produced at the same rate in A and B
1 2
C) In the steady state, energy stored in C is C
4
1
D) In the steady state energy stored in C is C 2
8
12. Two light bulbs shown in the circuit have rating A ( 24V , 24 W ) and B ( 24 V ,36W ) as
shown in figure. When the switch is closed
A) the intensity of light bulb A increases B) the intensity of light bulb A decreases
C) the intensity of light bulb B increases D) the intensity of light bulb B decreases
13. In a meter bridge, if we use 100  and 200 resistances in left and right gap respectively we
get null deflection at l1  33 cm from left end. If we interchange the resistances, the null
deflection was found to be at l2  67 cm from left end. The end corrections at left and right ends
are  and  respectively. Then
A)   1cm,   1cm B)   2cm,   1cm
C)   1cm,   2cm D)   0,   1cm
Page 5
14. Figure shows a modified meter bridge, which is used for measuring two unknown resistances at
the same time. When only the first galvanometer (left) is used, for obtaining the balance point,
it is found at point C. Now the first galvanometer is removed and the second galvanometer
(right) is used, which gives balance point at D. Find the value of R1 and R2 . Given
AB  L, AC  L / 4, AD  2 L / 3,
R = Known Resistance.
A) R1  5 R / 3 B) R2  4 R / 3 C) R1  4 R / 3 D) R2  5 R / 3
15. A battery has an open circuit potential difference 10V between the terminals. When loads
9 and 4 are connected one by one across the battery, the power in load resistant is same.

How much heat approximately will be generated in one second in the load when a load of 5
is connected across the battery.
A) 10.4 J B) 9 J C) 6.8 J D) 4.13 J

16. A 6V battery with negligible internal resistance, is connected across a uniform wire of length
100cm. The positive terminal of another battery of emf 4V and internal resistance 1  is
connected at ‘A’ as shown in the figure. Take the potential at B to be zero and find out which
of the following is correct?
6V
A B
C
4V 1
A) The potential at A is 6V and at C is 2V.
B) The potential is 4V on AB at a distance of 33.33cm from A.
C) If C is connected at 66.67cm from A then there will be no current in the 4V battery.
D) If the 6V battery is replaced by a 12V battery then the potential at A would be 8V.
Page 6
17. The potentiometer wire AB in the figure has length ‘L’ and resistance ‘9r’. The cells have emfs
v and v/2 and internal resistance ‘r’ and ‘2r’ as marked. The Galvanometer ‘G’ will show zero
deflection, when
V
J
A B
V/2
G
2r
10 L
A) The length of AJ equal to
18
15 L
B) If 5r is in series to emf of ‘v’ then AJ 
18
L
C) The length AJ is equal to if 2r is in series with v/2 emf
18
15 L
D) The balancing length AJ is if 5r is in series to emf of V
25
18. Two capacitors C1  8 F and C2  4  F are connected in series between points A and B. An

ideal cell of emf 12 V is connected between A and B for a long time. Now a slab of dielectric
constant k = 2 is slowly and fully filled in the gap of capacitor C2.
A) During the filling process the energy taken from the cell is 192  J
B) In the filling process the increase in electrostatic energy stored in the capacitors is 96  J
C) The work done by dielectric slab on the filling agent during the filling process is positive.
D) The work done by dielectric slab on the filling agent during the filling process is zero.
Page 7
SECTION - III
(MATRIX MATCHING ANSWER TYPE)
This section contains 2 questions. Each question has four statements (A, B, C and D) given in Column I and four statements (P, Q, R and
S) in Column II. Any given statement in Column I can have correct matching with ONE or MORE statement(s) given in Column II. For
example, if for a given question, statement B matches with the statements given in Q and R, then for the particular question darken the
bubbles corresponding to Q and R in the OMR sheet. For each correct matching will be awarded +2 marks ONLY and 0 if not
attempted and -1 in all other cases.
19. Figure shows an experimental setup for a potentiometer, point R is null point (no deflection of
galvanometer) 1 is primary source. Match the following: [The resistance box has a finite
resistance]

r
RB
Resistance box
P Q
R
A
l
Rheostate 1
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot Column I Column II
(A) If only emf of battery 1 is (P) Point R will shift to left

increased
(B) If only resistance of rheostat is (Q) Point R will shift to right

increased
(C) If resistance box is connected (R) Point R may shift to left or right
(D) If an ideal battery is connected (S) R does not shift

in series with 
Page 8
20. Column – I gives certain situations in which capacitance of a capacitor is changed by different means.
Column – II gives resulting effect under different conditions. Match the column – I with column – II.
Column – I Column – II
A) The plates of a plane parallel capacitors P) Increases if the capacitor has a

are slowly pulled apart. Then the constant charge
magnitude of electric field intensity
inside the capacitor.
B) The plates of a plane parallel plate Q) Decreases if the capacitor has a
capacitor are slowly pulled apart. Then constant charge.
the potential energy stored in the
capacitor
C) The capacitance of an air filled parallel R) Increases if the capacitor is
plate capacitor on insertion of dielectric. maintained at constant potential
difference.
D) A dielectric slab is inserted inside an air S) Decreases if the capacitor is
filled plane parallel plate capacitor. The maintained at constant potential
potential energy stored in the capacitor. difference
Page 9
CHEMISTRY Max Marks : 88
SECTION – I
21. In the compound Na2  B4O5  OH 4  .8 H 2O . If the
(i) number of B - O – B bonds is ‘x’

(ii) number of B – B bonds is ‘y’
(iii) number of sp 2 hybridized B atoms is ‘z’
Calculate the value of x  y  z
22. What is the change in the oxidation no of nitrogen when very dil. HNO3 reacts with Zn metal ?
23. Total number of water molecule(s) consumed for complete hydrolysis of one molecule of P4O10 is :
24. Find the number of elements having lower EA2 than EA1
O, S P, I , As , Si, Al , Al , Li, K
25.
Examine the structural formulas of following compounds and find how many compounds will produce
CO2 on oxidative ozonolysis.
, , ,
, , Ph  CH  CH 2 ,
H 3C  C  CH
Page 10
26. How many of the following reactions, leads to the formation of diastereomers ?
(a) (b)
CH3
HCl
H D 
CCl

4
CH
Ph
CH
HBr
C CH 2 
CCl4

(c) H (d) Ph

(e) (f)
27. Identify number of substituents those are deactivating but ortho and para directing.
O O O
..
 F : ,  CF3 ,  C  NH 2 , CH  CH  C  H , CH  CH  C  OH ,
..
O O O
..
 S..  C2 H 5 ,  S  C2 H 5  N  0,  C  NH 2
O
28. Examine the structural formulas shown below and find out how many compounds can not, give Friedel
Crafts reaction.
NH O H OH
3 CN .. O ..
CH3 : NH 2 C :F: C : O C  CH3
, , , , , , ,
Page 11
SECTION – II
29. AB is predominantly ionic as A B  if :

A)  I .P  A   I .P  B B)  E. A. A   E. A. B
C)  E.N . A   E.N . B D) size of A  size of B
30. Which of the following molecule(s) is/are having d - p bonding ?

A) NO2 B) ClO2 C) H 2 PO2 D) SO32
31. Select reaction in which SO2 is NOT evolved.
A) Cu2 S is roasted B) Cu2 S is heated with roasted Cu2 S

C) FeS is partially roasted D) Partially roasted FeS is heated with silica
32. The common impurities present in bauxite are :
33.
A) Fe2O3 B) SiO2 C) TiO2
Which of following compounds give paramagnetic gas on decomposition ?

D) ZnO
I) Pb  NO3  2 II) LiNO3 III) NaNO3 IV) NH 4 NO2
A) (I), (II), (III) B) (II), (III) C) (I), (II) D) (III), (IV)

34. The correct statement(s) related to oxoacids of phosphorus is (are)
A) Upon heating, H 3 PO3 undergoes disproportionation reaction to produce H 3 PO3 and PH 3
B) While H 3 PO3 can act as reducing agent, H 3 PO3 cannot
C) H 3 PO3 is a monobasic acid
D) The H atom of P – H bond in H 3 PO3 is not ionizable in water
35. Dipole moment of which compound is not zero ?
A) B) C) D)
36. Arrange the following in decreasing order of basicity

Page 12
A) P  Q  R  S B) Q  R  S  P C) Q  R  P  S D) S  R  Q  P
37. What is the product of the following sequence of reaction ?

C  CH
NaNH 2 / NH 3 H 2 , Pd  BaSO4 BH3 .THF

    
H 2O 2 / OH
CH3

A) B)
C) D)
38. Which one of the following has lowest heat of combustion ?
A) B) C) D)
Page 13
SECTION - III
39.
Column-I(Decreasing order) Column-II(Correct for)
A) I  Br  Cl  F P) First ionization energy
B) F  Cl  Br  I Q) Size
C) Cl  F  Br  I R) EA (electron affinity)
D) O  F  N  C S) EN (electronegativity)
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot T) 2nd ionization energy
40.
Column-I(Extraction) Column-II(Step(s) involve)
A) Cassiterite  Tin P) Removal of iron impurity
B) Chalcopyrite  Copper Q) Carbon reduction
C) Galena  Lead R) Electrolytic reduction of ore
D) Red bauxite  Aluminium S) Self reduction
T) Roasting
Page 14
MATHS Max Marks : 88
SECTION – I
41. A line through A(-5, -4) meets the lines x  3y  2  0, 2x  y  4  0 and x  y  5  0 at the points
2 2 2
B, C, D respectively, such that 

15   10   6 
     is ax  3y  k  0 then
 AB   AC   AD 
a  k 
 3   ___ where [ . ] denotes the greatest integer function where a,k belongs to R.
 
42. One diagonal of a square is the portion of the line 7 x  5 y  35 intercepted by the coordinate
abcd
axes. If the extremities of the other diagonal are  a, b  and  c, d  then .
2
43. Let C , C1 , C2 be circles of radii 5, 3, 2 respectively. C1 and C2 touch each other externally and
m
C internally, A circle C3 touches C1 and C2 externally and C internally. If its radius is ,

n
where m and n are relatively prime positive integers, then 2n-m is
44. If the radius of the circle touching the pair of lines 7x2  18xy + 7y2 = 0 and the circle
x2 + y2  8x 8y = 0, and contained in the given circle is equal to k, then k2 is equal to
45. Points A,B,C lie on parabola y 2  4ax . Tangents to A,B,C taken in pairs intersect at P,Q, R.
ar ABC
Then is
arPQR
46. The number of distinct normals, which can be drawn from the point (2, 8) to the parabola
y2 = 6x is ........
47. If a variable circle x 2  y 2  2ax  4ay  0 intersect the hyperbola xy  4 at the points
x x x x y y y y
 xi , yi  i  1, 2,3, 4 then locus of the point  1 2 3 4 , 1 2 3 4  is  x  y    0 then
 4 4 
the value of    
48. The minimum distance of the curve x 2  2 y 2  6 from the line x  y  7 is k then
k   where [ . ] is G.I.F.
Page 15
SECTION – II
49. Consider the straight line L  2 x  y  1  0 , then which of the following is true?
A) If  a1 , b1  ,  a2 , b2  are two points on the line L  0 which are at a distance of ' 5 ' units from a
point P  2,3 then a1a2  b1b2  2
B) The distance from a point  4, 3 to the line L  0 measured along a line making
Tan 1 3 with the positive direction of X-axis is 10 10 units

C) The area of the triangle formed by a line passing through (1,-2) and perpendicular to L  0
9
with coordinate axes is sq units
2
D) If P,Q are reflections of the points  4, 1 6, 3 respectively with respect to the line L  0
50.
then PQ  3 2
In XY plane, the path defined by the equation

1

1

k
 0 is
xm ym ( x  y )n
1
A) a parabola if m   , k  1, n  0
2
B) A hyperbola if m  1, k  1, n  0
C) A pair of lines if m  k  n  1
D) a pair of lines if m  k  1, n  1
51. A circle touches the line x  y  2  0 at (1, 1) and cuts the circle x  y  4x  5y 6  0 at
2 2
P and Q . Then
A) P Q can never be parallel to the given line x  y  2  0
B) P Q can never be perpendicular to the given line x  y  2  0
C) P Q always passes through (6, -4)
D) P Q always passes through (-6, 4)
Page 16
52. A hyperbola having the transverse axis of length 1 unit is confocal with the ellipse
2
3x2  4y2  12 , then
x2 y2 1
A) Equation of the hyperbola is  
15 1 16
B) Eccentricity of the hyperbola is 4
C) Distance between the directrices of the hyperbola is 1 units

8
D) Length of latus rectum of the hyperbola is 1 5 units

2
53. Orthocentre of a triangle ABC is H(2,3) and altitude AH meets the circumcircle of triangle
ABC at D(4,7) then
A)equation of side BC is x  2 y  13
B)If triangle ABC is equilateral then vertex A=(0,-1)

C)If triangle ABC is equilateral then its inradius  5
D)If triangle ABC is equilateral then its area  15 3 sq.cm
54. Let there be two circles with one touching x-axis at A(2,0) and has radius 1 unit and other
touching x-axis at B(6,0). Let C and D be the centres of first and second circles respectively.
Again let P(6,2) be a point on a line perpendicular to CD and bisecting AB. If PA and PB
intersect circles at E and F respectively, then
PE 1 8
A)  B) PE  5 C) PE  D) PE  8
PF 5 PF 5
55. If PQR is the triangle formed by the common tangents to the circles
x 2  y 2  6x  0 and x 2  y 2  2x  0 then
A) Centroid of  P Q R is (1, 0)
B) In-centre of  P Q R is (1, 0)
C) Circum-radius of  P Q R is 2 units
D) In radius of  P Q R is 1 unit
Page 17
56. Tangent drawn at point P(1,3) to a parabola intersects its tangent at vertex at V(-1,5). If R(-5,5)
is a point on SP; where S is focus of the parabola then
A) Slope of directrix is 1/3
B) radius of circumcircle of SVP is 2 units
C) tangent cuts the axis of parabola at (-3,7)
D) focus is (-2,4)
Let PQ be a chord of the parabola y  4x . A circle is drawn with PQ as diameter passes

2
57.
through the vertex ‘V’ of the parabola. If area of triangle PVQ= 20 sq.units, then the
coordinates of P are
A) (16, 8) B) (16, -8) C) (-16, 8) D) (-16, -8)
2 2
58. If two tangents can be drawn to the different branches of hyperbola x  y  1 from the point
1 4
(, 2), then
A) (2, 0) B) (0, 2) C) (, 2) D) (2, )
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot SECTION - III

59. Match the following
A) Values of  for which P) 1

2 2
Circle x + y – 2x  2y  (  1)  0
2
lies in all four quadrants

B) The value of  for which the point Q) 3
(2  1,   1) is an interior point of 4
the smaller segment of the circle

x2 + y2 – 2x – 4y – 4 = 0 made by
the chord x + y – 2 = 0.
C) In a triangle ABC sides AB and BC are R) 1
parallel to y and x-axis respectively. If the 2
Page 18
equation of median through A is y = 3x + 1,
then slope of median through C is
D) A variable circle always touches S) 2
the line y = x and passes through 9
the point (0, 0), the common chord

of above circle and
x2 + y2 + 6x + 8y – 7 = 0 will pass through a
fixed point (x, y), then x + y is
T) 2
5
60. Match the following.

(A) A tangent drawn to hyperbola x2
y2
 2 1 at 
P 
(P) 17
2
a b 6
forms a triangle of area 3a 2 square units, with
coordinate axes, then the square of its eccentricity

is equal to
(B) If the eccentricity of the hyperbola (Q) 32
x 2  y 2 sec 2   5 is 3 times the eccentricity of the
ellipse x 2 sec2   y2  25 then the least positive value

of  is where 6 p is
p
(C) For the hyperbola x2
 y 2  3 , acute angle between (R) 16
3
l
its asymptotes is , then value of ‘l’ is
24
(D) For the hyperbola xy = 8 any tangent of it at P (S) 24
meets co-ordinate axes at Q and R then area of
triangle CQR where ‘c’ is centre of the hyperbola
is
(T) 8
Page 19
PAPER-II
Time: IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 240
PHYSICS:
Questions with Comprehension Type
Sec – III(Q .N : 17 – 20) 4 -2 4 16
(2 Comprehensions – 2 + 2 = 4Q)
Total 20 80
CHEMISTRY:
+Ve
Marks
- Ve
Marks
No.of
Qs
Total
marks
Sec – III(Q .N : 37 – 40) 4 -2 4 16
Total 20 80
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – III(Q .N : 57 – 60) 4 -2 4 16
Total 20 80
Narayana IIT Academy 04-05-23_ OUT SR TARGET ADVANCED_JEE-ADV_(2015_P2)_PAPER_II
SECTION – I
1. A parallel plate capacitor C with plates of unit area and separation d is filled with a liquid of dielectric
constant K=2. The level of liquid is d/3 initially. Suppose the liquid level decreases at a constant speed
n 0 R
ѵ, the time constant as a function of time t is- find n
5d  3vt

2. At time t=0, a battery of 10 V is connected across points A and B in the given circuit. If the capacitors
have no charges initially, at what time (in seconds) does the voltage across them become 4 V?
[Take: ln5=1.6, ln3=1.1]
3. In Fig, AB is a 1 m long uniform wire of 10 Ω resistance. Other data are shown in the diagram.
75
The balancing length AO is cm find n.
n
Space for rough work Page 2

4. Maximum power developed across variable resistance R in the circuit shown in figure is:
10n Watt find n.

5. Two resistances R1= XΩ and R2=1Ω are connected to a wire AB of uniform resistivity, as shown in
the figure. The radius of the wire varies linearly along its axis from 0.2 mm at A to 1 mm at B.A
galvanometer (G) connected to the center of the wire, 50 cm from each end along its axis, shows zero
deflection when A and B are connected to a battery. The value of X is___.
6. A thin spherical insulating shell of radius R carries a uniformly distributed charge such that the
potential at its surface is V0. A hole with a small area α4πR2 (a<<1) is made on the shell without
R
affecting the rest of the shell. The ratio of the potential at the center of the shell to that of a point
2
 1 
from the center towards the hole is   find n.
 1  n 
7. A point charge +Q is placed just outside an imaginary hemispherical surface of radius R as shown in
the figure.
2
i0 Rt0
The electric flux passing through the curved surface of the hemisphere is find n.
5
8. A solid sphere of radius R has a charge Q distributed in its volume with a charge density ρ= k ra, where
k and a are constants and r is the distance from its centre.
R 1
If the electric field at r = is times that at r = R, find the value of a.
2 8
SECTION – II
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot(MULTIPLE CORRECT ANSWER TYPE)

This section contains 8 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its
answer, out of which ONE OR MORE than ONE option can be correct.
9. A medium having dielectric constant K>1 fills the space between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor.
The plates have large area, and the distance between them is d. The capacitor is connected to a battery
d
of voltage V, as shown in Figure (a). Now, both the plates are moved by a distance of from their
2
original positions, as shown in Figure (b).
In the process of going from the configuration depicted in Figure (a) to that in Figure (b), which of the
following statement (s) is (are) correct?

(A) The electric field inside the dielectric material is reduced by a factor of 2K.
1
(B) The capacitance is decreased by a factor of .
K 1
(C) The voltage between the capacitor plates is increased by a factor o f(K+1).
(D) The work done in the process DOES NOT depend on the presence of the dielectric material.
10. In the circuit shown below, the key is pressed at time t=0. Which of the following statement (s) is
(are) true?
(A) The voltmeter displays -5V as soon as the key is pressed, and displays + 5V after a long
time

(B) The voltmeter will display OV at time t=ln 2 seconds
(C) The current in the ammeter becomes 1/e of the initial value after 1 second
(D) The current in the ammeter becomes zero after a long time.
11. A parallel plate capacitor having plates of area S and plate separation d, has capacitance C1 in air. When
two dielectrics of different relative primitivities (  1=2 and  2=4) are introduced between the two
C2
plates as shown in the figure, the capacitance becomes C2. The ratio is
C1
(A) 6/5 (B) 5/3
(C) 7/5 (D) 7/3

12. Heater of an electric kettle is made of a wire of length L and diameter d. It takes 4 minutes to raise the
temperature of 0.5 kg water by 40 K. This heater is replaced by a new heater having two wires of the
same material, each of length L and diameter 2d. The way these wires are connected is given in the
options. How much time in minutes will it take to raise the temperature of the same amount of water
by 40 K?
(A) 4 if wires are in parallel (B) 2 if wires are in series
(C) 1 if wires are in series (D) 0.5 if wires are in parallel
13. A circuit is connected as shown in the figure with the switch S open. When the switch is closed, the
total amount of charge that flows from Y to X is

(A) 0 (B) 54µC (C) 27µC (D) 81µC
14. An infinitely long thin non-conducting wire is parallel to the z-axis and carries a uniform line charge
density λ. It pierces a thin non-conducting spherical shell of radius R in such a way that the arc PQ
subtends an angle 1200 at the center O of the spherical shell, as shown in the figure. The permittivity of
free space is ϵ0. Which of the following statements is (are) true?
R
(A) The electric flux through the shell is 3
0
(B) The z-component of the electric field is zero at all the point on the surface of the shell

R
(C) The electric flux through the shell is 2
0
(D) The electric field is normal to the surface of the shell at all points
15. A spherical metal shell A of radius RA and a solid metal sphere B of radius RB (<RA) are kept far
apart and each is given charge ‘+Q’. Now they are connected by a thin metal wire. Then
inside
(A) E A
=0 (B) QA>QB
 A RB onsurface onsurface
(C) 
 B RA
(D) E A
 EB
16. Under the influence of the Coulomb field of charge + Q, a charge –q is moving around it in an
elliptical orbit. Find out the correct statement(s).
(A) The angular momentum of the charge –q is constant
(B) The linear momentum of the charge –q is constant
(C) The angular velocity of the charge –q is constant
(D) The linear speed of the charge –q is constant
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot SECTION – III

(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
This section contains 2 groups of questions. Each group has 2 multiple choice questions based on a
paragraph.
Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONE OR MORE is/are correct.
Paragraph for Question Nos. 17 to 18
Relation between current in conductor and time is shown in
Fig. then determine
17. Total charge flown through the conductor is

A) I0t0/2 B) I0t0 C) I0t0/4 D) 2I0t0

18. If the resistance of the conductor is R, then total heat dissipated across resistance R is
2 2 2 2
i Rt i Rt i Rt i Rt
A) 0 0 B) 0 0 C) 0 0 D) 0 0
2 4 3 5
A thin ring of radius R metres is placed in x-y plane such that its center lies on origin. The half ring in
region x<0 carries uniform liner charge density +λC/m and the remaining half ring in region x>0
carries uniform linear charge density –λC/m.

19. Then the electric potential (in volts) at point p whose coordinates are (0m, +
R
2
m) is:
1  1 
A) B) 0 C) D) cannot be determined
4 0 2 4 0 4
20. Then the dipole moment of the ring in C-m is:
   
A)-(2πR2λ) i B) (2πR2λ) i C) -(4πR2λ) i D) (4πR2λ) i
CHEMISTRY Max Marks : 80

SECTION – I
21. There are twelve electrons in the valence shell of central atom in a molecule. These
electrons are arranged in such a way that 66.6% of total electrons forms bond while
remaining electrons is non bonding electrons. The hybridisation of central atom is
sp x d y . The value of x  y is….
22. The X-X bondlength is 1.00A0 and C-C bond length is 1.54 A0.The C-X bond length
is likely to be 118 10 y A0 . The value of ‘y’ is ( If E.N of C and X are 2.0 and 3.0
respectively)

23. For the following molecules:
PCl5 , BrF3 , ICl2 , XeF5 , NO3 , XeO2 F2 , PCl4 and CH 3
a b
Calculate the value of
c
Here “a” is Number of species having sp3 d -hybridisation
“b” is Number of species which are planar
“c” is Number of species which are non-planar
24. Silica reacts with magnesium to form a magnesium compound (X). X reacts with dil
HCl and forms (Y) and (Z). If two mole of HCl reacts with one mole of X then how
many mole of Y will be formed?
25. 
Br2 / hv
 ? (no.of mono bromo products)
26. How many alkenes are formed by E2 elimination of HBr from 3-bromo-3,4-
dimethylhexane using a strong base such as sodium methoxide ?
27. When Cl2 is treated with Na2 S2 O3 the oxidation state of Sulphur in the product of

sulphur compound is ‘x’. When I 2 is treated with Na2 S2 O3 the oxidation state of
 x  2y 
sulphur in the product is ‘y’ what is 
 11 
4x
28. Sum of the unpaired electrons in O2 , O2 , O2 , S 2 and O3 is ‘x’. What is
3
SECTION – II
29. In which of the following ionization processes, the bond order has increased and the
magnetic behaviour has changed?
+ + +
A) N 2  N 2 B) C2  C2 C) NO  NO D) O 2  O 2
+

30. The major product formed in the reaction :
A) B) C) D)
31. Identify the correct statements regarding the structure of Al(BH 4 )3
A) ‘Al’ is sp3d 2 and ‘B’ is sp3 hybridize B) It has 6 3C  2e  bonds
C) It has 6 Al  H  B bonds D) It has 6 2C  2e  bonds

32. Among the compounds the order of decreasing reactivity towards electrophilic

substitution is:
A) II > I > III > IV B) III > I > II > IV

C) III > I > IV > II D) II > I > IV > III
33. Which of the following are correct?
A) Number of S-S bonds in H 2 Sn O6 are (n+1)
B) When F2 react with water gives HF , O2 and O3
C) O3 is decomposed by MnO2
D) Dry Iodine is oxidised by O3 to I 2 O7 (yellow powder)
34. With which of the following PCl5 can produce POCl3
A) O2 B) SO2 C) CO2 D) P4 O10

35.
A) B)
C) D)
36. The correct statement(s) regarding,

(i) HClO, (ii) HClO2, (iii) HClO3 and (iv) HClO4 is(are)
(A) The number of Cl=O bonds in (ii) and (iii) together is two
(B) The number of lone pairs of electrons on Cl in (ii) and (iii) together is three
(C) The hybridization of Cl in (iv) is sp3

(D) Amongst (i) to (iv), the strongest acid is (i)
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph.
Copper is the most noble of the first row transiton metals and occurs in small deposits in several
contries. Ores of copper include Chalcanthite ( CuSO4 .5 H 2O ), atacamite ( Cu2 Cl  OH 3 ) ,
Cuprite  Cu2O  , copper glance( Cu2 S ) and malachite ( Cu2 (OH ) 2 CO3 ). However, 80% of the world
copper production comes from the ore chalcopyrite ( CuFeS 2 ). The extraction of copper from
chalcopyrite involves partial roasting, removal of iron and self-reduction.
37 Partial roasting of chalcopyrite produces
A) Cu2 S and FeO B) Cu2O and FeO
C) CuS and Fe2O3 D) Cu2 O and Fe2O3

38. Iron is removed from Chalcopyrite as
A) FeO B) FeS C) Fe2 O3 D) FeSiO3
There are some deposits of nitrates and phosphates in earths crust. Nitrates are more soluble in water.
Nitrates are difficult to reduce under the laboratory conditions but microbes do it easily. Ammonia
forms large number of complexes with transition metal ions. Hybridisation easily explains the ease of
sigma donation capability of NH 3 and PH 3 .Phosphine is flammable gas and is prepared from white
phosphorous.
39. Among the following, the correct statement is
A) Between NH 3 and PH 3 , NH 3 is a better electron donor because the lone pair of electrons occupies
spherical‘s’ orbital and less directional
B) Between NH 3 and PH 3 , PH 3 is a better electron donor because the lone pair of electrons occupies
SP3 hybrid orbital and more directional

C) Between NH 3 and PH 3 , NH 3 is a better electron donor because the lone pair of electrons occupies
SP3 hybrid orbital and more directional
D) Between NH 3 and PH 3 , PH 3 is a better electron donor because the lone pair of electrons occupies
spherical‘s’ orbital and less directional
40. White phosphorus on reaction with NaOH gives PH 3 as one of the products. This is a
A) Dimerisation reaction B) disproportionation reaction

C) Condensation reaction D) precipitation reaction

SECTION – I
41. Let x, y, z are all real numbers such that x + y + z=0 and xy + yz +zx = -3, then the value of
| x 3 y  y 3 z  z 3 x | is equal to
42. Let x1, x2, x3,…, x2018 be real numbers different from 1, such that x1 + x2 +…+x2018 = 1 and
2 2
x1 x x x1 x x2
 2  ......  2018  1  2  ......  2018  1
1  x1 1  x2 1  x2018 1  x1 1  x2 1  x2018
. Then the value of is equal to
43. Let N be the number of 5 letter words can you spell using the letters S, I and T only, if a ‘word’ is
defined as any sequence of letters that doesn’t contain 3 consecutive consonants. Then the sum of digits
of N is
44. If A and B are two square matrices of order 3 such that AB = BA and A2 = AB + 2B2. If the
matrices, A+B and B are non singular, then |AB-1| is equal to

45. Let z1, z2, z3 be complex number with |z1| = |z2| = |z3| = r, r >0. The maximum value of |z1 - z2| |z2 - z3|
+ |z2 - z3| |z3 - z1| + |z3 - z1| | z1 - z2| is equal to λr2, then λ is equal to
46. Let function f(x) be defined as f(x) = x2 + bx + c, where b,c are real numbers and f(1) -2f(5) + f(9) =
32. Number of ordered pairs (b,c) such that |f(x)| ≤8 for all x in the interval [1,9].
47. If α and β (α < β) are the roots of the equation
  tx  
lim cos 1 sin(tan 1   
t 
  tx 2  3tx  t  1 x   6
 
then find the value of (8 α + 2 β - α β).
48. Let f(x) be a continuous function defined from [0, 2]  R and satisfying the equation
2
2
 f ( x)( x  f ( x))dx  3 . Find the value of 2f (1).
0

SECTION – II
49. The center of circle circumscribing the square ABCD is z0. Let A is z1, then the centroid of  ABC
can be
 i i  i i  i i  i i
z0 1    z1 z0 1    z1 z0 1    z1 z0 1    z1
A)  3  3 B)  3  3 C)  3  3 D)  3  3
50. If A and B are two non singular matrices of order 3 such that 2A + 3BBT = I and B-1 = AT, then
(Tr(P)= trace of matrix P)
A) |BT- 2B + 3B3 + 3BA| = 1 B) Tr(A-1 + I –AB -3B3 ) = 6
C) |A-1 -3B3| =27 D) |A-1-3B3| =8
51. The number of ordered triplets (x, y, z) of non negative integers satisfying the conditions.
x + y + z ≤ 100 and x ≤ y ≤ z
A) if x is odd is 14724 B) if x is odd is 14722

52.
C) if x is even is 16065
Let f: R  R be defined by f(x) = f  x   

2 2
D) if x is even is 16164
2 x In x  5 x , x0
.
0, x0
Which of the following statement (s) is/are correct?

(A) f(x) has exactly one local maximum and two local minimum points
(B) f(x) is strictly increasing in (10,  )
(C) Absolute minimum value of f(x) exist but absolute maximum value of f(x) does
not exist
(D) In the interval x   0,   , g ( x)  k have two distinct roots
1
dy
53. Let function y =f(x) satisfies the differential equation x 2  y 2e X ( x  0) and lim f ( x)  1 . Identify
dx x 0
the correct statements(s):

1 
A) Range of f(x) is (0, 1) -   B)f(x) is bounded
2
e 1
C) lim f ( x)  1
x0
D) 
0
f ( x )dx   f ( x )dx
0

a
(sin 1 e x  sec 1 e  x )dx
54. The value of the definite integral  1 a 1 x
 (tan e  tan e )( e  e )
x x
(a  R) is:
A) independent of a B) dependent on a
 
C) ln 2 D) ln(2 tan 1 e a )
2 2
55. Consider the circle x2 + y2 -10x – 6y + 30 = 0. Let O be the center of the circle and tangent at A (7, 3)
and B (5, 1) meet at C. Let S=0 represents family of circles passing through A and B,
then:
(A) Area of quadrilateral OABC =4
(B) the radical axis for the family of circle S= 0 is x + y = 10
(C) the smallest possible circle of the family S=0 is x2 + y2 – 12x – 4y + 38 =0
(D) the coordinates of point C are (7,1)
56. If the ellipse x2 + k2y2 = k2 a2 is confocal with the hyperbola x2- y2= a2 (k > 1). Then which of the
of the following statements (s) is/are correct ?

1
(A) Ratio of eccentricities of ellipse and hyperbola is
3
(B) Ratio of major axis of ellipse and transverse axis of hyperbola is 3
(C) Ratio of minor axis of ellipse and conjugate axis of hyperbola is 3

1
(D) Ratio of length if latus rectum of ellipse and hyperbola is
3
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph.

Let f be an even function satisfying
  6 x 2  13   3 x, 0  x 1
f ( x  2)  f  x   2   x  R and f ( x )  
  x  2   4  x, 1 x  4
57. The area bounded by the graph of f(x) and the x- axis from x= -1 to x = 9 is:

31 15
A) B) 15 C) 12 D)
2 2
58. The value of f (-89) – f (-67) + f (46) is equal to:
A) 4 B) 5 C) 6 D) 7
Let curve S1 be the locus of a point p (h, k) which moves in xy plane such that it always satisfy the
relation min {x 2  (h  k ) x  (1  h  k )}  max{ x 2  (h  k ) x  (1  h  k )} . Let S2 is a curved mirror
passing through (8, 6) having the property that all light says emerging from origin, after getting
reflected from the mirror becomes parallel to x-axis. Also the area of region bounded between y-axis
and S2 is 8/3,
59. The area of smaller region bounded between S1 and S2 is equal to:
8 8 8
A) 2π B)   C)   D) 2 
3 3 3
60. If the circle (x-4)2 + y2 = r2 internally touches the curve S2, then r=
A) 5 B) 4 C) 3 D) 2

KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 6 2 2 3 2 4 5 5 2
6 2 7 5 8 2 9 B,C,D 10 B,C
11 A,B,D 12 B,C 13 A 14 A,B 15 D
16 A,B,C 17 A,B 18 A,B,C 1 9 A-p 20 A –S
B-Q B –PS
C-Q C – PR

D-R D – QR
CHEMISTRY
21 7 22 8 23 6 24 9 25 5
26 4 27 5 28 6 29 A,B,C 30 B,C,D
31 D 32 A,B,C 33 A 34 A,B,D 35 A,B
A–Q A–PQ
B–PST B–PST
36 C 37 C 38 D 39 40
C–R C–QST
D-T D–PR
MATHS
41 8 42 6 43 8 44 8 45 2
46 1 47 2 48 2 49 A,B 5 0 A,B,C,D
51 A,B,C 52 B,C,D 5 3 A,B,C,D 5 4 A,C 5 5 A,B,C,D
A-PQ RST A-P

B-RST B-S
56 B,C 57 A,B 58 C,D 59 60
C-Q C-T
D-P D-R
Narayana IIT Academy 04-05-23_Sr.IIT_OUTGOING_JEE-ADV (2015_P1)_SGTA-2_Key & Sol’s
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. VV  Voltmeter reading initially
VA  Voltage across ammeter initially
Hence VV  VA  8  (1)
VV
Finally  3VA  8  (2)
3
From (1) & (2) VV  6V
12V 1
12  4
2. I = 2 amp.
4
4V
VAB = 3  1  1.5  2 = 6 Volt
Potential diff. across 6 F.
A B
3
Capacitor is  6  2 Volt
63
3. When A and B are joined, energy stored in capacitor = heat produced in R = H1 . It is charging
When B and C are joined, energy stored in capacitor = H1 .

It appears as heat   H 2  in resistance R.
So, H1  H 2
Thus, energy supplied by battery during charging = H1  H 2  2H1  2H 2

(100)2
4. Resistance of heater =  10
1000
62.5
Current to pass through heater =  2.5A
10
Potential difference across heater = 25V
Potential difference across 10 = 75V
So total current = 7.5A
Hence value of R = 5
(So that current is in ratio of 1: 2
5.
0 A 4 0 A
6.
d d 3 d
d 
2 2k
k 2
7. Charge q0  C0V0 q0  C0V0 (charge is conserved)
C
Capacitance C0 C' 0
K
1 q02 1 q02
Energy U  V '
2 C0 2 C' Finally
Initially
Page 2
2
1q
 0
K
2 C0
U '  KU
Work done = Energy final – Energy initial  KU  U   K  1 U
Given  K  1 U  4U  K  1  4  K  5
200
8. Before closing the switch charge on each capacity is
3
After closing the switch 2 F  50 C
4 F  100 C
Net charge passing through switch  50C
9. In steady state,
qC  EC and q2C  2 EC
 C  2CR of both circuits
At time t ,

qC  EC 1  et / C 

q2C  2 EC 1  e t / C 
qC 1

 
q2C 2
10. In steady state, current through capacitor wire is zero. Current flows through 200, 900 and A2 .
q 4  10 3
VC  
C 100  106
 40 V
This is also potential drop across 900 resistance and 100 ammeter A2 (Total resistance =
1000 ). Now, this 1000 and 200 are in series. Therefore,
V1000
V2  V200  
5
40
  8V
5
Emf  V1000  V200   48 V
Emf
i
Net resistance
48 1
  A
1200 25
11. Current through A is the main current passing through the battery. So, this current is more than the
current passing through B. Hence during charging more heat is produced in A. In steady state,
iC  0 and i A  iB
Hence, heat is produced at the same rate in A and B.
Further, in steady state

VC  VB 
2
Page 3
1 1
U  CVC2  C 2
2 8
12. : RA  24, RB  16
24
Initial current through the bulbs I   0.6 A
40
12 12
After switch is closed I A   0.5 A & I B   0.75 A
24 16
Since P  I R
2
Hence brightness of bulbs A decrease and that of B increases

100 33   200 67  
13. Of  ,  are left and right end corrections then;  & 
200 67   100 33  
 2    1 and 2     1
  1cm and   1cm
R L/4
14.   3R  ( R1  R2 )
( R1  R2 ) 3L / 4
R  R1 2 L / 3
  R  2 R2  R1
R2 L/3
5R 4R
Solving them, we get : R1  , R2 

3 3
v2 v2
15. : Given 9 4 r 6
90  r 
2
 4  r 2
2
 10 
 H     5  1  4.13 J
 11 
16. VA  VC  4 , VA  6V VB  0  V0  2V
V 6
Potential gradient K    0.06 V / cm
l 100
Use V  Kl to get b option
Use V  Kl to get the balance of the 4V cell
V 9r 9V
17. Potential gradiant  . 
10r L 10 L
V 10 L
  p.Gr1  BL1  BL1 
2 18
V 9r 9V
If 5r is in series to V pGr2  . 
15r L 15 L
V
  pGr2  BL2
2
V 15 L 15L
.  LB2  LB2 
2 9V 18
18. Before filling the dielectric medium the equivalent capacitance of the circuit is Ci  8 / 3  F .
After filling the dielectric medium the equivalent capacitance of the circuit is C f  4 F .
q  CV   4  8 / 312  16 C
Page 4
Energy taken from the cell = charge flown through the cell x cell voltage  16 12  192  J .
1 1 8
U i  CV 2      12 2  192  J .
2  2 3
1 1
U f  CV 2     4  122  288  J .
2 2
Therefore increase in electrostatic energy stored in the capacitors  96  J .
20. A) At constant charge, the electric field within the capacitor remains same when plate separation is
V
changed. The electric field in capacitor is E  . Hence at constant potential difference the electric
d
field decreases with increases in d.
1 Q2
B) U  . Hence at constant charge U increases with decreases in C.
2 C
1
U  CV 2 . Hence at constant potential difference U decreases with decreases in C.
2
C) capacitance increases on insertion of dielectric.
D) As a result of insertion of dielectric the capacitance increases.
1 Q2
U . Hence at constant charge U decreases with increase in C.
2 C
1

U  CV 2 . Hence at constant potential difference U increases with increase in C.
2
CHEMISTRY
21.
OH OH
BO B
O O O
B
B O
OH OH
x=5
y=0
z=2
22.
Very.dil
Zn 
HNO
 Zn  NO3 2  NH 4 NO3
3
23. P4O10  6 H 2O   4 H 3 PO4

24. EA1 , is higher as compared to EA2 for all the elements in periodic table.
25. End double bond (or) Triple bond.
26. Conceptual
27. Conceptual
28. Benzene ring having strong E.W.K. and Group having L.P attached then Friedel Crafts reaction is
not possible.
35.
Page 5
A

O
(B) In Azulene e- flow takes place from 7 membered ring to 5 memebered ring.
36. Based on S.IR effect
38. Most stable compound exhibit lowest heat of combustion.
30. e-
31. (A) Cu2 S  3/ 2 O2  Cu2O  SO2 
(B) Cu2 S  2Cu2O  6Cu  SO2 
(C) FeS  3/ 2 O2  FeO  SO2 
(D) FeO  SiO2  FeSiO3
33. Pb  NO3 2 

 PbO  2 NO2  1/ 2 O2

2 LiNO3   Li2O  2 NO2  H 2O2

2 NaNO3   Na2O, N 2  5 / 2 O2
NO2 and O2 are paramagnetic

41. Taking the line ax x  5  r cos 
y  4  r sin . It meets x  3y  2  0 at B
MATHS
5  r cos   3  4  r sin    2  0

15
  cos   3sin 
AB
10 6
Likewise,  2 cos   sin  and  cos   sin 
AC AD
2 2 2
 15   10   6  2
       3sin   2 cos   0 or t tan   
 AB   AC   AD  3
2
 The line is y  4    x  5  or 2x  3y  22  0
3
42. Suppose ABCD be the square with A and C on axes
5 7
A   5,0 , C   0,7  and E   ,  be mid point of AC. Slope BD  5  tan 
2 2 7
Equation of BD is
5 7
x y
2 2  r where r   AC
cos  sin  2
74
i.e., r  
2
Solving B   6,6  and D   1,1
Page 6
a bc d
 6
2
43.
C
c3 r r
3 2
3 2
c2
c1
Let O, O1 , O2 , O3 be the centres and r the radius of C3
Then, OO1  2, OO2  3, O1O3  r  3, OO3  5  r , O2O3  r  2
For triangle OO1O3 by cosine rule we get

 r  3  4   5  r   2.2  5  r  cos 
2 2
 r  2  9   5  r   2.3.  5  r  cos  , where   O3OO1

2 2
30
Eliminating cos  , we find r 
19
30 m
  , 2n  m  8
19 n
2 h 2  ab 4 2
44. tan  = =
ab 7
y-axis
(8, 8)
(h, h)
(4, 4)

x-axis
 1
tan = on solving
2 2 2
 1 2 8  h 
sin = =
2 3 2h
Hence equation of circle is (x  6)2 + (y  6)2 = 8.
Page 7
2 2 2
at 1 at 2 at 3
1
45. ar ABC  2at1 2at2 2at3  a 2  t2  t1  t3  t2  t1  t3 
2
1 1 1
at1t2 at2 t3 at3t1

1 a2
Also PQR  a  t1  t2  a  t2  t3  a  t3  t1    t3  t1  t1  t2  t2  t3 
2 2
1 1 1
ar ABC
 2
ar PQR
3 3
46. Any normal will be y + tx = 3t + t , it passes through (2, 8), so 3t3 + 2t - 16 = 0
2
Let f(t) = 3t3 + 2t - 16
 f (t) = 9t2 + 2 < 0, So only one normal.
4
47. Put y  in the equation to circle, we get x 4  2ax3  16ax  16  0
x
Let the roots be x1 , x2 , x3 , x4 then x1  x2  x3  x4  2a
 y1  y2  y3  y4  4a

48.
 Equation to locus is 2 x  y  0
The minimum distance of curve x  2 y  6

2 2
dy
From the line
x y 7
is at a point where tangent is parallel to line

dx
 1
x
 1  x  2 y   2 y   2 y 2  6  y  1, x  2
2
2y
 minimum distance =  distance from  2,1 to x  y  7  0
2 2  k   2
k=
  1   2 
49.  a1 , b1  a2 , b2    2  5  ,3  5   ,
  5  5 
  1   2 
2 5  ,3  5  
  5  5 
  3,5  , 1,1
8  3 1
B  10 10
 1  3
2 
 10  10
Page 8
C   x  2 y  1  4  0
 x  2y  3  0
9 9
Area = =
2 1 2  4
D  PQ = 4 4  2 2
50. (a) x  y  1  x  y  2 xy  1
 4 xy  1  x  y 
2
1 1
(b)   1  xy  x  y  0 is a hyperbola
x y
1 1 1
(c)    0  x 2  3xy  y 2  0 which is a pair of lines
x y x y
1
 0  x  y  1 x  y
2
(d) x  y 
x y
 1 , which is a pair of lines

51.  x  1
2
  y  1    x  y  2   0
2
 x2  y 2     2 x     2 y  2  2  0 
 1
x2  y2  4x  5y  6  0   2

Eq. of common chord P Q is s  s  0 .
    6 x     7  y  8  2  0   3 .

(a) PQ  x  y  2  0
6
   1  6  7 which is impossible
7
(b) PQ  x  y  2  0
6 13
 1   which is possible
 7 2
But when   13 , we can see that the circles (1) and (2) are not intersecting each other and their
2
radical axis is perpendicular to the given line x  y  2  0 .
(c) and (d)
Eq. (3) can be written as
6 x  7 y  8    x  y  2  0
which is in the form L1   L 2  0
Page 9
Solving L 1 and L 2 , we get  6,  4 .
x2 y2
52. Ellipse is  1
4 3
3 1
Here  1  e2  e 
4 2
Foci are  1,0 
Now the hyperbola is having same focus i.e.  1,0  . Let e1 be the eccentricity of hyperbola
2ae1  2
1 e1  4
But 2a  So,
2
 
b 2  a2 e 21  1 
1
16
16  1 
15
16
So, the equation of the hyperbola is
x2 y2 x2 y2 1
  1  
1 15 1 15 16
16 16

Its distance between the directrices 
2a

1 1
 units
e1 2  4 8
2b 2
Length of latus-rectum 
a
2  15  4 15
  units
16  1 2
1 1
53.  Slope of BC  
slope HD 2
Equation of BC is
1
y  5   x  3
2
2 y  10   x  3
x  2 y  13
 6  h 10  k 
 ,    2,3  h  0, k  1
 3 3 
A   0, 1
E=mid HD=(3, 5)
Page 10
R AH 4  16
 In radius r     5
2 2 2
L2
 Area of equilateral triangle ABC is 
3
T P(6,2)
C
E B
A(2,0)
54. F
Clearly P lies on radical axis

PE PB 2 1
 PE.PA  PB.PF    
PF PA 2 5 5
Again PE .PA  PT 2

42 8
 PE  
2 5 5
55.
C1  (3,0) r1  3
C2  (1,0) r2 1
 PQ R is equilateral 
le
 S  I  (1, 0)
In radius of PQR  r1 1
Circum radius of  PQR  2
56.
Page 11
Equation of tangent at p is x  y  4
Clearly mirror image of R(-5,5) lies on line PQ
Now mirror image R ' of R
 '  5  '  5 2  5  5  4
   4
1 1 2
  ' ,  '    1,9 
Let PV cuts the axis at T; As V is midpoint of PT
 T is (-3,7)
Equation SP  y-3 =  1  x  1
3
 x  3 y  10  0
Let S  10  3 ,  
 7 9 3

Again TS || PQ    3
13  3 11
 8   32    4  focus is (-2,4)
57. slope of PV = 22t  0  2

t 0 t
P(t 2 , 2t )
Equation of QV is y   t ( x )
2
16 8 
On solving with y
2
 4x , Q   2
,  V (0, 0) 90 o
t t 
1
Area of  PV Q is .PV .VQ = 20
2 Q
 PV .VQ = 40
By solving above equation t   4,  1
58. (, 2) lie on the parabola y = x2
2 2
(,2) must lie between the asymptotes of hyperbola x  y  1 in 1st and 2nd quadrant
1 4
 Asymptotes are y =  2x
Page 12
 2< 2
 < 0 or > 2
and 2<2
<2 or > 0
 (, 2) or  (2, )
59. (A) Origin should lies inside the triangle

 0 + 0 – 0 – 0 – ( 2  1)  0   R
(B) (2  1,   1) lies inside the circle
 (2  1)2  (   1) 2  2(2  1)  4(  1)  4  0
 6
    0, 
 5
But for smaller segment (2  1,   1) and centre (1, 2) will lie on opposite side of line x + y
– 2 = 0.
2
 
3
 2
    0, 

 3
c 2c
(C) tan   
a/2 a
A
c/2
c/2
B C
a/2 D a/2
c/2 c
tan   
a 2a
1 3
slope of median through C = slope of median through A = .
4 4
(D) Equation of circle is x 2  y 2  (x  y)  0 …(1)
Equation of common chord is
(x 2  y 2  6x  8y – 7)  (x 2  y 2  (x  y))  0
 (6x  8y – 7)   (x  y)  0
This passes through point of intersection of y = x, 6x + 8y – 7 = 0
     2a b 
60. (A) The point P   is  a sec ,b tan  i.e. P , 
6   
6 6   3 3
Page 13
x y
 Equation of tangent at P is  1
3a 3b
2
1 3a
 area of the triangle    3 b  3a 2
2 2
b
 4
a
b2
 e2  1   17
a2
1  sec 2 
(B) eccentricity of the hyperbola x 2  y2 sec2   5 is e1   1  cos 2 
sec 2 
sec 2   1
Eccentricity of the ellipse x 2 sec2   y 2  25 is e 2   sin 
sec 2 
1
e1  3 e 2  1  cos 2   3sin 2   cos   
2

 least positive value of  is  p  24
4
(C) Asymptotes are x   3 y

 angle between the asymptotes is  l 8
3

(D)

any point of xy = 8 is P  8 t, 
 t 
8
x y
 equation of the tangent at P is  1
16t 16
8 8t
1 16t 6
 area of the triangle  . .  16
2 8 8t
Page 14
PAPER-II
KEY
PHYSICS
1 6 2 2 3 2 4 5 5 5
6 2 7 2 8 2 9 B 1 0 A,B,C,D
11 D 12 B,D 13 C 14 A,B 1 5 A,B,C,D
16 A 17 A 18 C 19 B 20 C

CHEMISTRY
21 5 22 2 23 3 24 1 25 6
26 5 27 1 28 8 29 C 30 B
3 1 A,B,C,D 3 2 B 33 B,C 34 B,C 35 B
36 B,C 37 B 38 D 39 C 40 B
MATHS
41 9 42 0 43 6 44 8 45 9
46 1 47 9 48 1 49 B,C 50 A,B,D
51 B,C 52 A,B,C 53 A,B,D 54 A,C 55 A,C,D
56 A,B,D 57 B 58 A 59 D 60 B
Page 1
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. Time constant = RC
0 A
Put c =
 x
d  x 
 k 
d 
X=   Vk 
3 
 
k

2. v = v0  1  e RC 
 
V0 =10V
V=4V
 R R 
RC=  1 2   C1  C2  =4
 R1  R2 
R
3. V= i l  
L
In secondary circuit in primary circuit

E0  2 
V= (E-i1r) i=  
R1  10  15 
= (1.5-1  1.2) L=100cm
=0.3V l=?
4. Equivalent circuit is
E1r2  E2 r1
E
r1  r2
rr
r 12
r1  r2
Power, p=i2 R
2
 E 
p  R
rR
For maximum power, r=R.
Page 2
R1 R3
5. 
R2 R4
ab sl
For wire AB at the midpoint let r be the radius ; r=   ; R=
 2   ab
Rl
X  ar

1 sl
 br
X b b 1
 X   5
1 a a 0.2
6. charge on the hole, q=αQ
Potential at the center, V1=Vsphere- Vhole
KQ Kq KQ
=  = (1   )
R R R
R KQ kQ
Potential at from the center, V2=Vsphere- Vhole  
2 R R
 
2
k 0
V2= 
d
Find
V1
V2
Q
7. we know that flux = 1  cos  
2 0
R
8.
x
dq= sdv
Page 3
 s 4 x dx
2
dq=
R
For r=R; Q1   s 4 x 2 dx
0
R/ 2
R
Q2   s 4 x dx
2
For r=
2 0
KQ1
E1 2 1
 R = find a
E2 KQ2 8
2
R
 
2
s
4 0
9. b) initial capacity C1  2
d 
 
2
0 A 0 A k 0 A
Final capacity   
x  d  d (k  1)
d x  2d  d  
k  k
c2 
c1
 k  1
10. Conseptual
11.
s
2 0  
C1  2
d
2
Page 4
s
2 0  
C3   2
d
s
2 0  
C3   2
d
0 A
Intial capacitance =
d
cc
Final capacitance = 1 2  c3
c1  c2
Find the ratio.
12. Heat produced,
V 2 
H   l
 R 
sl 4sl
R 
d
2
d2
 

2
Rs  R1  R2
R1 R2
Rp 
R1  R2
13.when switch is open
total charge on capacitor
 C1V1  C2V2
 3  6  (6  3)
0
After switch is closed

total charge on capacitor
1 2
 C1V1  C2V2
 3  3  (6)6
 27  c
14.
Page 5
q l  AC
Electric flux,    
0 0 0
 2 R sin 600

0
R 3

0
 Electric field flux,  the wire no. z component
15. When shells are connected
VA  VB
1 Q
V
4 0 R
QA QB
1 Q  
E RA RB
4 0 R 2
Q

4 R 2
16. Conseptual

17. Charge= area of i-t graph
1
= i0t0
2
18. Current , i=mx+c
i 
i    0  t  i0
 t0 
 t 
i  i0  1  
 t0 
t0 2
i0 Rt0
heat   i 2 Rdt 
0
3
19. The sum of potential due to small symmetric parts on y-axis is zero
Page 6
20.
dp = (dq)2R
=(λRdѳ)2R
=2λR2dѳ


2
Net dipole moment =  (dpcs )i


2
=-4R2λi
Page 7
CHEMISTRY
21) 66.7% of twelve electrons = 8e-

Bond pairs = 4
Nonbonding electrons = 12-8 = 4
Lone pairs = 2
As per vsepr theory 4 +2 =6 Hyb. is sp 3 d 2
x = 3 and y= 2
22) d A B  rH  rF  0.09  X F  X H 
:
PCl5 - sp3 d , T.B.P ,non planar

23)
BrF3 - sp3 d , T-shape : planar
ICl2 - sp3 d , Linear: planar
XeF5 - sp 3 d 3 ,pentagonal planar
NO3 - sp 2 , planar
24) SiO2 + 2Mg  2MgO  Si
X
MgO + 2HCl  MgCl2 + H2O

X Y
Br *
*
25) 1. 2. Br 3. Br 4. Br
26)
27)
28) Number of unpaired electrons are 2 in O2 , 1 in O2 , 1 in O2 , 2 in S 2 and zero in O3
29) The bond order in NO is 2.5 while in NO+ is 3
30) Methyl group is strong donar than isopropylgroup (hyperconjugation effect)
31) ‘Al’ is sp3d 2 hybridized ‘B’ is sp3 hybridized
6 3C  2e  bonds, 6 2C  2e  bonds and 6 Al  H  B bonds

32) CH3 and –OCH3 are donating groups while –CF3 is withdrawing group.
Page 8
33) MnO2 acts as catalyst fo r decomposition of O3
9O3  2 I 2  I 4 O9  9O2
CO2  PCl5  POCl3  COCl2
34)
SO2  PCl5  POCl3  SOCl2
35) Hydration takes place As per markovnikof’s rule.
36) Number of lone pairs on Cl in (ii) & (iii) together is 3
* Hybridisation of Cl in (iv) is sp3
* Strongest acid is HClO4 (iv)
37)

38)
39)
40)
MATHS
41. t 3  3t    0 λ= -xyz
x3  3x    x 3 y  3 xy   y
y3  3 y    y 3 z  3 yz   z
z 3  3z    z 3 x  3 zx   x
 x 3 y  y 3 z  z 3 x  3( xy  yz  zx )   ( x  y  z )  9
Page 9
2018
xr
2 2018
 1 

r 1 1  xr
   ( xr  1   
r 1  1  xr 
42.
2018 
 1  xr  xr   2018  xr 
   ( xr  1        ( xr  1  1  
r 1   1  xr   r 1  1  xr 
=-1+1=0
43. 0 constants=1
1 constant = 5C1  2 
2 constants = 5C2  2 
2
3 constants = (5C3  3)23

4 constants = 24
N=1+10+40+56+16=123
44.
A2  2 AB  BA  2 B 2  0
  A  B  A  2B   0
 A  2B  0

AB 1  2 I
| AB 1 | 23 (1)  8
45. |z1 - z2| |z2 - z3| + |z2 - z3| |z3 - z1| + |z3 - z1| | z1 - z2|
 |z1 - z2|2+|z2 - z3|2+|z3 - z1|2
16
 (101  6k )  (99  6k )  ......  1)

k 0
16
 (51  3k )
k 0
2
16065
46. f(1)=1+b+c
f(5)=25+5b+c
f(9)=81+9a+c
Now f(1)-2f(5)+f(9)=32
Since |f(x)|  8for all x in the interval [1,9], we have
|f(1)  8 for all x in the interval [1,9], we have
|f(1)  8;|f(5)|  8;|f(9)|  8
Now from Eq. (i)m
32=|f(1)-2f(5)+f(9)  |f(1)+|f(5)|+|f(9)|  32
 f(1)=f(9)=8;f(5)=-8
i.e., b+c+1=8; 9b+c+81=8; 5b+c+25=-8
The only pair(b,c) that satisfies the condition when b=-10 and c=17
 1 orderd pair.
Page 10
47.
tx    
lim tan sin( 1  cos  
t 
tx  3tx  t  1  x
2
  6 
x 3

x  3x  1
2 1
x  3x 2  9 x  3
1
3 x 2  10 x  3  0  (3x  1)( x  3)  0  x  ,3
3
1
(8  2    )  83  23  1  2  8  1  9
2
2
48.  f ( x)( x  f ( x))dx  3
0
2
 x2  x 
2
2
0  4 
 ( x  f ( x )   dx 
2  3

2 2 2
x2  x 2
0 4 dx  0  f ( x)  2  dx  3

2
2 2 x 2
   f ( x)   dx 
3 0 2 3
2 2
 x
   f ( x)   dx  0
0
2
x
 f ( x)  ;
2
1
 f (1) 
2
49.
Page 11

zG  z0 z1  z0  i 2
 e
OG OA
OA  3OG
z z 
 zG  z0   i  1 0 
 3 
 i i  i i
 zG  z0  1    z1or z0 1    z1
 3 3  3 3
50. (2A + 3BBT)T = IT  2AT + 3BBT=I  A=AT

1 T 1 1 1
(B )  A  ( B )  A  A  B  B  B
T T
Also B 1  a  AB  BA  1
 2 A  3B 2  I  2 AB  3B 3  B  2 I  3B 3  B
 A1  I  AB  3B 3  B  I  I  3B 3  2 I
51. If x is odd
x=2k+1, y=2k + 1, z= 2k + 1, 2k + 2,……..98 - 4k  (98 - 6k) ways
y=2k + 2, z= 2k + 2, 2k + 3,……..97 - 4k  (96 - 6k) ways

y=49 - k, z= 49 - k, 50 - k  2ways
 number of triplets
16
  (98  6k )  (96  6k )  ......  2)
k 0
16
=  (49  3k )(50  3k )
k 0
 14722
If x is even
x=2k, y=2k, z=2k, 2k+1,……., 100-4k  (101-6k)ways
y=2k + 1, z= 2k + 1,…..,99-4k  (99-6k) ways

y=50-k, z=50-k  1 way
 Number of triplets
16
  (101  6k )  (99  6k )  ......  1)
k 0
16
  (51  3k )2
k 0
 16065
52.
Page 12
Graph of f(x)
Now, verify alternatives.
1
1
dy dy e X
53. x 2
 y 2 e X  2  2 dx
dx Y x
Integrating both sides,

1
1 ex 1 1 1
  2 dx C  Putting  t  2 dx  dt      et dt C 
y x x x y
y
1  t
 e C 
1
y
1
 e x  C
 lim f ( x )  1  1  0  c  1
x0
1
1 1
1 1 dy 1 x 
1  ex
 e x  1  y  1
  2
e  2   2
y dx  x 
1
x   x 
1
1 e x
1  e  1  e 
   
dy
  0x  R  0
dx 1
1 and lim 1
0
x o
lim 1
 0 1 e x
x 
1 ex
Graph of the function is
From the graph options (A),(B) and (D) are correct.
Page 13
54.
we have
1 1
2   4  3  2   1 3  15
2 2
55. (a,c,d)
Area of square OACB=2x2=4

Radical axis of the family s=0

AB whose equation x=y+4
Smallest possible circle of family S=0
Has AB as diameter given by
(x-5)(x-7)+(y-1)(y-3)=0  x2+y2-12x-4y+38=0
56.
57 & 58 .
 f(x-2) = f(x+6)
f(x) = f(x+8)
3x, 0  x<1
f(x) = 
4-x, 1 x  4
1 1
1.Required area = 2   4  3  2   1 3  15 c
2 2
2.f(-89)-f(-67)+f(46)=f(-1)-f(-3)+f(-2)=3-1+2=4
Page 14
OUT GOING SR’s Date: 11-05-2023
Time: 3 Hrs SGTA-3 Max. Marks: 186
11-05-23_SR-OUTGOING_Jee-Adv_2016_P1_SGTA-3(PAPER-1)_QP FINAL
Time: 3HRS IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 186

PHYSICS:
Sec – I(Q .N : 1 – 5) Questions with Single Correct Choice 3 -1 5 15
Sec – II(Q .N : 6 – 13) 4 -2 8 32
(Partial Marking +1)
Sec – III(Q .N : 14 – 18) Questions with Integer Answer Type 3 0 5 15
Total 18 62
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – II(Q .N : 24 – 31) 4 -2 8 32
Total 18 62
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – II(Q .N : 42 – 49) 4 -2 8 32
Total 18 62
PHYSICS Max Marks: 62
SECTION – I
answer, out of which O NLY O NE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and –1 in all other cases.
1. Two planets A and B of masses mA and mB are considered fixed in space at separation d. Find the
speed with which a body of mass m is to be projected from the mid point of line joining A and B so
that the body will escape to infinity.
G  mA  mB  2G  mA  mB 
A) V  B) V 
d d
4G  mA  mB  6G  mA  mB 
C) V  D) V 
d d
2. In a region an electric field exist in a given direction and it passes through a circle of radius R
 r
normally. The magnitude of electric field is given as E  E0  1   . Where r is the distance from
 R
centre of circle. Find the electric flux passing through the plane of circle within it.

A)  
 E0 R 2
3
B)  
2 E0 R 2
3
C)  
4 E0 R 2
3
D)  
5 E0 R 2
3
3. A circular wire loop of radius r can with stand a maximum radial force F0 in it before breaking. A
particle of mass m and +ve charge q is sliding over the wire. A magnetic field B is applied normal to
the plane of wire. What maximum speed the particle can have before loop breaks?
4 F0 m 4 F0 m
qB  q 2 B 2  qB  q 2 B 2 
A) Vmax  r B) Vmax  r
3 m / r  4 m / r 
4 F0 m 4 F0 m
qB  q 2 B 2  qB  q 2 B 2 
C) Vmax  r D) Vmax  r
5m / r  2 m / r 
4. A circular coil of radius R and N turns has negligible resistance. As shown in the schematic figure, its
two ends are connected to two wires and it is hanging by those wires with its plane being vertical. The
wires are connected to a capacitor with charge Q through a switch. The coil is in a horizontal uniform
magnetic field B0 parallel to the plane of the coil. When the switch is closed, the capacitor gets
discharged through the coil in a very short time. By the time the capacitor is discharged fully,
magnitude of the angular momentum gained by the coil will be (assume that the discharge time is so
short that the coil has hardly rotated during this time).
Page No: 2

A) NQB0 R 2 B)  NQB0 R 2 C) 2 NQB0 R 2 D) 4 NQB0 R 2
2
5. An AC voltage source of variable angular frequency  and fixed amplitude V0 is connected in series
with a capacitance C and an electric bulb of resistance R (inductance zero). When  is increased.
A) The bulb glows dimmer B) The bulb glows brighter
C) Total impedance of the circuit is unchanged D) Total impedance of the circuit increases
SECTION – II

Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options & +1 partial marks, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong
cases
6. Three concentric conducting spherical shells A,B and C have radii r, 2r and 3r and possess charges
Q1 , Q2 and Q3 respectively. The innermost and the outermost shells are earthed as shown in the figure.
Select the mathematical relations between the charges that are correct.
Q2 Q3 Q3 1
A) Q1  Q3  Q2 B) Q1   C) 3 D) 
4 Q1 Q2 3
7. Two identical sheets of a metallic foil are separated by d and capacitance of the system is C0 and
charged to a potential difference V0 . keeping the charge constant, the separation is increased by l.
Then the new capacitance and potential difference are C and V respectively. Then
C0  l  l V0
A) C  B) C  C0  1   C) V  V0 1   D) V 
 l  d  d  l 
1   1  
 d  d
Page No: 3
8. In the circuit shown, the cell has emf E  10V and internal resistance = 1.
A) The currect through the 3 resistor is 1A.

B) The currect through the 3 resistor is 0.5 A.
C) The currect through the 4 resistor is 0.5 A
D) The currect through the 4 resistor is 0.25 A
9. Two identical charged particles enter a uniform magnetic field with same speed but at angles 300 and
600 with field. The ratio of their time periods, radii and pitches of the helical paths are a, b and c
respectively. Then
A) abc  1 B) c  3ab C) abc  1 D) a  bc
10. Two long, thin, parallel conductors are kept very close to each other whithout touching. One carries a
current I and the other has charge  per unit length. An electron moving parallel to the conductors is

undeflected. Let c=velocity of light.
A)  
 c2
I
I
B)  

1
C) c 

D) The electron may be at any distance from the conductor

11. A particle of mass M and positive charge Q, moving with a constant velocity u1  4iˆ ms 1 , enters a
region of uniform static magnetic field normal to the x-y plane. The region of the magnetic field
extends from x=0 to x=L for all values of y. After passing through this region, the particle emerges
on

the other side after 10 milliseconds with a velocity u2  2  
3iˆ  ˆj ms 1. The correct statement (s) is
(are).
A) The direction of the magnetic field is –z direction
B) The direction of the magnetic field is +z direction
50 M
C) The magnitude of the magnetic field units
3Q
100 M
D) The magnitude of the magnetic field is units
3Q
Page No: 4
12. A long stright wire carries a current, I  2 ampere. A semi-circular conducting rod is placed beside it
on two conducting parallel rails of negligible resistance. Both the rails are parallel to the wire. The
wire, the rod and the rails lie in the same horizontal plane, as shown in the figure. Two ends of the
semi-circular rod are at distances 1 cm and 4cm from the wire. At time t  0, the rod starts moving on
the rails with a speed v  3.0 m / s (see the figure).
A resistor R=1.4  and a capacitor C0  5.0  F are connected in series between the rails. At time
t  0, C0 is uncharged. Which of the following statement(s) is (are) correct? [ 0  4  107 SI units.

Take ln 2  0.7 ]

A) Maximum current through R is 1.2 106 ampere
B) Maximum current through R is 3.8 106 ampere
C) Maximum charge on capacitor C0 is 8.4 1012 coulomb
D) Maximum charge on capacitor C0 is 2.4 10 12 coulomb
13. A source of constant voltage V is connected to a resistance R and two ideal inductors L1 and L2
through a switch S as shown. There is no mutual inductance between the two inductors. The switch S
is initially open. At t  0, the switch is closed and current begins to flow. Which of the following
options is/are correct.
A) The ratio of the currents through L1 and L2 is fixed at all times  t  0 
V L2
B) After a long time, the current through L1 will be
R L1  L2
V L1
C) After a long time, the current through L2 will be
R L1  L2
Page No: 5
V
D) At t  0, the current through the resistance R is
R
SECTION – III
Marking scheme +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and 0 in all other cases.
14. A charge q is surrounded by a closed surface consisting of an inverted cone of height h and base
radius R, and a hemisphere of radius R as shown in the figure. The electric flux through the conical
nq
surface is ( in SI units). The value of n is.
6 0
15. Two resistances R1  X  and R2  1 are connected to a wire AB of uniform resistivity, as shown in

the figure. The radius of the wire varies linearly along its axis from 0.2 mm at A to 1 mm at B.A
galvanometer (G) connected to the center of the wire 50 cm from each end along its axis, shown zero
deflection when A and B are connected to a battery. The value of X is_____
16. A steady current I goes through a wire loop PQR having shape of a right angle triangle with
PQ  3x, PR  4 x and QR  5 x . If the magnitude of the magnetic field at P due to this loop is
 I 
k  0  , find the value of k.
 48 x 
17. An   particle (mass 4 amu) and a single charged sulfur ion (mass 32 amu) are initially at rest. They
are accelerated through a potential V and then allowed to pass into a region of uniform magnetic field
which is normal to the velocities of the particles. Within this region, the   particle and the sulfur ion
move in circular orbits of radii r and rs , respectively. The ratio  rs / r  is____
Page No: 6
18. two inductors L1 (inductance l mH, internal resistance 3  ) and L2 (inductance 2mH,internal
resistance 4  ),and a resistance R(resistance 12  ) are all connected in parallel across a 5V battery.
The circuit is switched on at time t  0. The ratio of the maximum to the minimum current
 I max / I min  drawn from the battery is_____
CHEMISTRY Max Marks: 62

SECTION – I
19.

A) B)
C) D)
20. The green colour produced in the borax bead test of chromium (III) salt is due to
A) Cr2  B4 O7 3 B) Cr2 O3 C) Cr  BO2 3 D) CrB
21. Identify the correct order of solubility of Na2 S ,CuS and ZnS in aqueous medium
A) CuS  ZnS  Na2 S B) ZnS  Na2 S  CuS
C) Na2 S  CuS  ZnS D) Na2 S  ZnS  CuS
22. Identify the wrong order for the property indicated against it
A) NCl3  NH 3  NF3 : basic strength
B) Lu  OH 3  Eu  OH 3  La  OH 3 : basic strength
C) Ba  OH  2  Ca  OH  2  Be  OH 2 : solubility in water at same temperature
D) HOCl  HClO2  HClO3 : Oxidization power
Page No: 7
23. Which of the following alkenes when treated with HCl yields majorly an anti markovnikov product?
A) F3C  CH  CH 2 B) CH 3O  CH  CH 2 C) H 2 N  CH  CH 2 D) Cl  CH  CH 2
SECTION – II
cases
24. For the following compounds the correct statements (s) with respect to nucleophilic substitution
reaction is (are)

A) I and III follows S N 1 mechanism
B) I and II follows S N 2 mechanism
C) compound IV undergoes inversion of configuration

D) The order of reactivity for I,III and IV is :IV >I>III
25. Which of the following statements are correct ?
A) Acidic dichromate solutions on treatment with H 2O2 gives deep blue CrO  O2  2 in presence of
ether layer
B) A deep red liquid, CrO2 Cl2 is formed by the reaction of chromium (III) oxide with HCl in presence
of conc H 2 SO4
C)  NH 4  2 Cr2O7 on heating yields green chromium (III) oxide and nitrogen gas
D) K 2Cr2O7 on heating with charcoal produces K 2CO3
26. The pairs (s) of ions where BOTH the ions are precipitated upon passing H 2 S gas in presence of
dilute HCl is (are)
A) Ba 2  , Zn 2  B) Bi3 , Fe3 C) Cu 2  , Pb 2  D) Hg 2 , Bi 3
27. Which of the following is/are true for oxygen
A) KMnO4  S  on strong heating gives oxygen gas
B) Oxygen mixed with helium is used for artificial respiration

C) It has two unpaired electrons in bonding  molecular orbitals
Page No: 8
D) Brins process is used as industrial method for the preparation of oxygen gas
28. The correct order (S) of acidity is/are
29. Which of the following can give Oxygen gas with water
A) F2 B) XeF2 C) XeF4 D) Ce( IV ) salt
30. Select the wrong IUPAC NAME (S) :

A) 2- hydroxyhexen -4 –one B) 2,3- dimethylcyclohexene
B) hept -1 – en -6 –yn- 5 –o1 D) 1,3 – diethoxypropan-1 –one
31. The correct statement (s) regarding a nucleophilic substitution reaction is
A) During SN 1 mechanism electron deficient carbon must attain planar geometry
B) SN 1 reactions are always accompanied by complete racemisation
C) SN 2 reactions are accompanied by inversion of configuration provided the leaving group and the
incoming group do not differ in priority
D) Aprotic polar solvent promote SN 1 reaction
Page No: 9
SECTION – III
32. An aqueous solution contains Hg 2  , Hg 2 2  , Pb 2  , Ag  , Bi 3 and Cd 2 .Out of these how many ions will
produce white precipitate with dilute HCl ?
33. The weight percentage of hydrogen in Q , formed in the following reaction sequence, is _______
[Given :Atomic mass of H  1, C  12, N  14, O  16, S ,32, Cl  35 ]

34. In major product of the following reaction .Find no of sp 2 atoms ________

35. How many of the following ions have spin magnetic moment more than 4 B.M
Ti3 , Cu  , Ni 2  , Fe3 , Mn 2  , Co 2 
36. No of correct statement/s about ICl5 and ICl4 is/are
i) ICl5 is square pyramidal and ICl4 is tetrahedral

ii) Both are isostructural
III) ICl5 is square pyramidal and ICl4 is square planar
IV) ICl5 is trigonal bipyramaidal and ICl4 is tetrahedral
Page No: 10
MATHEMATICS Max Marks: 62
SECTION – I
37. The algebraic sum of distances of the line ax + by + 2 = 0 from (1, 2), (2, 1) and (3, 5) is zero and the
lines bx – ay + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 cut the co-ordinate axes at concyclic points then
2
A) a  b  
7
14
B) area of the triangle formed by the line ax + by + 2 = 0 with coordinate axes is .
5
C) line ax + by + 3 = 0 always passes through the point  1,1
5
D) max {a, b} =

7
38. Equation of circle touching the line |x  2| + |y  3| = 4 will be
A) (x  2)2 + (y  3)2 = 12 B) (x  2)2 + (y  3)2 = 4
C) (x  2)2 + (y  3)2 = 10 D) (x  2)2 + (y  3)2 = 8
39. The ratio of the area enclosed by the locus of mid-point of PS and area of the ellipse where P is any
point on the ellipse and S is the focus of the ellipse, is
1 1 1 1
A) B) C) D)
2 3 5 4
40. If a chord joining P( aSec, a tan  ), Q( aSec , a tan  ) on the hyperbola x 2  y 2  a 2 is the normal at
P,then T an  =
A) Tan(4sec 2   1) B) Tan(4sec 2   1) C) Tan(2Sec 2  1) D) Tan(1  2Sec2  )
41. A variable straight line of slope 4 intersects the hyperbola xy = 1 at two points. The locus of the point
which divides the line segment between these two points in the ratio 1 : 2 is
A) 16 x 2  10 xy  y 2  2 B) 16 x 2  10 xy  y 2  2
C) 16 x 2  10 xy  y 2  4 D) 16 x 2  10 xy  y 2  4
Page No: 11
SECTION – II
cases
   
42. If the unit vectors a and b are inclined at an angle 2 such that a  b  1 and 0     , then  lies in
the interval
A) [0, /6) B) (5/6, ]
C) (/6, /2] D) [/2, 5/6)
  
43. If a , b , c are non-zero, non-collinear vectors such that a vector
    

 
p = ab cos 2   a  b   
   
c and a vector q = ac cos    a  c  b then p + q is
 
A) parallel to a B) perpendicular to a
   

C) coplanar with b & c D) coplanar with a and c
  
44. Given three vectors a , b , c such that they are nonzero, noncoplanar vectors, then which of the
following are coplanar.
           
A) a  b , b  c , c  a B) a  b , b  c , c  a
           
C) a  b , b  c , c  a D) a  b, b  c, c  a
 
45. Let OABC be a tetrahedron whose four faces are equilateral triangles of unit side. Let OA  a ,
   
OB  b and OC  c , then
 1      1    

A) c  a  b  2 2 a  b
3
 
B) c  a  b  2 3 a  b
2

1  1
C) volume of the tetrahedron is D) a b c 
2 3 2
         1
46.   
If a, b,c, d are unit vectors such that a  b . c  d  1 and a.c  then
2
    
A) a, b, c are non coplanar B) b,d are non parallel
      
C) b, c, d are coplanar D) a, d are parallel and b, c are parallel
47. The equation of the line x + y + z – 1 = 0, 4x + y – 2z + 2 = 0 written in the symmetrical form is

x 1 y  2 z  0 x y z 1
A)   B)  
1 2 1 1 2 1
Page No: 12
x  1/ 2 y  1 z  1/ 2 x 1 y  2 z  2
C)   D)  
1 2 1 2 1 2
48. Consider the planes 3x – 6y + 2z + 5 = 0 and 4x – 12y + 3z = 3. The plane

67x – 162y + 47z + 44 = 0 bisects that angle between the given planes which
A) Contains origin B) is acute C) is obtuse D) none of these
49. The plane lx + my = 0 is rotated about its line of intersection with the plane z = 0, through an angle 
, then equation of plane in its new position may be
A) lx  my  z l 2  m2 tan   0 B) lx  my  z l 2  m 2 tan   0
C) data is not sufficient D) None of these
SECTION – III
50.
The plane 2 x  2 y  z  3 is rotated about the line where it cuts the xy plane by an acute angle  . If
the new position of plane contains the point (3, 1, 1) then 9 cos  equal to …….
343
51. T h e v a l u e of x. y. z  55 or a ccor di ng a s t h e series a ,x,y,z,b for m a n A .P or H .P
55
respectively , w h ere a a n d b a re positive n a t u r a l n u m bers. T h e s u m of a + b is____
Let P( x)  x  bx  c , where b and c are integer. If P( x ) is a factor of both x 4  6 x2  25 and

2
52.
3x4  4 x2  28x  5 , then the value of P(1) is
n n
Cr k
53. If  (1)r
r 0
( r  2)

Cr n2
, then the value of k is
54. If the integers a, b, c in order are in A.P., lying between 1 and 9 and a23, b53, and c83 are three-digit numbers,
2 5 8
then the value of the determinant a23 b53 c83 is...
a b c
Page No: 13
Time: 3 Hrs IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 186
PHYSICS:

Sec – II(Q .N : 7 – 14) 4 -2 8 32
Sec – III(Q .N : 15 – 18) 3 0 4 12
(2 Comprehension-2 + 2 = 4 Q)
Total 18 62
CHEMISTRY:
Sec – II(Q .N : 25 – 32) 4 -2 8 32
Sec – III(Q .N : 33 – 36) 3 0 4 12
Total 18 62
MATHS:
Sec – II(Q .N : 43 – 50) 4 -2 8 32
Sec – III(Q .N : 51 – 54) 3 0 4 12
Total 18 62
SECTION – I
1. Distance between two fixed stars in space is 10a and their radii are a and 2a with masses
M and 16 M . A small body of mass m is fired from the surface of larger star to the smaller star. What
should be the minimum initial speed to reach the surface of smaller star.
3 5GM 3 3GM 3 3GM 3 5GM

A) v  B) v  C) v  D) v 
5 a 2 a 5 a 2 a
2. A uniform rod of length L and mass

 M is pivoted at its centre O as shown in figure. At the top endof
rod a dipole of dipole moment P is fixed along the length of rod. If a uniform electric field E is
switched on in this region toward right, find angular speed of rod when it becomes horizontal(parallel

to E ).

24PE 18PE 12PE 6PE
A)   B)   C)   D)  
ML2 ML2 ML2 ML2
3. Figure shows four parallel plates with some connections .If area of each plate is A and separation
between adjoining plates is d. Find the equivalent capacitance across terminals x and y .
2 0 A 2 0 A 2 0 A 2 0 A
A) C xy  B) C xy  C) C xy  D) C xy 
7d 5d 9d 3d
4. Figure shows a cylinder of length l, radius R and mass m on a rough inclined plane. A coil of N turns
is wrapped along a diametrical plane (parallel to the inclined plane) of cylinder as shown. In the space
a uniform magnetic field B exist in vertical direction. Find the least current that should pass through
the coil which will keep the cylinder in equilibrium.
Page No: 2
mg mg mg mg
A) i  B) i  C) i  D) i 
5 BlN 3BlN 2 BlN 10 BlN
5. Which one of the following options represents the magnetic field B at O due to the current flowing in
the given wire segments lying on the xy plane ?

 0 I  3 1 ˆ  0 I  3 1 ˆ
A) B   k B) B   k
L  2 4 2 
 
L  2 2 2 
 0 I  1 ˆ  0 I  1 ˆ
C) B  1 k D) B  1  k
L  4 2 
 L  4 
6. A point mass is subjected to two simultaneous sinusoidal displacement in x  direction x1  t   A

 2 
sin t and x2  t   A sin  t   . Adding a third sinusoidal displacement x3  t   B sin t   
 3 
brings the mass to a complete rest. The values of B and  are :
3 4 5 
A) 2 A, B) A, C) 3 A, D) A,
4 3 6 3
SECTION – II
cases
Page No: 3
7. A conducting sphere A of radius a, with charge Q, is placed concentrically inside a conducting shell B
of radius b. B is earthed. C is the common centre of A and B, then the
Q
A) field at a distance r from C, where a  r  b, is
4 0 r 2
Q
B) potential at a distance r from C, where a  r  b, is
4 0 r
Q 1 1
C) potential difference between A and B is   
4 0  a b 
Q 1 1
D) potential at a distance r from C, where a  r  b, is   
4 0  r b 
8. A 2  F capacitor is charged to a potential of 15V and a 3  F is charged to a potential of 10 V and the

capacitors are connected such that positive plate of one is connected to the negative plate of the other

capacitor and negative plate of one is connected to the positive plate of the other capacitor. Select the
correct statement(s) about the final circuit.
A) Final charge on each capacitor is zero
B) Final total electrical energy of the capacitor will be non zero
C) Total charge flown in the circuit is 30 C
D) Total energy loss is 0
9. The ammeters, A1 and A2 , each of resistance 5 are connected as shown. An ideal cell of emf 10V
is applied between A and B, then
A) the current drawn from the cell is 1 A
B) the reading of A1 is 1 A
Page No: 4
C) the reading of A2 is 1 A
D) for C1 joined to C2 and D1 joined to D2 , the ammeter readings will become equal
10. Three long straight current carrying conductors are shown in figure. The straight parts are long and
the circular part in each case is three fourth of a complete circle. Let Ba , Bb and Bc represents the
strength of field at the centre O in the three cases, then
0 i  3 1  0 i  3 1 
A) Ba     B) Bb    
4R  2   2R  4  

0 i  3 1  3 0 i
C) Ba     D) Bc 
4R  2   8R
11. A straight thin walled tube of radius “a” has a current I flowing through it. If B  r  is the magnitude of
the magnetic field at a distance r from the axis of the tube then,
1
A) B  r   0 for 0  r  a B) B  r   for 0  r  a
r
1
C) B  r  for r  a D) B  r   0 for r  a
r
12. A conductor (Shown in the figure) carrying constant current I is kept in the x-y plane in a uniform
magnetic field B . If F is the magnitude of the total magnetic force acting on the conductor, then the
correct statement (s) is (are) :
A) If B is along zˆ, F   L  R  B) If B is along xˆ, F  0

C) If B is along yˆ, F  L  R  D) If B is along zˆ, F  0
Page No: 5
13. Two concentric circular loops, one of radius R and the other of radius 2R , lie in the xy  plane with
the origin as their common center, as shown in the figure. The smaller loop carries current I1 in the
anti-clockwise direction and the larger loop carries current I 2 in the clockwise direction, with

I 2  2 I1.B  x, y  denotes the magnetic field at a point  x, y  in the xy  plane . Which of the
following statement(s) is (are) correct ?

A) B  x, y  is perpendicular to the xy-plane at any point in the plane

B) B  x, y  depends on x and y only through the radial distance r  x 2  y 2


C) B  x, y  is non-zero at all points for r  R

D) B  x, y  points normally outward from the xy-plane for all the points between the two loops
14. The instantaneous voltages at three terminals marked X, Y and Z are given by
 2   4 
Vx  V0 sin t ,VY  V0 sin  t   and Vz  V0 sin  t  
 3   3 
An ideal voltmeter is configured to read rms value of the potential difference between its terminals. It
is connected between points X and Y and then between Y and Z. The reading(s) of the voltmeter will
be :
1
rms
A) VXY  V0 B) VYZrms  V0
2
3
C) Independent of the choice of the two terminals rms
D) VXY  V0
2
Page No: 6
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph. Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Paragraph for Questions 15 and 16
A thermal power plant produces electric power of 600 kW at 4000V , which is to be transported to a
place 20 km away from the power plant for consumer’s usage. It can be transported either directly
with a cable of large current carrying capacity or by using a combination of step-up and step-down
transformers at the two ends. The drawback of the direct transmission is the large energy dissipation.
In this method using transformers, the dissipation is much smaller. In this method, a step-up
transformer is used at the plant side so that the current is reduced to smaller value. At the consumer’s
end, a step-down transformer is used to supply power to the consumers at the specified lower voltage.
It is reasonable to assume that the power cable is purely resistive and the transformers are ideal with a
power factor unity. All the currents and voltages mentioned are rms values.
15. If the direct transmission method with a cable of resistance 0.4 km 1 is used, the power dissipation

(in%) during transmission is :
A) 20 B) 30 C) 40 D) 50
16. In the method using the transformers, assume that the ratio of the number of turns in the primary to
that in the secondary in the step-up transformer is 1:10 . If the power to the consumers has to be
supplied at 200 V , the ratio of the number of turns in the primary to that in the secondary in the step-
down transformer is:
A) 200:1 B) 150:1
C) 100:1 D) 50:1
A point charge Q is moving in a circular orbit of radius R in the x  y plane with an angular velocity
Q
 .This can be considered as equivalent to a loop carrying a steady current . A uniform magnetic
2
field along the positive z  axis is now switched on, which increases at a constant rate B. The
application of the magnetic field induces an emf in the orbit. The induced emf is defined as the work
done by an induced electric field in moving a unit positive charge around a closed loop. It is known
that, for an orbiting charge, the magnetic dipole moment is proportional to the angular momentum
with a proportionality constant  .
Page No: 7
17. The magnitude of the induced electric field in the orbit at any instant of time during the time interval
of the magnetic field change is:
BR BR
A) B) C) BR D) 2BR
4 2
18. The change in the magnetic dipole moment associated with the orbit, at the end of the interval of the
magnetic field change, is
BQR 2 BQR 2
A)  BQR 2 B)  C)  D)  BQR 2
2 2
CHEMISTRY Max. Marks: 62

SECTION-I
(Single Correct Answer Type)
This section contains 6 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which
O NLY O NE option can be correct.
19. The increasing order of stability of the following free radicals is

   
A)  CH 3  2 C H   CH 3 3 C   C6 H 5 2 C H  (C 6 H 5 )3 C

   
B) (C 6 H 5 )3 C   C6 H 5  2 C H   CH 3 3 C   CH 3 2 C H
   
C)  C6 H 5 2 C H  (C 6 H5 )3 C   CH 3 3 C   CH 3 2 C H
   
D)  CH 3  2 C H   CH 3 3 C  (C 6 H 5 )3 C   C6 H5 2 C H
20. I 3 and I 3 have same :

A) geometry B) no. of lone pair (s)
C) bond angle D) none of these
21. CH 3  CH  CH 2  NOCl  P Identify the adduct :
A) CH 3  CH  CH 2 B) CH 3  CH  CH 3
| | | |
Cl NO NO Cl
C) CH 3  CH 2  CH 2 D) CH 2  CH 2  CH 2
| | |
Cl NO Cl
22. Consider the following reaction :

z
xMnO4  yC2O42  zH   xMn 2  2 yCO2  H 2O
2
The values of x,y and z in the reaction are, respectively :
A) 2,5 and 16 B) 5,2 and 8 C) 5,2 and 16 D) 2,5 and 8
Page No: 8
23. Select incorrect statement.
A) Shielding effect of “ f ” electrons are minimum out of all the electrons of N – shell
B) As the “f” electrons increase , Z eff . on outer electron decreases in lanthanides
C ) Z eff . on outer electron is Lu  La
D) In lanthanide series electrons are filled in (n-2) f subshell

24. Which of the following is example of SN 2
A) CH 3 Br  OH   CH 3OH  Br 
CH 3  CH  CH 3  Br
B) CH 3  CH  CH 3  OH   |
| OH
Br
 H 2O
C) CH 3  CH 2  OH   H 2C  CH 2
CH 3 CH 3
| |
D) CH 3  C  CH 3  OH  CH 3   C  CH 3  Br 

| |
Br OH

SECTION-II
(Multiple Correct Answer Type)
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options & +1 partial marks, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong cases.
25. Select correct statement(s) a:

A) All N  N bond length are same in N 3 (Azide) ion
B) All N  N bond length are not identical in HN 3 (Hydrazine acid)
C) In HN 3 N  N bond length is shorter than the central N  N bond length
D) Azide ion and hydrazoic acid have same number of electrons

26. Which of the following statements are correct here?
 OH
A) CH 3 Br 
in.aq
 can show S N 1 reaction
HCOOH
CH 3
B) CH 3 CH  Br 
 CH3  COK
3
Follow Hoffmann’s rule

C) Walden inversion is always by S N 1 mechanism
D) R  X 
Nal
Acetone
S N 2 mechanism is followed
Page No: 9
27. Na2  B4O5 (OH )4  .8H 2O is called borax Select correct for borax.
A) On heating glassy solid obtain which is a composition of NaBO2 and B2O3 .

B) All boron’s use sp3 orbital’s for bonding .
C) Its aqueous solution is alkaline in nature.
D) Its aqueous solution produce boric acid when treated with conc. H 2 SO4 .
28.

Cl2 product
hv

Which of the following is/are correct here regarding this reaction ?
A ) It is a free radical addition reaction
B) Here product is   Lindane
C) It is an explosive reaction
D) The product is a famous insecticide
29. Which one of the following is/are correct order of boiling points of the alky1/ary1 halides?

A) CH 3  CH 2 3 Cl  CH 3  CH 2  2 Cl
B)  CH 3 3 CCl   CH 3 2 CHCH 2Cl
C) CHCl3  CH 2 Cl2
D) C6 H 5 Br  C6 H 5Cl
30. In which of the following coloration does/do not arise due to d-d transition?
A) AgI B) MnO4 C) Fe2aq . D) CrO42 
31. In the extraction of copper, metal is formed in the Bessemer converter due to which one of the
following reaction ?
A) Cu2 S  2Cu2O  6Cu  SO2 B) Cu2 S  2Cu  S
C) Cu2 O  Fe  2Cu  FeO D) 2Cu2O  4Cu  O2
32. The incorrect is /are :

A)  CH 3 3 CBr  CN   E1 B)  CH 3 3 CBr  H 2O  E 2
C) CH 3CHBrCH 3  O  H  SN 2 D) CH 3CH 2CH 2Cl  I   S N 1
Page No: 10
SECTION-III
(Paragraph Type)
This section contains 2 groups of question. Each group has 2 multiple choice questions based on a paragraph.
Each question has 4 choice (A), (B),(C) AND (D) for its answer, out of which O NLY O NE is correct.
Aluminium is the most abundant metal in earth crust. It exists in only combine state like oxide, fluoride,
sulphates, phosphate etc. Aluminium is mainly extracted by bauxite ore which is generally contaminated by
ferric oxide (red bauxite ) and silica (white bauxite).
33. Other than caustic soda, which of the following can be used to separate chief impurity in red
bauxite?
A) Conc. Nitric acid B) Conc.hydrochloric acid
C) Conc. aq. Solution of ammonia D) None of these
34. If white bauxite is treated with conc. solution of sodium hydroxide silica present in bauxite:
A) remains unaffected B) forms soluble silicate
C) forms insoluble silicate D) none of these

35. Here the compound (p) can be?
A) B)
C) D)
36. Here the compound S can be given as?
A) B)
Page No: 11
C) D)
MATHEMATICS Max. Marks: 62

SECTION-I
(Single Correct Answer Type)
This section contains 6 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A), (B), (C) and (D) out of which
O NLY O NE option can be correct.
37. A group of students decided to buy a Alarm Clock priced between Rs. 170 to Rs 195. But at the
last moment, two students backed out of the decision so that the remaining students had to pay
1 Rupee more than they had planned. If the students paid equal shares, the price of the Alarm
Clock is
A) 190 B) 196
C) 180 D) 171
38.
The 2008th term of the sequence 1, 2,
n(n  1)
 2, 2, 3,3,3, 3,3,3, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, 4, . . . where n occurs
 
3 6 10
times in the sequence, equals

2
A) 24 B) 23
C) 22 D) 21
32
39. If 7 divides 3232 , t h e re m a i n der is
A) 1 B) 0 C) 4 D) 6
3 2 2
y 1 y z y x
2 3 2
40. The number of positive integral solutions of the equation yz z 1 z x  11 is
2 2 3
yx x z x 1
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4
41. If , ,  a re t h e roots of t h e eq u a t io n x 3 + p x + q = 0 , t h e n t h e v al u e of t h e deter m i n a n t
  
   is
  
A) 4 B)2 C)0 D) –2
Page No: 12
42. T h e coefficie n t of t h e ter m i n depe n de n t of x i n t h e ex p a n sio n of
10
 x 1 x 1 
 2/3 1/3  1/ 2 
 x  x 1 x  x 
A) 7 0 B) 1 1 2 C) 1 0 5 D) 2 1 0
SECTION-II
(Multiple Correct Answer Type)
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options & +1 partial marks, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong cases.
43. If a and b are unit vectors and c is a vector such that c  a x c  b then
 
2
A)  a b c   b . c  a . b B)  a b c  = 0
1 1
C) Maximum value of  a b c   D) Minimum value of  a b c  is
2 2
44.  
 
If a vector r s a tisfies t h e eq u a tio n r  iˆ  2jˆ  kˆ  î  k,

ˆ t h e n r is eq u a l to

A) î  3ˆj  kˆ
B) 3iˆ  7 ˆj  3kˆ
 
C) ˆj  t iˆ  2ˆj  kˆ w h ere t is a n y sc a l a r
D) î  (t  3)ˆj  kˆ w h ere t is a n y sc a l a r
   
45. In a four-dimensional space where unit vectors along axes are î , ˆj, kˆ and ̂ and a1 ,a 2 ,a 3 ,a 4 are four
non zero vectors such that no vector can be expressed as linear combination of others and
         
( 1)(a1  a 2 )  (a 2  a 3 )   (a 3  a 4  2a 2 )  a 3  a 4  o then
2 2 1
A)   1 B)    C)   D)  
3 3 3
   
46. A vector (d) is equally inclined to three vectors a  î  ˆj  kˆ , b  2iˆ  ˆj and c  3jˆ  2kˆ .
        
Let x , y , z be three vectors in the plane of a , b ; b, c ; c, a respectively then
   
A) x .d  14 B) y.d  3
      
C) z.d  0 D) r .d  0 where r  x  y  z
x y z
47.    1 intersects the co-ordinate axes at points A, B and C respectively. If PQR has mid-
a b c
points A, B and C then
A) centroids of ABC and PQR coincide
Page No: 13
B) foot of normal to ABC from O is circumcentre of PQR
2 2 2 2 2 2
C) ar  PQR   2 a b  b c  c a
D) incentres of ABC and PQR coincide
48. The projection of line 3x  y  2z  1  0  x  2y  z  2 on the plane 3x  2y  z  0 is
x 1 y 1 z 1
A)   B) 3x  8y  7z  4  0  3x  2y  z
11 9 15
x  12 y  8 z  14 x  12 y  8 z  14
C)   D)  
11 9 15 11 9 15
49. The equation of three planes are x  2 y  z  3, 5 x  y  z  8, and x  y  z  7 then
A) they form a triangular prism

B) all three plane have a common line of intersection
x y z
C) line   is parallel to each plane

1 2 3
x y z
D) line   intersect all three plane
1 3 4
50. If P1 , P2 , P3 denote the distances of the plane 2 x  3 y  4 z  2  0 from the planes 2 x  3 y  4 z  6  0 ,

4 x  6 y  8 z  3  0 and 2 x  3 y  4 z  6  0 respectively, then
A) P1  8 P2  P3  0 B) P3  16 P2 C) 8P2  P1 D) P1  2 P2  3P3  29
SECTION-III
(Paragraph Type)
This section contains 2 groups of question. Each group has 2 multiple choice questions based on a paragraph.
Each question has 4 choice (A), (B),(C) AND (D) for its answer, out of which O NLY O NE is correct.
x2 y2
If  ,  ,  ,  are eccentric angles of 4 – points on the ellipse   1 the normals at which are
a2 b2
concurrent then
51.      =

A) 2n , n  z B) (2n  1) ,n z
2

C) (2n  1) , n  z D) (2n  1) , n  z
4
Page No: 14
cos      cos      cos      cos       cos       cos      
52.
A) 6 B) 3 C) 0 D) 1

In a PQR , with PQ  r , QR  p , PR  q the cosine values of the angles are given by
q2  r2  p2 p 2  r 2  q2 p2  q 2  r 2
cos P  ; cos Q  ; cos R  , and the area of PQR is
2qr 2 pr 2 pq
1 1 1
 pq sin R  qr sin P  pr sin Q . Let ABCD be a parallelogram whose diagonal
2 2 2
equations are AC  x  2 y  3  0 ; BD  2 x  y  3  0 . If AC  4units , and area of ABCD = 8
sq
units, and BPC is acute where P is point of intersection of diagonals AC, BD, then
53. The length of other diagonal BD is
10 20 11 2
A) B) 2 C) D)
3 3 3
54. The length of side AB is equal to

A)
2 58
3
B)
4 58
3
C)
58
3
D)
4
3
58
Page No: 15
KEY
PHYSICS
1 C 2 A 3 D 4 B 5 B
6 ABC 7 AC 8 AD 9 BCD 10 AD
11 AC 12 AC 13 ABC 14 3 15 5
16 7 17 4 18 8
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot C H E M IST RY

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C C D B A ABD ACD CD ABD
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
ACD ABCD ABCD AC 3 1 8 2 1
MATHS
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
C D D B A AB BC BCD AD
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
BC ABC AB AB 7 8 4 2 0
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. Due to planets A& B, gravitational
Potential at O (mid point) is
GmA GmB
V0   
   
d
2
d
2
For body projected from O to escape to  ,we must have.

1 2
mv  mV0  0
2
V 2 2GmA 2GmB
  0
2 d d
4G  m A  mB 
V 
d

2.
Area of elemental ring is

dS  2 xdx
Electric flux through elemental ring is
d  E ds
 x
d  E0  1   .2 xdx
 R
2 E0 x 2
d  2 E0 xdx  dx
R
2 E0 2
R R
 =  d  2 E0  xdx 
R 0
Total flux x dx
0
R
 x 2 x3   R 2 R 2   E0 R 2
 2 E0     2 E0    
 2 3R  0  2 3 3
 E0 R 2

3
3.
OUTGOING SR Page 2
For rev of bead in wire we use

Along radial direction
mv 2
 qvB  N
r
mv 2
 qvB  F0  0
r
4F m
qB  q 2 B 2  0
Vmax  r
2 m / r 
4.

5.
6.
OUTGOING SR Page 3
7.

8.
9.
OUTGOING SR Page 4
.
10.
11.
OUTGOING SR Page 5
12.
13.
OUTGOING SR Page 6
14.
15.
16.
OUTGOING SR Page 7
17.
18.
OUTGOING SR Page 8

MATHS
37. Key.C
 8
Sol. Line always passes through the point  2,  hence 6a + 8b + 6 = 0  3a + 4b + 3 = 0
 3
bx – ay + 4 = 0 and 3x + 4y + 5 = 0 are concyclic.
So, m1m2 = 1
b 3
.   1  4a + 3b = 0
a 4
Solving a = 9/7, b = 12 / 7

38. Key.D
Sol. PERPENDICULAR distance from centre to tangent = radius
x+y=9
(2,3)
| 239| 4 4 2
r   2 2
2 2 2
Equation of circle is (x  2)2 + (y  3)2 = 8
39. Key. D
OUTGOING SR Page 9
x2 y2
Sol. Ellipse equation is   1, Area =  ab
a2 b2
Let P  (a cos  , b sin  )
S  ( ae, 0)
M(h,k) mid point of PS
ae  a cos  b sin 
h ;k 
2 2
ae
h 2
 2  k  1 , locus of (h,k) is ellipse
a / 2 (b2 / 4)
 a  b  1
Area        ab
 2  2  4
40. Key.B
Sol. Slope of chord joining P and Q = slope of normal at P

Tan  Tan  Tan
  Tan  Tan   k Tan and sec   sec   k sec 
sec   sec  sec 
1  k  Tan  Tan  1. 1  k  sec  sec  2.
2 2
 1  k  sec    1  k  Tan  = sec 2   Tan 2 
 
 k  2 sec2   Tan 2   4 sec2   2
  
From (1) Tan  Tan 1  4 sec 2  2  Tan  4 sec 2  1 . 
41. Key.A
Sol. Let P(h, k)
y - k = 4(x - h) --- (1)
Let it meets xy = 1 ----(2) at A  x1 , y1  and B  x2 , y2 
4h  k 1 2x  x 2 8h  k 2h  k
x1  x 2  , x1x 2   Also  1  h  x1  , x2 
4 4 3 4 2
 16x 2  10xy  y2  2
42. Key.A,B
 
Sol. Since, a and b are unit vectors, we have
   
a  b 
2
ab 
  
 a    b   2a .b 
2 2
 1  1  2cos 2  2 sin 
 
Therefore, a  b  1
 2 sin   1
OUTGOING SR Page 10
1
sin  
2
 
   0, 
 6
 5 
or  , 
 6 
43. Key.B,C
   
Sol. p  a b cos (2  ) c where is the angle between a and b and
   
q  a c cos(   ) b where is the angle between a and c
            
Now p  q = (a b cos ) c  a c cos  b = (a .b) c  (a .c) b = a  (c  b) B and C
44. Key.B,C,D
  
Sol. Verify v1  v2  v3 in order to quickly answer
45. Key.A,D
          1
Sol. Let C  xa  yb  z(a  b). Taking succecive dots with a, b, c and a  b we get x = y =
3

2 2
and z =  .
3
46. Key.B,C
   
Sol.   
a  b . c  d  1  sinsin ( (nˆ 1.nˆ 2 )  1  sinsin cos = 1
 sin = 1, sin = 1 and cos = 1  =  = /2,  = 0 i.e., nˆ 1 ||nˆ 2
     1 1
So, a, b, c, d are coplanar. Again a.c   cos =  = /3
2 2
   
So, no two of vectors a, b, c, d are parallel.
47. Key.A,B,C
Sol. x+y+z–1=0
4x + y – 2z + 2 = 0
 direction ratios of the line are < - 3, 6, - 3 >
i.e. < 1, - 2, 1 >
Let z = k, then x = k – 1, y = 2 – 2k
i.e. (k – 1, 2 – 2k, k) is any point on the line
(-1, 2, 0), (0, 0, 1) and   ,1,  are points on the line
1 1

 2 2
 (A), (B) and (C) are correct options
48. Key.A,B
Sol. 3x – 6y + 2z + 5 = 0 …(i)
- 4x + 12y – 3z + 3 = 0 …(ii)
3x  6y  2z  5 4x  12y  3z  3

9  36  4 16  144  9
Bisects the angle between the planes that contains the origin
13(3x – 6y + 2z + 5) = 7(- 4x + 12y – 3z + 3)
OUTGOING SR Page 11
39x – 78y + 26z + 65 = 0 28x + 84y – 2 1z + 21
67x – 162y + 47z + 44 = 0 …(iii)
Further 3 x (-4)+ (-6) (12) + 2 x (- 3) < 0
 origin lies in acute angle
49. Key.A,B
Sol. Equation of required plane is
lx + my + z = 0
angle between (i) &lx + my = 0 is  .
l 2  m2
 cos  
l 2  m 2 l 2  m2   2
l 2  m2
 cos 2       l 2  m 2 tan 
l  m2  2
2
Hence equation of plane is

lx  my  z l 2  m2 tan   0
50. Key:7
Hint: Let equation of new plane 2 x  2 y  z  3   z  0

Point (3, 1, 1) lie on it    2

Hence equation of new plane 2x – 2y –z = 3
4  4 1 7
cos   
3.3 9
51. Key.8
Sol. If a,x, y,z, b to are in A.P then the common difference d of the AP is given by
ba
b  a  4d  d 
4
a  b  a b  3a
 x ad  
4 4
aba a b
y  a  2d  
2 2
 b  a  a  3b
z  a  3d  a  3  
 4  4
b  3a a  b a  3b
 xyz   
4 2 4
 55 
 3a  b  a  b  a  3b 
32
  3a  b  a  b  a  3b   55  32
When a,x,y,z,b are in H.P . Then
1 1 1 1
, , , are in AP
a x y b
Let D be the common different of this A.P . Then
1 1 a b
  4D  D 
b a 4ab
1 1 1 a  b 3b  a
  D  
x a a 4ab 4ab
OUTGOING SR Page 12
1 1 1 a b a  b
  2D   
y a a 2ab 2ab
1 1 1 3  a  b  3a  b
  3D   
z a a 4ab 4ab
1 1 1  3a  b  a  b  3a  b 
 . . 
x y z 32a 3 b 3
1  3a  b   a  b  a  3b  
 
xyz 32a 3 b3
55 55  32
 
343 32 a 3b3
  ab   73
3
 ab  7
 a  a , b  7, or a  7, b  1
52. Key.4
Sol. Since P ( x) divides into both of them
Hence P(x) also divides
(3x4  4x2  28x  5)  3( x4  6x2  25)

 14 x2  28x  70  14( x2  2x  5)
Which is a quadratic, Hence P( x)  x  2x  5

2
 P(1)  4
53. Key.2
Sol. We have
n r n
Cr
  1
r0
n2
Cr
n r
n! 2!r !
   1 
r 0  n  r  !r !  r  2  !
n r
n!
 2  1
r 0  n  r ! r  2 !
2 n r
 n  2!
 n  1 n  2  
  1
 n  2   r  2! r  2!
r 0
n
2
 n  1 n  2  
 1
r  2 n 2
 C r2
r 0
n 2 S
2
 n  1 n  2 
  1 2
Cs
s2
OUTGOING SR Page 13
2  n1  
   1 Cs    n 2 C0  C1 
s n 2 n 2

 n  1 n  2   s 0  
2
 0  1   n  2 
 n  1 n  2  
2

n2
54. Key.0
Sol. We have,
2 5 8 2 5 6
a23 b53 c83  100a  20  3 100b  50  3 100c  80  3
a b c a b c
2 5 8 2 5 8 2 5 8
 100a 100b 100c  20 50 80  3 3 3
a b c a b c a b c
2 5 8 2 5 8 2 5 8
 100 a b c  10 2 5 8  3 1 1 1

a b c a b c
2 3
a b c
6
 003 1 0 0
a ba ca
(Applying C2  C2  C1 , C3  C3  C1 )
 3 3  c  a   6  b  a    9c  a  2b  2a 
 9  a  2b  c  0  a,b,c are in A.P.,  2b  a  c
OUTGOING SR Page 14
Sec: OUTGOING SR ‘s SGTA-3 Date: 11-05-2023
Time: 3 HRS 2016_P2 Max. Marks:186
11-05-23_SR-OUTGOING_Jee-Adv_2016_P2_SGTA-3(PAPER-2)_KEY&SOL
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 D 2 A 3 D 4 C 5 C
6 B 7 ACD 8 AC 9 BCD 10 AB D
11 AC 12 AB C 13 AB 14 CD 15 B
16 A 17 B 18 B
CHEMISTRY
19
A
20
D
21
A
22
A
23
B
24
A
25
A,B,C,D
26
A,B,D
27
A,C,D
28
A,B,D
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36
A,C,D A,B,D A A,C,D D B D B
MATHS
37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
C C C C C D AC ABC ABD
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
CB ABC AB AC ABCD C C C A
Narayana IIT Academy 11-05-2023_OUTGOING-SR_JEE-Adv_2016-P2_SGTA-3_Key&Sol’s
SOLUTIONS:-
PHYSICS
1. If null point is at a distance x from 16M

G 16 M   GM
  

10a  x 
2 2
x
4 10a  x   x
40a  5 x
x  8a
G 16M  GM G 16 M  GM
Grav potentials at pt S& A are - Vs    ; VA   
2a 8a 8a 2a
By energy cons if v is the initial speed of body at S so as to reach/cross pt A,

We use-
1 2
2
 m
mv 
 G 16 M  GM 
 2a
 m
8a 
 G 16 M  GM 
 
 8a
 
2a 
3 5GM
v
2 a
 
2. Initial Int energy of dipole with EF U i   P.E  0
 
Initial Int energy of dipole with Ef U f   P.E   PE
W.D by electric forces on rod is W  U i  U f  0    PE   PE

If w is the avg speed attained by rod we use
1 1  ML2  2
PE   Iw2   w
2 2  12 
24PE
w
ML2
0 A
3. Here C
d
C xy  C  p  C   s  c
 2C  s  C
2C  C 2C 2 0 A
  
2C  C 3 3d
Sec: OUTGOING SR Page 2

2 0 A
C xy 
3d
4. torque on a coil is   MB sin 

 1  i  2 R  lN  B sin 
Torque on cylinder due to gravity is
 2  mg sin  R
For equ of cylinder
1   2
2iR lN 3sin   mgR sin 

mg
i
2 BlN
5. Magnetic field induction due to different wire segments in the given conductor is calculated as
 0 I   I  ˆ  0 I  ˆ
B
4 L
 
sin 450 kˆ  0
L  
k   
 k
L 2
4 4
2 4
 0 I 
B  1
L  4 2
1 
 1  kˆ

 
6. As the phasor resultant of all three SHMs is zero, below figure shows the phasor diagram of the three
SHMs.


7.
Hence (A) , (C) and (D) are correct

8.

Hence (A) and (C) are correct
9. The electrical paths AC1 D2 B and AD1C2 B are in parallel. The resistance of each of them is 10 , and
hence the current is 1 A. When C1C2 and D1 D2 are joined, the ammeters are in parallel combination. As
they are of a same resistance, their readings will be equal.
Hence, (B) (c) and (D) are correct .
10.
Hence , (A) , (B) and (D) are correct.
11.

Hence , (A) and (C) are correct.
12. For the given conductor the magnetic force can be calculated by considering it as a straight wire of
length 2  L  R  carrying same current I. If magnetic field is along z direction magnetic force on the
conductor is be given as
Fm  BI  2 L  2 R 
Hence option (A) is correct and option (D) is NOT zero as current element length is along magnetic

field direction hence option (B) is correct. When B is along y direction, magnetic force on the

conductor is given as
Fm  BI  2 L  2 R 
Hence option (C) is correct
13. Magnetic field due to both loops is perpendicular to the x-y plane hence their resultant will also be
along this direction only hence option (A) is correct.
As the two loops are symmetric with respect to origin, the magnitude of magnetic field will only upon
the radial distance from origin hence option (B) is correct.
For the given condition of current, at center field is inward and as we move radially out then close to
r  R1 field becomes outward so at some point it will be zero also hence option (C) is NOT Correct.
From the directions of currents given magnetic field between the region of the two loops magnetic field
is in inward direction. Hence option (D) is NOT correct.
14.
Given voltages are drawn in phasor diagram as shown below
Potential difference between X and Y is calculated as

 2 
VXY  VX  VY  V0 sin t  V0 sin  t  
 3 
 2    
VXY  V0 [2 cos  t   sin   ]
 3   3
 
VXY  3 V0 cos  t  
 3
V0 3
rms
VXY  3  V0
2 2
15. For direct transmission , power dissipation is given as

p  i 2 R  150   0.4  20   1.8  105W
2
Percentage of power dissipation is given as

1.8 105
pd  100  30%
6 105
16.
For step up transformer, we use
4000 1
x

10
....... 1
For step down transformer, we use

x
N .......  2 
200
Where x is the step up voltage. From equations (1) and (2) we have
4000 x N
 
x 200 10
 N  200  Ratio  200:1
17. For induced electric field, we use

dB
 E .dr  A. dt
dB RB
 E  2 R    R 2  E
dt 2
18. Total change in angular momentum is given as

L    dt
 RB 
 L  Q  R
 2 
QR 2 B
 L 
2

Change in magnetic dipole moment is given as
QR 2 B
  L  
2
In above expression negative sigh is considered due t induced current in opposite direction.

2017-P1 MODEL
Time: 03:00 Hr’s IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 183
PHYSICS:
Questions With Multiple Correct Choice
Sec – I (Q .N : 1 – 7) +4 -2 7 28
(partial marking scheme) (+ 1,0)
Sec – II (Q .N : 8 – 12) Questions With Integer Answer Type +3 0 5 15
Three column paragraph
Sec – III (Q .N : 13 – 18) +3 -1 6 18
Questions With Single Answer Type
Total 18 61

CHEMISTRY:
Sec – I (Q .N : 19 – 25) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q .N : 31 – 36) +3 -1 6 18
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS:
Sec – I (Q .N : 37 – 43) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q .N : 49 – 54) +3 -1 6 28
Total 18 61
PHYSICS Max. Marks: 61
SECTION – I
cases
1. Light from a discharge tube containing hydrogen atoms falls on the surface of a piece
of sodium. The K.E. of the fastest photoelectrons emitted from sodium is 0.73 eV. The
work function of sodium is 1.82 eV then,
a) the energy of the photons causing the photoelectric emission is 2.55 eV
b) the quantum number of the two levels involved in the emission of these photons are
1 and 4
h
c) the change in the angular momentum of the electron in the hydrogen atom is
2
(in the above transition)

d) assuming it to be at rest before transition, the recoil speed of the emitting hydrogen
atom of mass is 0.85 m/s
2. A hydrogen atom having kinetic energy E collides with a stationary hydrogen atom.
Assume all motions are taking place along line of motion of the moving hydrogen
atom. For this situation, mark out the correct statement (s).
(a) For E > 20.4 eV only collision would be elastic
(b) For E > 20.4 eV only collision would be inelastic
(c) For E = 24 eV, collision would be perfectly inelastic
(d) For E = 18 eV, the KE of initially moving hydrogen atom after collision is zero.
3. White light is used to illuminate the two slits in Young’s double slit experiment. The
separation between the slits is b and the screen is at a distance d (> b) from the slits. At a
point on the screen directly in front of one of the slits, certain wavelength are missing.
Some of these missing wavelengths are
b2 2b2
(A)   (B)  
d d
b2 2b2
(C)   (D)  
3d 3d
Page No: 2
4. In an interference experiment similar to Young’s double slit experiment, the slits S1 and
S2 are illuminated with coherent microwave sources, each of frequency 106 Hz. The
source are synchronised to have zero phase difference. The slits are separated by a
distance d = 150.0 m. The intensity I () is measured as a function of  , where  is
defined as shown.
If I 0 is the maximum intensity, then I    for 0    90 is given by
S1
d1 
d2
S2
I0 I0
(A) I ()  for   30 (B) I ()  for   90
2 4
(C) I ()  I 0 for   0 (D) I () is constant for all

5. A plane mirror M is arranged parallel to a wall W at a distance l from it. The light
produced by a point source S kept on the wall is reflected by the mirror and produces a
patch of light on the wall. The mirror moves with velocity v towards the wall.
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct?
S
l
v
M
(A) The patch of light will move with speed v on the wall
(B) The patch of light will not move on the wall
(C) As the mirror comes closer, the patch of light will become larger and shift away
from the wall with speed larger than v
(D) The size of the patch light on the wall remains the same
6. The radius of curvature of the left and right surface of the thin concave lens are 10 cm
and 15 cm respectively. The radius of curvature of the mirror is 15 cm
Air
Water
(n = 4/3)
Glass
(n = 3/2)
Page No: 3
(A) equivalent focal length of the combination is –18 cm
(B) equivalent focal length of the combination is +36 cm
(C) the system behaves like a concave mirror
(D) the system behaves like a convex mirror

7. The figure shows a ray incident at an angle i  . If the plot drawn shown the
3
1
variation of r  i versus  k ,  r  angle of refraction  :
2
3 
(A) the value of k1 is (B) the value of 1 
2 6

(C) the value of 2  (D) the value of k2 is 1

3
SECTION-II
8. A circular disc of diameter d lies horizontally inside a metallic hemispherical bowl

radius 8cm. The disc is just visible to an eye looking over the edge. The bowl is now
filled with a liquid of refractive index 3 . Now, the whole of the disc is just visible to
the eye in the same position. The value of d (in cm)
9. Three right angle prisms of refractive indices 1 , 2 and 3 are joined together so that
the faces of the middle prism are in contact each with one of the outside prisms. If the
ray passes through the composite block undeviated, find the value of 12  32  22 .
Page No: 4
10. Two tuning forks A and B each of natural frequency 85 Hz move with velocity 10m/s
relative to stationary observer ‘O’. Fork A moves away from the observer while the
fork B moves towards him as shown in the figure. A wind is blowing with a speed 10
m/s in the direction of motion of fork A. Find the beat frequency measured by the
observer in Hz. [Take speed of sound in air as 340 m/s]
A B

11. In Young’s experiment, the source is of red light of wavelength 7 X 107 m. When a thin
glass plate of refractive index 1.5 at this wavelength is put in the path of one of the
interfering beams, the central bright fringe shifts by 103 m to the position previously
occupied by the 5th bright fringe. Find the thickness (in  m) of the plate.
12. In a nuclear reactor an element X decays to a radioactive element Y at a constant rate
1015 atoms per sec. Each decay releases 100 MeV energy. Half life of Y equals T and
decays to a stable product Z. Each decay of Y releases 50 MeV. All energy released
inside the reactor is used to produce electricity at an efficiency of 25%. Electrical
power in kw generated in the reactor in steady state is x KW . Find 'x'
Page No: 5
SECTION – III
out of which ONLY ONE option can be correct.
Answer the Q.No:13, 14 and 15 by appropriately matching the information given in the
following table.
Answer the following three questions based upon the given diagram (take all
capacitors to be uncharged initially)

Column I – Charge Column II – Charge in Column III – Charge in
drawn from battery in capacitor connected capacitor connected between B
C between A & D in C & C in C
(I) 100 (i) 120 (P) 0
(II) 210 (ii) 0 (Q) 40
(III) 180 (iii) 40 (R) 50
(IV) 200 (iv) 50 (S) 100
13. If a 10 V battery is connected across the terminals A and D:
A) (I) (ii) (P) B) (IV) (i) (P) C) (II) (i) (Q) D) (IV) (iii) (S)
14. If a 10 V battery is connected across the terminals B and C:
A) (I) (ii) (P) B) (II) (iii) (R) C) (II) (ii) (S) D) (IV) (iii) (S)
15. If a 10 V battery is connected across the terminals E and F:
A) (I) (i) (P) B) (II) (ii) (Q) C) (III) (ii) (Q) D) (IV) (iii) (S)
Page No: 6
Answer Q.16. Q.17 and Q.18 by appropriately matching the information given in the
three columns of the following table.
An object O is kept on the principal axis of a concave mirror, at a distance 200 cm
from pole of the mirror. By some mechanism radius of curvature of mirror is changing
200
with time as R  cm , here t is in second. Column–1 shows the time instant,
t
Column–2 represents velocity of image at that time and Column–3 represents
acceleration of image at that time.

Time Velocity of image
400
Acceleration of image
64
(A) 1 sec. (P) cm / s (1)  cm / s 2
49 5
1600
(B) 2 sec. (Q) 16 cm/s (2)  cm / s 2
343
400 1600
(C) 3 sec. (R) cm / s. (3)  cm / s 2
9 27
(D) 4 sec. (S) 400 cm/s (4) –1600 cm/s2

16. Which of the following is correctly matched?
A) (A)(S)(4) B) (A)(Q)(4) C) (A)(S) (1) D) (A) (Q)(1)
17. Which of the following is correctly matched ?
A) (B) (R)(3) B) (B)(S)(3) C) (B)(R)(2) D) (B) (P)(1)
18. Which of the following is correctly matched?
A) (C) (Q)(2) B) (C)(P)(2) C) (D)(P)(2) D) (D)(Q)(1)
Page No: 7
SECTION – I
cases
19. Pick out correct statement(s) from the following.

A) In hydrogen atom, the energy of electron is 2s subshell is equal to the energy of
electron in 2p subshell
B) The orbital quantum number of 4d electron is 6
C) There are three unpaired electron in nitrogen atom
D) Fe3+ ion is more stable than Fe2+
20. Pick out correct statement(s) from the following:
A) The radius of maximum probability for finding the electron in ground state of

hydrogen is 0.529Aº from nucleus.
B) 2p orbital has one radial node
C) 2p orbital has one nodal plane
D) Angular probability function determine the shape of orbital.
21. Which of the following reagents would perform the following transformation?
?
OH   Cl
A) KCl (5molar solution) B) HCl & ZnCl2

C) SOCl2 D) PCl3
Br
PhOH A NaOH
B C+D
22.  Identify the correct options?
A) A is Ph  O Na 
Ph O
B) B is
OH
C) C Can be
Page No: 8
D) Conversion B to (C+D) Involve Radical intermediate
23. Correct statement about critical temperature
A) It is highest temperature at which liquid and vapour can coexist
B) Beyond the critical temperature, there is no distinction between two phases and gas
cannot be liquefied by compression
C) At critical temperature, the surface tension of system is zero
D) At critical temperature the gas and the liquid phases have different critical densities
24. Which of the following statements is/are correct
A) Iron cobalt and nickel display ferromagnetism in addition to paramagnetism
B) Copper, silver and gold dissolve in aqueous acid to form +1 cation and H2 gas
C) Manganese exhibits a variety of oxidation state from +2 to +7
D) Dichromate ion Cr2 O72  is good oxidizing agent in acidic solution
25. Roasting of an ore is done:

A) To remove moisture.
B) To oxidize free sulphur and antimony.
C) at a temperature below the melting point of the metal.
D) in a reverberatory furnace.
SECTION-II
26. White phosphorus disproportionate in concentrated NaOH and gives PH3 and
NaH2PO2. The sum of stiochiometric coefficients of reactants in the balanced red-ox
reactions is _________
27. The minimum number of moles of potassium chlorate required to decompose to give
sufficient oxygen for complete combustion of 22.4l of C2H4 at NTP are_____
28. How many of the following are classified as LINEAR polymers?

LDPE, PVC, amylopectin, cellulose, melamine, nylon 6, isoprene and polystyrene
Page No: 9
29. For how many of the following the weight increases in the applied magnetic field.
NO, NO2 , O2 , K 4  Fe(CN 6 ], KO2 , MnSO4 , NiSO4 , CuSO4 , ZnSO4
30. XeF6  H 2O  A  2 HF , ‘A’ has ' x '  bonds, y  bonds and z lone pairs on Xe
1 mole 
atom  x  y  z  is
SECTION – III
Column – I Column–II Column – III

(Molecule) (Hybridisation)
(a) OSF4 (P) dsp 2 (I) Net lone pair repulsion of central atom is zero

(b) XeF4 (Q) sp 3 (II) Planar molecule
(c) ClO4 (R) sp 3 d 2 (III) All bonds with central atom are identical
(d) XeOF4 (S) sp 3d (IV) Zero lone pair on central atom
(T) sp 2 d (V) More than one type of bond angle
31. Which of the following set is correct

A) (d) (R) (V) B) (c) (P) (IV) C) (a) (R) (I) D) (b) (Q) (II)
32. Correct combination for XeF4
A) (Q) (II) (I) (V) B) (R) (I) (II) (III) C) (P) (II) (III) D) (R) (I) (IV) (V)
33. Which of the following is related with SOF4
A) (R) (II) B) (R) (III) C) (S), (V) D) Both B, C
Page No: 10
Answer Q.34, Q.35 and Q.36 by appropriately matching the information given in the
three columns of the following table
Column-I
Column-II Column-III
(for hydrogen atom)
i) Orbital angular momentum (L)
I) 1s orbital P) One radial node
is 2
ii) Orbital angular momentum(L)
II) 2s orbital Q) Two nodal planes
is 6
iii) Spherically symmetrical shape
III) 2px orbital R) Zero nodal planes
orbital
iv) Radius of maximum
IV) 3d x  y orbital S) YZ plane is nodal
2 2 probability is 0.529Aº from
plane
nucleus
34. For the given orbital in Column-I correct combination
A) I,ii,R B) II,iii,Q C) III,i,S D) IV,ii,P
35. For a given orbital in column I, which of the following is incorrect combination.

36.
A) I, iv,R B) II,iii,P C) IV,ii,Q D) III,ii,S
For a dumbbell shaped orbital in hydrogen atom. Which of the following combination
is correct
A) I, iv,R B) II,iii,P C) III,i,S D) III,iv,S
MATHEMATICS Max. Marks: 61

SECTION – I
cases
37. A function f  x  is defined as
f  x  { 6 x 5  x 2 , x 3
24 x 32  4 x 2 , x 3
Tangents are made on f  x  in the first quadrant. Let tangents T1 : y  m1 x  b1 and
T2 : y  m2 x  b2 respectively have highest and lowest y-intercepts of all tangents made
in first quadrant then

A) b1  b2  36 B) b1  b2  28
Page No: 11
C) m1  m2  4 D) area made by y-axis,
T1  0, T2  0 is 54 square units
38. lim x  x  1  x  equals

x 
ln 1  x   x 1  cos x
A) lim B) lim
x 0 x2 x 0 x2
1 x 1 x
C) lim D) lim
x 0 x x 0
x  x2  2x
39. Tangents are drawn from (-2,0) to y 2  8 x , radius of circle(s) that would
touches these tangents and the corresponding chord of contact, can be
equal to,
A) 4  2  1 B) 4  2  1 C) 8 2 D) 4 2
40. Let sn be the sum of the first n terms of the arithmetic sequence

b 1 , b 2 . . . . . . . . b n , such that
f i, j , k  
si
 j  k
sj
k  i 
sk
 i  j  , i, j, k  N , then
i j k
A) f (1,3,5) =15 B) f (2,7,12)<21

C) f(1,3,5) = 21 D) f (2,7,12)<15
41. Given two functions f and g which are integrable on every interval and satisfy
(i) f is odd, g is even(ii) g(x) = f(x + 5), then
A) f(x  5) = g(x) B) f(x  5) = g(x)
5 5
 
5 5
C) 0
f (t ) dt = 0 g(5  t) dt D) 0
f (t ) dt = – 
0
g(5  t ) dt
42. Let h  x   f  x    f  x     f  x   for every real number x, then

2 3
A) h is increasing whenever f is increasing

B) h is increasing whenever f is decreasing
C) h is decreasing whenever f is decreasing
D) Nothing can be said in general
1  x 1  1  x   1 
43. Let f  x   cos   forx  1
1 x  1 x 
Page No: 12
then
lim f  x 
A) x 1 does not exist
lim f  x 
B) x 1 does not exist
lim f  x   0
C) x 1
lim f  x   0
D) x 1
SECTION-II
x
44. Let f  x  be differentiable function such that f  x   x 2   e  t f  x  t  dt then 6 f 1  __
0
45. Number of distinct real solutions of sin  x  ln x is
 
20
46. Number of rational terms in expansion of 2 335 is two digit number

47.
ab, then a + b=
Let A be 3  3 matrix given by A   aij  and B be a column matrix such that
B T AB is a null matrix for every column matrix B. If C  A  AT and

a13  1, a 23  5, a21  15 then the value of det  adjA   det  adjC  is (where AT is the
transpose of A)
48. The distance of the point (1,-2,3) from the plane x  y  z  5 measure parallel
To a line whose direction ration are 2, 3, -6 is
Page No: 13
SECTION – III
Answer Q,49, Q,50 and Q,51 by appropriately matching the information given in the three
columns of the following table.
COLOUMN-I COLUMN-II COLUMN-III
(I) If the range of the function (i) 1 (P) Prime number

f ( x )  cos 1
 5 x 
Is {a, b, c} and
 (ii) 2
abc 
2 ,
Then  is equal to(where[.]denotes G.I.F) (Q) Composite number
(II) If

lim
X 0
xesin x  e x sin 1  sin x 
sin 2 x  x sin x
Then  is equal to

(iii) 4 (R) Neither prime nor
Composite number
(III) The number of points at which
1
g ( x) 
2
1 (S) Irrational number
f  x
Is not differentiable where
1 (iv) 3
f ( x)  is  then  is equal to
1
1
x
log( x )
(IV) The derivative of
x
At x=-1 is  then  is equal to
49. Which of the following options is the only correct combination?

(A) (I) (ii) (P) (B) (II) (i) (R) (C) (III) (ii) (P) (D) (IV) (iii) (Q)
50. Which of the following is the only correct combination?
(A) (IV) (ii) (P) (B) (II) (iii) (Q) (C) (I) (iv) (P) (D) (iii) (ii) (P)
51. Which of the following is the only correct combination?
(A) (I) (ii) (P) (B) (II)(iv) (P) (C) (IV) (iii) (R) (D) (III) (iv) (P)
Page No: 14
Answer Q,52, Q,53 and Q,541 by appropriately matching the information given in the
three
columns of the following table.
COLUMN-I COLUMN-II COLUMN-III

1
1 1
(I) If   tan x  3 dx  (i) A 
4
(P) B 
4
  t 4  t 2  1 
  B 3 tan 1  2t  1   c
2
A ln 
  t 2  1 2   3 
 
Where t  tan 1/3 x then
 sin x  sin x  dx 
3
(II) If  cos(2 x) (ii) A 

1
(Q) B 
3
3 4
B 2 cos x  1
A cosx  ln c
2 2 cos x  1
Then
Yashpatil

(III) If
 
TG~
  @bohring_bot
dx
x 1 x  4
2 2
 A tan 1 x
(iii) A 
1
(R) B 
1
2 6
1  x 
 B tan    c then
2
(IV) If
1 3 1
 cos xdx  Ax  B sin(2 x)  sin(4 x)  c (iv) A  (S) B 
4
32 8 2
then
52. Which of the following options is the only correct combination

(A) (III)(ii)(R) (B) (I)(iii)(S) (C) (IV)(iv)(Q) (D) (II) (ii) (P)
53. Which of the following options is the only correct combination
(A) (II) (i) (Q) (B) (IV) (iv) (P) (C) (I)(iii)(R) (D) (III) (ii) (S)
(A) (I) (i) (S) (B) (II) (iii) (Q) (C) (III)(iv)(R) (D) None of these
Page No: 15
Time: 3Hrs SGTA-4 Max.Marks:183
18-05-23_SR-OUTGOING_Jee-Adv_2017_P2_SGTA-4(PAPER-II)_QP FINAL
Time: 07:30 to 10:30 AM IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS Max Marks: 183
PHYSICS
+Ve - Ve
No.of Total
Section Question Type Mark Mark
Qs marks
s s
One of More Correct Options Type
Sec – II (Q.N : 8 – 14) +4 -2 7 28
(partial marking scheme) (+1)
Sec – III (Q.N : 15 – 18) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
CHEMISTRY

+Ve
Mark
s
- Ve
Mark
s
No.of
Qs
Total
marks
Questions with Single Correct
Sec – I (Q.N : 19 – 25) +3 -1 7 21
Options
Sec – II (Q.N : 26 – 32) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 33 – 36) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
MATHEMATICS
+Ve - Ve
No.of Total
Section Question Type Mark Mark
Qs marks
s s
Sec – I (Q.N : 37 – 43) +3 -1 7 21
Options
Sec – II (Q.N : 44 – 50) +4 -2 7 28
Sec – III (Q.N : 51 – 54) +3 0 4 12
Total 18 61
PHYSICS
Max. Marks: 61
SECTION – I
(SINGLE CORRECT CHOICE TYPE)
This section contains 7 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 choices (A), (B), (C) and (D) for its
answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Marking scheme +3 for correct answer , 0 if not attempted and -1 in all other cases.
01. A voltage VAB  V0 cos t where V0 is a real amplitude, is applied between the points A
1 R 3
and B in the network shown, given C  and L  , the total impedance
R 3 
between A and B is
A) R B) 2R C) 3R D) 4R
02. A source emitting a sound of frequency n is placed at a large distance from a listner.

The source starts moving towards the listner with a uniform acceleration ‘a’. The
frequency heard by the listner corresponding to the wave emitted just after the source
starts is (speed of sound in the medium is C)
nc 2 2nc 2 2n 2c 2n 2c
A) B) C) D)
2nc  a 2nc  a 2nc  a nc  a
03. In an experiment on the photoelectric effect it is observed that for light of wavelength
500 nm, a stopping potential of 0.25V is required to cut off the current of
photoelectrons, whereas at a wavelength of 375nm a stopping potential of 1.0V is
required. From these data the ratio of Planck’s constant to the electronic charge (h/e) is
found to be
A) 3.75 1015 JSC 1 B) 4.25 1015 JSC 1 C) 2.50 1015 JSC 1 D) 6.25 10 15 JSC 1
04. A soap bubble of radius R0 is slowly given a charge q. due to mutual repulsion of
charges, the radius increases slightly to R. The air pressure inside the bubble drops,
because of the expansion, to P  0  , where P is the atmospheric pressure, V0 is the

V
V 
initial volume and V is the final volume. Ignoring surface tension, find the value of
charge q.
space for rough work Page 2

1 1
A) 320 PR  R3  R03  2 B) 160 PR  R 2  R02  2

1 1
C) 322 0 PR  R3  R03  2 D) 1620 PR  R 2  R02   2
05. 238
92 U decays to Pb through the successive emission of 6 electrons and 8 -particles.
Given:
M  238 U   238.050786 amu
M  Pb   205.9744550 amu
M     4.002603 amu
M  e    5.486  10 4 amu
1amu  931.47 MeV
Total Energy evolved in the decay process is

A) 48.6 MeV B) 78.4 MeV C) 23.2 MeV D) 96.8 MeV
06. A Coaxial cable consists of two thin co axial cylinders electrically connected at one
end, an inner cylindrical conducting tube of radius, a = 5mm carrying a steady current
I which is screened by an outer cylindrical conducting sheath of radius b = 10mm
which provides return path. There is no dielectric medium present. The inductance of
this cable of length, l = 1000 m is (neglect magnetic field with in the conductors
 log e 2  0.693 )
A) 3.6 104 H B) 1.38 104 H C) 2.4 102 H D) 4.5 102 H
07. A potentiometer circuit is arranged as shown in given figure. The potentiometer wire
is 600cm long. If the jockey touches the wire at a distance of 560 cm from A, the
current flowing through galvanometer is

E 2E 2E 3E
A) B) C) D)
11r 5r 11r 22r
SECTION-II
(ONE OR MORE OPTIONS CORRECT TYPE)
This section contains 7 multiple choice equations. Each question has four choices (A) (B),(C) and (D)
out of which ONE or MORE THAN ONE are correct.
Marking scheme: +4 for all correct options, 0 if not attempted and -2 in all wrong cases.
08. Three coaxial polarizing filters are arranged in such a way that polarizing axes of first
and third one are orthogonally oriented. Whereas polarizing axis of middle polarizing
Filter is oriented at an angle  as shown in figure. A plane polarised light beam is

incident on first filter. Then
A) The maximum fraction of the incident intensity that can be transmitted is .

1
4
1
B) The maximum fraction of the incident intensity that can be transmitted is
2
C) For maximum fraction of intensity transmission, the value of  is 600
D) For maximum fraction of intensity transmission, the value of  is 450
09. A single electron orbits around a stationary nucleus of charge +Ze, when Z is a
constant and e is the magnitude of the electronic charge. If requires 47.2 eV to excite
the electron from the second Bohr’s orbit to the third Bohr’s orbit
A) The energy required to excite the electron from the third to the fourth Bohr’s orbit
is 16.53eV
B) The wavelength of the electromagnetic radiation required to remove the electron
from the first Bohr’s orbit to infinity is (nearly) 36.4A
C) The energy required to excite the electron from third to fourth Bohr’s orbit is
4.23eV
D) The wavelength of emf radiation required to remove the electron from first Bohr’s
orbit to infinity is (nearly) 62.7A

10. A narrow beam of monochromatic light of wavelength  emitted from a source of
power P is propagating in the positive x-direction. Beam is reflected from a perfectly


reflecting plane mirror of area vector A  A(iˆ  ˆj ) . Reflection from the mirror changes
momentum of photons and exerts force on the mirror. Which of the following
statements is/are correct?

  h
A) Change in momentum P of each photon is given by P  (iˆ  ˆj )

  h
B) Change in momentum P of each photon is given by P  (iˆ  ˆj ) .

  P ˆ ˆ
C) Force F exerted by light beam on the mirror is given by F  (i  j )
c
  P
D) Force F exerted by light beam on the mirror is given by F  (iˆ  ˆj )

c
11. The square loop ABCD, carrying a current I, is placed in a uniform magnetic field B,
as shown. The loop can rotate about the axis XX’. The plane of the loop makes an
angle    90  with the direction of B. Through what angle will the loop rotate by
itself before the torque on it becomes zero?
A)  B) 90   C) 90   D) 180  

12. In the circuit shown below, the cell is ideal, with emf  2V . The resistance of the coil
of the galvanometer G is 1 
A) No current flows in G. B) 0.2-A current flows in G.

C) Potential difference across C1 is 1 V. D) Potential difference across C2 is 1.2 V.
13. Two heaters designed for the same voltage V have different power ratings. When
connected individually across a source of voltage V, they produce H amount of heat
each in times t1 and t2 respectively. When used together across the same source, they

produce H amount of heat in time t.
A) If they are in series, t  t1  t2 B) If they are in series, t  2  t1  t2 
t1t2 t1t2
C) If they are in parallel, t  D) If they are in parallel, t 
 t1  t2  2  t1  t2 
14. A thin concave and convex lens of respective focal lengths 60cm and 25cm are placed
coaxially separated by a distance of 30 cm as shown in figure. A small linear object is
kept at a distance of 180cm from the concave lens on common principal axis.
A) Final image of object is formed at 37.5 cm to the right of the convex lens
B) Final image of object is formed at 50 cm to the right of the convex lens
1
C) Net linear magnification of image is
4
1
D) Net linear magnification of image is
8
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph.
Each question has 4 choices A), B), C) and D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
Paragraph For Questions 15 and 16
A point object O is placed at the origin of coordinate system. An equi-convex thin lens
( g  1.5) of focal length f  20 cm in air is placed so that its a principal axis is along x-
axis. Now the lens is cut at the middle (along the principal axis) and upper half is
shifted along x-axis and y-axis by 20 cm and 2 mm respectively and right side of lower
half is filled with water ( w  4 / 3) .
y L1
air

air
2mm
O x
air L2 water
60cm 20cm
15. Coordinates of the image produced by the lens L1 will be
(A)    160   320   160 

320 4 8 8 4
cm, mm (B)  cm, mm (C)  cm, mm (D)  cm, mm
 3 3  3 3  3 3  3 3 
16. Coordinates of the image produced by the lens L2 will be

(A) 140cm, 0 (B) 140cm, 20 (C)70cm, 0 (D)140cm, 30
A thin converging lens of focal length 10 cm is cut along a plane that contains the optical
axis of the lens, and a small black plate of thickness 1 mm is placed between the two half-
lenses. A point light source, S emitting monochromatic light of wavelength  = 0.5m is
located on the optical axis, a distance 20 cm from the tens, towards left of the lens. A screen
is placed at a distance 50 cm towards right of the lens with its plane perpendicular to the
optical axis.

17. Find the separation, d between two images of the source formed by two parts of the
lens which produce interference fringes on the screen
A) 1 mm B) 0.5 mm C) 2 mm D) 3 mm
18. Nearly how many interference fringes can be seen on the screen?
A) 46 B) 37 C) 7998 D) 8001
SECTION – I

19. Identify the correct statement
A) A real gas can be liquefied at temperature below Ti , above T b
( Ti = inversion temperature, T b = Boyle’s temperature)
B) For one mole of vander waal’s gas compressibility factor z=0.375 at critical point
C) Ideal gas can be liquefied below its critical temperature by applying high pressure
D) When mixture of ideal gases cooled up to liquid helium temperature (4.22k), an
ideal solution is formed.
  a 

20. At low pressure Vander Waal’s equation is written as  p  v 2 v  RT . The
compressibility factor is then equal to

 RT V       
a) 1   1  a  1  a  1  RT V 
 a  b) 
 RT V  c) 
 RT V  d) 
 a 
21. Which of the following can be dehydrated by using a drying agent?

A) Co  NH 3  4  H 2O  Cl  Cl2 B) Cr  H 2O 6  Cl3
C) Co  NH 3  4 Cl2  Cl.H 2O D) All of these

22. Which of the following would be the best synthesis of the acid shown below?
CH3 O
H3C C C OH
CH3
 
A) CH 3  CH 2  CHO             
CH 3 MgBr H 3O SOBr2 Mg CO2 H 3O
Et2O Et2O
 
B) CH 3  CH 2  CHO          
CH 3MgBr H 3O SOBr2 KCN H 3O
Et2O heat
 
C) CH 3  CO  CH 3             
CH3 MgBr H 3O SOBr2 Mg CO2 H3O
Et2O Et2O
 
D) CH 3  CO  CH 3          
CH3 MgBr H3O SOBr2 KCN H 3O
Et2O heat
23. The wavelength of electron in one of the orbits of excited hydrogen atom is 13.32Aº.
When this electron falls in to a lower orbit its wavelength is found to be 6.66Aº. The
wavelength of photon emitted in this transition is
A) 486 nm B) 124 nm C) 652 nm D) 100.3 nm

24. Which of the following statement is wrong about the N-N bond length among the
following species?
 
I) H 2 N  NH 2 II) N 2 III) H 3 N  N H 3 IV) N 2O
A) N-N bond is shortest in II
B) N-N bond is shorter in II than in I
C) N-N bond is shorter in I than in III
D) N-N bond length is intermediate in IV compared to I and II
25. Which of the following conditions is not suitable for the brown ring test of NO2 ?
A) FeSO4 added must be freshly prepared
B) H2SO4 added should be concentrated
C) Acetic acid may be used as an alternative acid
D) Shaking or warming is not allowed

SECTION-II
This section contains 7 multiple choice equations. Each question has four choices (A) (B),(C) and (D) out of
which ONE or MORE THAN ONE are correct.
26. The Lucas test is used to distinguish small (7 or fewer carbons) 10 ,20 and 30 -alcohols.
The alcohol to be tested is added to a solution of anhydrous ZnCl2 in conc. HCl at
room temperature. Which of the following statement is/are correct?
A) 10 -alcohols dissolve, but do not react
B) 30 -alcohols react quickly to give an insoluble alkyl chloride
C) 30 -alcohols rapidly dehydrate, and the gaseous alkene bubbles come out of the test
solution which appears as turbidity.
D) 20 -alcohols dissolve and react slowly to give an insoluble alkyl chloride
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot  A

1) B2 H 6
2) H 2O2 , NaOH
1) Hg  OAc  , H O
 2
2) NaBH 4
2
B
27. Identify the correct statements
A) A is acetone
B) B is Acetone
C) A is Propanal
D) B is gives Haloform reaction
28. Choose correct statement(s) regarding radical addition polymerisation
A) Phenol acts as radical inhibitor
B) Vinyl chloride, styrene etc can undergo radical polymerisation
C) Ethylene upon radical polymerisation gives LDPE
D) Polythene obtained by radical polymerisation has more density than that obtained
by using Zieggler-Natta catalyst
29. XeO3 can be prepared by:
A) hydrolysis of XeF2 B)the reaction of XeF4 with OF2
C) the hydrolysis of XeF4 D) the hydrolysis of XeF6

30. The major product of the following reaction is:

O
(i) ClCH 2CH 2CCl
(ii ) AlCl 3 (anhyd.)

MeO OH
A) MeO O O B) M e O O
OMe OM e O
C) O O D) O
31. Aromatic compound(s) among the following is/are

A) B)
C) D)
32. The correct statement(s) is/are among the following
A) At very high pressures, diamond is a thermodynamically stable allotrope of carbon
B) Both CO2 and CS 2 are weak Lewis acids
C) Zeolites are layered materials exclusively composed of alumino silicates
D) The reaction of calcium carbide with water yields ethyne and this product reflects
the presence of a highly basic C22  ion in calcium carbide.

SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph.

Element (A) burns in nitrogen to give an ionic compound (B). Compound (B) reacts
with water to give (C) and (D). A solution of (C) becomes milky on bubbling CO2.
The chloride of elements (A) imparts brick red colour to Bunsen flame.
Now answer the following questions:
33. The element (A) is:
A) Ca B) Mg C) Al D) K
34. The incorrect statement about aqueous solution of D is:
A) With Hg 22  , it gives black Precipitate.

B) It dissolves Cu 2  salt forming deep – blue colouration.
C) With Fe3 it forms a reddish – brown Precipitate which is soluble in excess of the
reagent (D).
D) With Ni 2  it forms a green Precipitate which dissolves in excess of the reagent

(D).

F
150o C
750atm H 2 ; Al
 
D  B   Na2 B4O7
H 2 SO4
   A   B
740o C H 2O Red Hot
C2 H 5OH
C 
Now answer the following questions:
35. The incorrect set is:
A) A  H 3 BO3 B) B  B2O3 C) C  B  OC2 H 5 3 D) D  Na2O

36. The incorrect statement(s):
A) (D) can be used to prepare brightner in washing powder.
B) (F) can undergo symmetrical cleavage with 1o – amines.
C) (C) gives green edged flame.
2:1
D) (F)  NH 3 
o

 compound (G), which can undergo
High temperature, 200 C
hydrolysis.
MATHS Max. Marks: 61
SECTION – I
  sin 1  x    22 sin 1  2 x    32 sin 1  3x    n 2 sin 1  nx   

37. If lim   
  
    ..............      100
x 0
 x   x   x   x 
then the value of n is ,(where [k] denotes the greatest integer less then or equal to k).

A) 2 B) 3 C) 4 D) 5
38. Let p  x   x  a2 x  a3 x  a4 x  a2 x be a polynomial with real coefficients.
10 8 6 4 2
If p(1)=1 and p(2)=-5,then the minimum number of district real zeroes of

p(x) is
A) 5 B) 6 C) 7 D) 8
1
1
39. If the value of the definite integral  207C7 x 200 1  x  dx is equal to
7
where K  N ,
0
k
the value of ‘k’ is equal to
A)208 B) 210 C) 212 D) 214
40. Area enclosed by the curve y  x 2  1 and a normal drawn to it with gradient -1 is equal
to:
2 4 19 43
A) B)
C) D)
3 3 12 12
41. Let  and  be the roots of x  6 x  2  0 with    if an     for n  1 then the
2 n n
a10  2a8
value of 
3a9
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4
n
1 n
42. If
Sn   and Tn   nc
r
then
Tn
is equal to
r  0 ncr r 0 r Sn
n n
A) n-1 B) C) n D) -1
2 2

43.
Equation of the plane containing the lines r  i  2 j  k   (i  2 j  k ) and
r  i  2 j  k   (i  j  3k ) is
A) r.(7i  4 j  k )  0 B) 7( x  1)  4( y  1)  ( z  3)  0
C) r.(i  2 j  k )  0 D) r.(i  j  3k )  0
SECTION-II
44. Let f  x  be a function satisfying f   x   2 f  x  and f(0)=3.If

f  x 1
 12  4 f  x dx  k ln 1  ae   c (where a,b are positive integers and gcd of a,b is one)
bx
Then,

A) a + b =3 B) k + b =10 C) ak = 4b D) a +b +k=0
45. Which of the following curves are orthogonal ?
x2
A) y  x , y  3  x B)  y 2  1, x 2  y 2  1
3
C) xy  1, x 2  y 2  3 D) y 2  4 x , x 2  8 y
46. The equation of the line passing through (2,3) and making an intercept of 2 units
between the lines y+2x=5 and y+2x=3
A) 5x-4y+2=0 B) 3x+4y=18
C) x=2 D) y=3
47. If A is a square matrix of order three of real entries such that A  2 and
2 2 0
A adj  A    0 2 2 
2
k 0 2
 
Then  K  R 
A) A3  2 I B) KA  16 C) A2  2 A D) Trace of A3  6

a sin x  bx  cx 2  x3
48. If lim exists and is finite, then
x 0 2 x 2ln(1  x)  2 x3  x 4
3
A) a  6 B) b  0 C) c  0 D) The limit =
40
49. The lines  m  2  x   2m  5  y  0,  m  1 x   m 2  7  y  5  0 and x  y 1  0 are
A) Concurrent for three values of m

B) Concurrent for one value of m
C) Concurrent for no value of m
D) Are parallel
50. For the cubic, f  x   2 x 3  9 x 2  12 x  1 which of the following statements hold good?
A) f  x  is non monotonic
B) Increasing in  , 2    1,   and decreasing in  2, 1
C) f : R  R is bijective

D) Range of f  x  is R
SECTION – III
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
paragraph.
10
cos  6 x  .cos  7 x  .cos  8 x  .cos  9 x 
I
0
 1  e 2sin  4 x 
3 dx
Then answer the following questions


2
51 If I  K  cos  6 x  .cos  7 x  .cos  8x  .cos  9 x dx then K=
0
A) 5 B) 10 C) 20 D) 80
52 The value of I=
5 5 5 5
A) B) C) D)
4 8 16 12
Let a, b, c be three real numbers satisfying
1 9 7
 a b c   8 2 7   0 0 0  E
7 3 7
 
53 If the point P (a, b, c) with reference to E lies on the plane 2 x  y  z  1 then the value
of 7a  b  c is
A)0 B) 12 C) 7 D) 6
54 Let w be a solution of x3 1  0 with Im (w)>0 x3 1  0 if a=2 with b and c satisfying E
3 1 3
then The value of a
 b  c is equal to
w w w
A) -2 B) 2 C) 3 D) -3

18-05-23_SR-OUTGOING_JEE-ADV_2017_P1_SGTA-4(PAPER-1)_KEY&SOL
PHYSI CS
1 AD 2 BD 3 AC 4 AC 5 BD
6 AC 7 ABCD 8 8 9 1 10 5
11 7 12 6 13 B 14 C 15 B
16 A 17 A 18 C
C H E M IST RY

19 ACD 20 ACD 21 BCD 22 ABC 23 ABC
24 ACD 25 ABCD 26 7 27 2 28 4
29 7 30 7 31 A 32 B 33 C
34 C 35 D 36 C
M A T H E M A T I CS
37 BCD 38 BC 39 AB 40 BD 41 BC
42 AC 43 BD 44 8 45 6 46 8
47 0 48 1 49 B 50 C 51 D
52 A 53 B 54 C
Narayana IIT Academy SGTA-4
SOLUTIONS
SOLUTIONS
PHYSICS
1. h  KEmax  W
The energy corresponds to transmission 4  2 in hydrogen
2. Ans (b, d)
Let collision between two atoms be an inelastic one.
From momentum conservation, mv0 = mv1 + mv2
From energy conservation,
mv12 mv 22 mv 20
   E
2 2 2
Where E is the energy absorbed by the initially stationary atom to change its
state.
Solving above equations, we get
4E
(v1  v 2 )  v 02 
m
For collision to be inelastic, (v1  v 2 ) 2  0 : a real quantity
[equal to sign for perfect inelastic collision.]
The minimum value of E is 10.2 eV, so for collision to be inelastic, E  20.4 eV.

For perfectly inelastic collision, v1 = v2 and hence E = 20.4 eV.
For E = 18 eV, the collision is elastic one and as masses are the same, velocities
would be interchanged during collision.
3. Position of minima
 1  D
yn   n  
 2 d
b
Here D  d and d  b, yn 
2
b  1  d
  n  
2  2 b
b2
  , n  1, 2,3,...
(2n  1)d
b2 b2 b2
  , , ,... .
d 3d 5d
i.e., alternatives (a) and (c) are correct.
c 3 108
4. For microwaves     300 m.
f 106
Path difference   d sin 
2 2 2
 Phase difference    (d sin )  (150sin )   sin 
  300
Intensity I  I1  I 2  2 I1 I 2 cos 
Page NO: 2
when I1  I 2 ,    sin 
  sin  
I  2 I1 (1  cos( sin ))  4 I1 cos 2  
 2 
 sin  
I will be maximum when cos2   is maximum = 1.
 2 
 I max  4 I1  I 0 (given)
  sin  
So I  I 0 cos 2  
 2 
(a) when   0, I  I 0 sin 2 0  I 0
 sin 30  2 
(b) when   30, I  I 0 cos2 
I0
  I 0 cos  .
 2  4 2
 sin 90  2 
(c) when   90, I  I 0 cos 2    I 0 cos  0.
 2  2
i.e, (a) and (c) are correct.
S

V
5. V
From the ray diagram, it is clear that the options (b) and (d) are correct.
1
6.   P  2Pl1  2Pl2  Pm …(1)
F
1  1 1 
Pl1   (  1)   
f1  R1 R 2 
 1 1 1
Pl1  [(1.5  1]       …(2)
 10 15  12
1 1 1 
Pl2   (  1)   
f2  R1 R 2 
4   2 2
Pl2    1    …(3)
 3  15  45
1 2
Pm     …(4)
f 15
1  1 2 2 1 4 2 1
  P  2        
F  12 45  15 6 45 15 18
F  18 cm. Focus is negative means system will behave as concave mirror.
 (A) and (C)
8.
Page NO: 3
 sin i  sin r
Rd Rd
 
R  d   h R  d 
2 2
2
 h2
 h  R2  d 2

R  d   R  d 
2R 2R
R d
2 
Rd

9.
1 sin i  1 sin 1
1 cos 1   2 sin  2
 2 cos  2  3 sin 3
3 cos 3  i sin i
Squaring and rearranging will give
12   32   22  1
340  10 330
10. fA   85  Hz
340  10  10 4
340  10 350
fB   85  Hz
340  10  10 4
fbeat  f B  f A  5 Hz
11. For Red Light

Dr (  1)
The shifts of fringes due to glass plate  where t is the thickness of the plate.
d
This shifts is equal to 5  where  is the fringe width

Dt (   1) Dt (  1) 5R D
 5  
d d d
Page NO: 4
5 5  7 10 7
t   7 106 m  7  m
(   1) 1.5  1
12. At steady state energy released per sec
13. C eq  2 0  F
q  2 0 0 C
q1  1 2 0 C
q2  0
14. C eq  2 1  C
q  2 1 0 C
q1  0
q 2  1 0 0 C
15. C eq  2 1  C
q  2 1 0 C

q1  0
q 2  4 0 C
16,17,18
100
f 
t
1 1 t 1 1 t 1  2t
     
v 200 100 v 200 100 200
200
v
1  2t
dv  200 
2
400
velocity of image    cm / s
dt 1  2t  2
1  2t 
2
d 2v 2  400  2  1600
acceleration of image    cm / s 2
1  2t  1  2t 
2 3 3
dt
(A) t = 1sec, velocity 400 cm/s, acceleration = –1600 cm/s2
400 1600
(B) t = 2sec., velocity = cm / s , acceleration =  cm / s 2
9 27
400 1600 64
(C) t = 3sec., velocity = = 16 cm/s, acceleration =    cm / s 2
25 125 5
400 1600
(D) t = 4sec., velocity  cm / s , acceleration =  cm / s 2
49 343
CHEMISTRY
19. Fe3+  Ar 3d 5  is more stable than Fe 2  Ar 3d 6 
Page NO: 5
due to half-filled d-orbitals
orbitals quantum number (l) of 4d electron is 2
Nitrogen 1s 2 2s 2 2 p1x 2 p1y 2 p1z
Forhydrogen 1s  2s  2 p  3s  3 p  3d  .......
1s
4r 2 2
0
0.529Aº
20. r

21.
22.
KCl cant attack without acidic medium
Claisen rearrangement
23. Conceptual
24. Conceptual
25. Conceptual
26. P4  3 NaOH  3H 2O  PH 3  3 NaH 2 PO2
27. C2 H 4  3O2  2CO2  2 H 2O
22.4LC4 H 4 at STP require  3 moles O2
2 KClO3  2 KCl  3O2

Ans: 2 moles
28. PVC, cellulose, nylon 6, polystyrene.
Isoprene, melamine are monomers
29. NO, NO2, O2, K3[Fe(CN)6], KO2, MnSO4, NiSO4, CuSO4 are paramagnetic and their
weight increases in the applied magnetic field
30. XeF6  H 2O  XeOF4  2 HF
31 to 33
Page NO: 6
OSF4 has  sp d  with different bon lengths and bond angles

3
XeF4 has square planar geometry with sp 3d hybridization.
ClO4 has tetrahedral sp 3 hydrization
34 - 36. Orbital angular momentum L  l l 1
For S L=O
p L  2
p L  6
MATHS
41. To test choice (a) and (b), we begin with computing g(x). Indeed g(x) = f(x + 5)

(From (ii) in ques.)
 g (– x) = f (– x + 5)
 g (x) = –f (x – 5) (From (i) in question)
 Choice (b) is true and choice (a) is ruled out. To test the choices (c) and
(d), we compute
5
 =  0 f (t) dt
5
Indeed  =  0 g (t  5) dt ( f(t) = g(t – 5) on replacing x by
t – 5 in (ii))
5
=  0 g (t  5) dt ( g is even)
 Choice (c) is correct and choice (d) is false.
x x
44. f  x   x 2   e  t f  x  t  dt  x 2  e x  et f  t  dt
0 0
 f 1
 x  2x  e x
 e  f  x   x   e
x 2 x
.e x f  x 
x3
 f | x   2 x  x 2  f  x    x2  K
3
But , f  0   0  k  0
4
 f 1 
3
45. No. of sol of sin  x  n x
y  sin  x, y  n x
No of sol = 6
Page NO: 7
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3
No. of solutions 6
Page NO: 8
Time: 3Hrs SGTA-4 Max.Marks:183
18-05-23_SR-OUTGOING_Jee-Adv_2017_P2_SGTA-4(PAPER-II)_KEY&SOL
PHYSICS
Q.No 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
Key C C A C A B D AD AB
Q.No 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Key AC C BCD AC AD C A C A

19 B 20 B 21 C
CHEMISTRY
22 C 23 A 24 C 25 B 26 ABD
27 BCD 28 ABC 29 CD 30 A 31 BD 32 ABD 33 A 34 C
35 D 36 B
MATHS
Q.No 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45
Key C A A B B B A ABC ABC
Q.No 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
Key BC BD ACD CD ABD B B D A
1|Page
Hints & Solutions
PHYSICS
01. 
Z1  R 1  i 3 

Z2  R 1 i 3 
ZAB =3R
2C a
 2
1 2 2CT  aT 2 2Cn  a
02.  '  CT  aT   n n 
2 2 2 2n 2
C 2 n 2C
n'   .
 ' 2nc  a
hc
03. eVs  ,

hc  1 1 
VS1  VS 2    
e  1  2 

h V V
So,  S1 S 2 .
e 1 1 
e  
 1  2 
1 q
04. E
40 R 2
1 q 2 A
Fe   0 E 2 A 
2 32 2 0 R 4
PV0 R3
Fgas  A  P 03 A
V R
q2 PR03
For equilibrium P  
322  0 R 4 R3
1

Solving q  322 0 PR R 3  R03  2 
05.  
M  M  238U   M  Pb   8M     6M  e   in amu
E  M  931.47 MeV  48.6 MeV
0 I
06. B ,
2r
b B2 0 I 2  b
Energy stored in length l, E   2r dr    log e 
a 20 4  a
2|Page
1 2 0 I 2  b
So, LI  log e
2 4 a
 0
L ln 2
2
07. use Kirchhoff’s loop rule
1
08. Amplitude, E  E0Cos cos  90     E0 Sin
2
So, for maximum amplitude Sin 2  1 , or   450
Intensity is proportional to square of amplitude
1
So, Intensity (Maximum transmitted) =  incident intensity
4
 Rhcz 2
09. En 
n2
hc
E1 


11. In the position shown, AB is outside and CD is inside the plane of the paper. The
Ampere force on AB acts into the paper. The torque on the loop will be clockwise,
as seen from above. The loop must rotate through an angle  90    before the plane
of the loop becomes normal to the direction of B and the torque becomes zero.
12. Disregard the capacitors and find the current through G. The potential difference
across each capacitor is the found from the potential differences across the resistors
in parallel with them.
13. Let R1 and R2 be the resistances of the two heaters. Let H be the heat produced.
V 2  V 2 
H    t1    t2
 R1   R2 
 V2  V 2 V 2 
When used in series, H    t . When used in parallel, H    t
 R1  R2   R1 R2 
14. Use Lens Formula,
Virtual Image formed by diverging lens behaves as a real object for convex lens)
3|Page
15. f  20 cm y L1
v I air
m 
u O 2mm
O x
u  80 cm air L2 water
uf 80 60cm 20cm
v  cm
uf 3
80 320
 x-co-ordinate = 80+  cm
3 3
2  8
 y-co-ordinate =   2 mm = mm
3  3
Hence, co-ordinate of image formed by
 320 8 
L1   cm, mm
 3 3 
 (C)
g 1 g  1
16. By refraction formula   … (i)
v1  60 20
 w g  w   g
  … (ii)
v v1 20


So
v = + 80 cm
x = 80 + 60 = 140 cm
 (A)
17.
1 1 1
 
p q f
pf d p  q pq p 200  1
q ,  (or) d  ;    2 mm .
p f  p p p f 100
18. h  H  q  50  20  30 cm
h 5 107  30  10 2
Fringe width,    3
 75  106 m
d 2 10
H  p 103  70 102
D  2
 3.5 103 m
p 20 10
D 3.5 10 3
So, N    46.7  47
 75 106
4|Page
CHEMISTRY
19. Ideal gases are not liquefied

20. CONCEPTUAL
21. Water of crystallization can be removed by dehydration but not
coordinated water.
22.
OH Br MgBr
CH 3 - CO - CH 3 
CH 3 MgBr
H O
 H3C CH3  H3C
SOBr2 CH3 
Mg
Et 2O
H3C CH3
3
CH3 CH3 CH3
COOH
H3C CH3 
1)CO2
2) H O+
3
CH3
23. For hydrogen atom 1  3.33 Aº

 n  n  1
13.32
n2  4
3.33
6.66
n1  2

3.33
E  E4  E2
 13.6   13.6 
 
 16   4 
 3.4  0.85  2.55eV
1240eV .nm
  486nm
2.55eV
24. As the lone pairs are removed by donation to H + ions in N 2 H 62 , the
repulsion between lone pairs is removed. So N-N bond length in N 2 H 62
(1.42) becomes shorter than in N 2 H 4 (1.453). In N 2O the N-N bond order
will be around 2.5 (between double and triple bonds due to resonance
hybrid. The bond length is less 1.126.
25. Concentrated H2SO4 cannot be used in this test instead of dil. H2SO4 because it
produces intense brown fumes with NO2 and under these conditions no ring can be
observed.
26. Turbidity of alkyl halide is formed not of alkene.
27. A is aldehyde
29. Conceptual
30.
5|Page
Cl CH2
O
CH2
(i)ClCH 2 CH 2 CCl O C
MeO
MeO OH O
AlCl 3
O
MeO O
31. Conceptual
32. Zeolites are frame work silicates not layered and they contain other
metal cations in their composition to balance the negative charge of the
three dimensional alumino-silicate. So they are not exclusively
composed of alumino silicates. Hydrolysis of CaC2 an ionic compound
produces C2 H 2 and Ca OH 2 in which C22 ion accept H  ion, which is
33. Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

very weak acid.
Calcium.
34. With Fe3 it forms a reddish – brown PPt which is insoluble in excess of the reagent
(D)
35. D is NaBO2
36. F is diborane and it undergoes unsymmetrical cleavage with primary amines.
MATHS
41.  2  6  2  0  2  6  2  0
  10  6 9  2 8  0 ………..(1)   10  6 9  2 8  0 ………(2)
subtract (2) from (1)

43. Since both the given lines pass through the point with position vector
i  2 j  k , the required plane also passes through i  2 j  k and normal to the
plane is perpendicular to the vectors i  2 j  k and i  j  3k . If d  ai  bj  ck is
normal to the required plane, then a  2b  c  0 and a  b  3c  0
a b c
    d  7i  4 j  k .
7 4 1
So the required plane passes through i  2 j  k and the normal to plane is 7i  4 j  k ,

hence required equation is [r  (i  2 j  k )].(7i  4 j  k )  0
6|Page
r.(7i  4 j  k )  1  7  2( 4)  ( 1)( 1)  0
Also since the required plane passes through i  2 j  k , i.e. the point (1, 2, 1) and the
direction ratios of the normal to the plane are 7,-4,-1, the equation of the plane in
Cartesian form can be written as 7( x  1)  4( y  2)  ( z  1)  0
48. Givin limit

 x3 x5 
a x    ....   bx  cx 2  x3
 3! 5! 
= lim  
x 0  x 2 x3 
2 x2  x    ...   2 x3  x 4
 2 3 
 
 a ax5
( a  b) x  cx 2  1   x3  ....
= lim  6 120
x 0 x5 x6
2   ...
3 2
For this limit to exist, we must have

a  b, c  0, a  6
a 3 63 3
and given limit =   
120 2 120  2 40
7|Page
OUTGOING SR’S DATE: 25-05-2023
Paper - I
JEE-ADVANCE -2018-P1- Model Important Instructions
PHYSICS:
+Ve - Ve
Section Question Type No.of Qs Total marks
Marks Marks
S ec – I(Q.N : 1 – 6) Q uestions with Multiple C orrect C hoice +4 -2 6 24
(partial marking schem e) (+ 1,0)
S ec – II(Q .N : 7 – 14) Q uestions with Numerical V alue Type +3 0 8 24

(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
S ec – III(Q . N : 15-18) Q uestions with Comprehension Type +3 -1 4 12

(2 C omprehensions – 2 +2 = 4 Q )

Total 18 60
CHEMISTRY:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Q uestions with Multiple C orrect C hoice
S ec – I(Q .N :19 – 24) +4 -2 6 24
Q uestions with Numerical V alue Type
S ec – II( Q .N : 25 –32) +3 0 8 24
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Q uestions with Comprehension Type
S ec – III(Q . N : 33-36) +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60
MATHEMATICS
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
S ec – I(Q .N:37 – 42) +4 -2 6 24
S ec – II( Q .N :43–50) +3 0 8 24
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
Q uestions with Comprehension Type
S ec –III( Q . N : 51-54) +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60
PHYSICS MAX.MARKS: 60
SECTION- I (Maximum Marks: 24)
This section contains SIX (06) questions. Each question has FOUR options for correct answer(s). ONE OR MORE THAN
ONE of these four option(s) is (are) correct option(s). For each question, choose the correct option(s) to answer the question.
Answer to each question will be evaluated according to the following marking scheme:
Full Marks : +4 If only (all) the correct option(s) is (are) chosen.
Partial Marks: +3 If all the four options are correct but ONLY three options are chosen.
Partial Marks: +2 If three or more options are correct but ONLY two options are chosen, both of which are correct options.
Partial Marks: +1 If two or more options are correct but ONLY one option is chosen and it is a correct option.
Zero Marks : 0 If none of the options is chosen (i.e. the question is unanswered).
Negative Marks: -2 In all other cases.

1. A particle of mass m, moving with a velocity v  v0î  v0 ˆj , elastically collides with another particle of
mass 2m at rest. Mark the correct statement
 î  ˆj 
(A) The direction along which C.M move is   
 2 
(B) The speed of m just before collision in C-frame is 2 v0

(C) The speed of 2m just before collision in C-frame is 2 v0
2 v0
(D) The speed of 2m just after collision in C-frame is

3
2. Particle ‘A’ moves with speed 10 m/s in a frictionless circular fixed horizontal pipe of radius 5 m and
strikes with ‘B’ of double mass that of A. Coefficient of restitution is 1/2 and particle ‘A’ starts its
journey at t = 0. The time at which second collision occurs is :
 2 5
(A) (B) (C) (D) 4
2 3 2
3. An object is projected with a speed 10 m/s at an angle of 30º with the horizontal. The object breaks
down into n equal fragments during its motion. One fragment is found to strike the ground at a distance
of 3 m from the point of projection in the same azimuthal plane, in which the object is projected. If
the centre of mass of the remaining fragments strikes the ground at distance of 7 3 m from the point
of projection, then the value of n is
(A) 2 (B) 3 (C) 4 (D) 5
4. A small block of mass m is placed on a bigger block of mass M, which is placed on a horizontal
frictionless plane. The two blocks are given equal speeds u, but in opposite directions, as shown in the
figure. After sometime, it is observed that both the blocks are moving in the direction of motion of the
u
lower block, with a velocity greater than . It can be concluded that
2
Page | 2
Friction u Horizontal
m frictionless
surface
u M
(A) M > 3 m (B) 3 M < m

(C) m > 2 M (D) M, m can have any value such that M > m.
5. Two pucks are initially moving along a frictionless surface as shown in the diagram. The pucks have
mass m1 < m2 and begin with equal magnitude of momentum. A constant force F is applied to each
puck directly to the right for the same non-zero interval of time. After the pushes are complete, what
is the relationship between the size of the momenta of pucks (p1 and p2) ?
(A) p1< p2
(B) p1= p2
(C) p1> p2
(D) More information about the masses, speeds, force and time are required to answer the questions
6.
The resultant force on a system of particles is non-zero.
(A) The linear momentum of the system must increase
(B) The velocity of the center of mass of the system must change
(C) The distance of the centre of mass may remain constant from a fixed point
(D) Kinetic energy of all particles must either increase simultaneously or decrease simultaneously
SECTION – II (Maximum Marks: 24)

This section contains EIGHT (08) questions. The answer to each question is a NUMERICAL VALUE. For each question,
enter the correct numerical value (in decimal notation, truncated/rounded off to the second decimal place; e.g. 6.25, 7.00, -0.33,
-.30, 30.27, -127.30) designated to enter the answer.
Full Marks: +3 If ONLY the correct numerical value is entered as answer.
Zero Marks: 0 In all other cases
7. Block ‘A’ is hanging from a vertical spring and is at rest. Block ‘B’ strikes the block ‘A’ with velocity
‘v’ and sticks to it. Then the value of ‘v’(in m/s) for which the spring just attains natural length is :
Page | 3
8. Sand drops vertically (from negligible height) at a rate of 4kg/s on to a conveyer belt moving at
constant speed 2m/s. Energy lost the heat per unit time is _____ (in j/s)
9. A ring of radius 4a is rigidly fixed in vertical position on a table. A small disc of mass m and radius a
is released as shown in the figure. When the disc rolls down, without slipping, to the lowest point of
the ring, then its speed in m/s will be
a
4a
(take g = 10 m/s2 and a = 0.4 m)

10. In the given diagram co-efficient of friction between sphere and surface is very high to ensure no
relative sliding where as that between block and surface is zero .The system is released from given
position. If the ratio of the K.E. for block to sphere in ground frame is x then find the value of 13 x.
M,R
H
M
11. A hollow cylinder of radius R=2.0 m is rotating at constant angular acceleration about its stationary
horizontal axis into the plane of the paper as shown in the figure. If a uniform solid cylinder is placed

horizontally with its axis parallel to the axis of hollow cylinder at an angular position of   300 , the
solid cylinder starts rolling with its axis motionless. The angular acceleration  (in rad/s2) of the hollow
cylinder is x. Find x
12. A rectangular tank of height 10m filled with water is placed near the bottom of a plane inclined at an
angle 30 0 with horizontal. At height h from bottom a small hole is made (as shown in figure) such
 x
2
that the stream coming out from hole, strikes the inclined plane normally. The value of ‘ h ’ is .
3
Find the value of ‘x’ in meters
y
v
10m
h
300
x
o
Page | 4
13. A rod AB of mass M and length L is lying on a horizontal frictionless surface. A particle of mass m
travelling along the surface hits one end A of the rod with a velocity v0 in a direction perpendicular
to AB. The collision is elastic. After the collision the particle comes to rest. Find the ratio M/m.
14. The moment of inertia of a uniform thin rod of mass m and length L
about two axis PQ and RS passing through centre of rod C and in the
mL2
plane of the rod are IPQ and IRS respectively. Then I PQ  I RS  .
3x
The value of x is
SECTION – III (Maximum Marks: 12)

This section contains TWO (02) Paragraphs. Based on each paragraph, there are 2 questions. Each question has 4 options (A),
(B), (C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE option can be correct.
Marking scheme: +3 for correct answer, 0 if not attempted and -1 in all other cases
Passage-I
A syringe is filled with water. Its volume is 20 cm3, and the cross section of its interior part is 4 cm2.
The syringe is held vertically such that its nozzle is at its top, and its 100g piston is pressed by external
agent and it moves with a constant speed. The ejected water has an initial upward velocity of 2 m/s,
and the cross-section of the beam of water at the nozzle is 1 mm2. (Neglect the dissipated energy due

to friction)
15. Find the speed of the piston.
(A) 5 mm/s (B) 5 cm/s (C) 0.5 m/s (D) 0.5 mm/s
16. What is the total work done by external agent?
(A) 0.04 J (B) 0.045 J (C) 0.095 J (D) 4.5 MJ
Passage-II
Moment of inertia is a physical term which oppose the change in rotational motion. Moment of inertia
depends on distribution of mass, shape of the body as well as distance from the rotational axis. Moment
of linear momentum is called angular momentum. If no external torque act on the system then angular
momentum of the system remains conserved. Geometrical meaning of angular momentum relates to
the real velocity.
17. Mass M is distributed over the rod of length L. If linear mass density () linearly increases with length
as   Kx. The M.I. of the rod about one end perpendicular to rod i.e. (YY ' )
Y
M L
  Kx
Y'
ML2 ML2 2 KL4
(A) (B) (C) ML2 (D)
3 12 3 4
18. A particle of mass m is moving along the line y  3 x  5 with speed V. The magnitude of angular
momentum about origin is
 5 1 1
(A) mV (B) mV (C) mV (D) mV
2 2 2 3
Page | 5
CHEMISTRY MAX.MARKS: 60
19. Which option is correct?
(A) ‘x’ is  -amino ketone (B) ‘y’ is cyclic amide

(C) ‘z’ is yellow oily liquid (D) Compound X has 2 geometrical Isomers

20. An acidic solution contains Cu 2 , Pb2 and Zn 2 . If H2S(g) is passed through the solution the
precipitate will contain
(A) CuS and ZnS (B) PbS and ZnS
(C) CuS and PbS (D) CuS, PbS and ZnS
21. According to Charle’s law:
1  dV   dT  1 V 
(A) V  (B)   K (C)   K (D)   2   0
T  dT P  dV P  T T P
22. The  electron cloud of C1  C2 is present in the plane of paper than which of the following is
incorrect?
(A) Z is perpendicular to the plane of paper

(B) X is present in the plane of paper
(C)  bond of C 2  C3 is perpendicular to the plane of paper
(D)  electron cloud of C 2  C3 bond and X is present in same plane
Page | 6
23. The correct statement(s) for the following addition reactions is(are)
(A) (M and O) and (N and P) are two pairs of diastereomers

(B) Bromination proceeds through trans-addition in both the reaction
(C) O and P are identical molecules
(D) (M and O) and (N and P) are two pairs of enantiomers
24. For the given graph, which parameters will be zero?
(A) Q (B) H (C) U (D) S
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot SECTION – II (Maximum Marks: 24)

25. 25 calories of heat is required to raise the temperature by 100 C for 0.5 mole of a unknown gas at
constant volume. Find molar heat capacity at constant pressure of unknown gas (in calorie) [Given R
= 2 calorie/mole/K]
26. Identify numbers of reagent that can be used for below conversion
O
|| ?
R  C  R   R  CH 2  R
(I) Zn  Hg / HCl (II) LiAlH 4 (III) CHCl3  NaOH (IV) N 2 H 4 / OH
(V) CH 2  SH , H2 / Ni (VI) SeO2
|
CH 2  SH
Page | 7
27. Value of V is (in mL)
NaOH
28. How many maximum spectral lines are possible if electron is present in 4th shell and only two atom
are present in sample?
29. At 250 C , the solubility product of Mg(OH)2 is 1.0 1011 M 3 . At which pH will Mg 2 ions start
precipitating in the form of Mg(OH)2 from a solution of 0.001 M Mg 2 ions?
30. The reaction A  2B  C  2D  E is found to be `1, 2 and zero order with respect to A, B and C
respectively. What will be the final rate, if concentration of each reactant is doubled? (in times)
31. How many mL of 1.00 M NaOH must be added to 100 ml of 0.1 M H3PO 4 solution to obtain a
phosphate buffer solution with pH of about 8.2? (in mL) (The pK values of H3PO 4 are pK1  2.1 ,
pK 2  8.2 , pK 3  12 )

32. In 1 litre saturated solution of AgCl [K sp  1.6 1010 ] , 0.1 mole of CuCl [K sp  1106 ] is added.
The resultant concentration of Ag  in the solution is 1.6 10 x M . The value of ‘x’ is

Passage-I
All values are in Kcal per mole at 250 C given below
H 0Combustion(ethane)  372.0
H 0Combustion(propane)  530.0
H0 for C(graphite) 
 C(g)  172.0
Bond energy of H – H = 104.0
H 0f of H2O()  68.0
H 0f of CO2 (g)  94.0 .
33. Find the C – C bond energy in Kcal/mole ________
(A) 41 (B) 52 (C) 82 (D) 92
34. Find the C – H bond energy in Kcal/mole ________
(A) 99 (B) 77 (C) 55 (D) 33
Page | 8
Passage-II
NaOH
35. A  B   Product:

(A) (B)
(C) (D)
36. Find correct structure of E

(A) (B)
(C) (D) None of these
Page | 9
MATHEMATICS MAX.MARKS: 60
37. Using the elements 3, 2, 1, 0,1, 2, 3 , then

(A) The number of 3  3 matrices having trace 0 is are 35  7 7
(B) The number of 3  3 matrices having trace 0 are 35(7 6 )
(C) The number of 3  3 skew symmetric matrices are 73
(D) The number of 3  3 symmetric matrices are 76
38. A rational number is selected at random from the set of all rational numbers from the interval
(2010, 2011) all of whose digits after the decimal point are non-zero and are in the decreasing order,
then

36
(A) The probability that it has exactly seven digits after the decimal point is
511
256
(B) The probability that it contains the digit 3 after the decimal point is .
511
63
(C) The probability that the last digit after the decimal is atleast 4 is .
511
32
(D) The probability that the last digit after the decimal point is 4 is
511
39. Let f : N  N  N be a function such that f (1,1)  2 and f (  1,  )  f ( ,  )   and
f ( ,   1)  f ( ,  )   ;  ,   N and f ( a, b)  2001 ; a, b  N . Then which of the following
statements is/are true?
(A) Number of ordered pairs ( a, b) is 2 (B) Maximum value of a  b is 3999
(C) Minimum value of a  b is 2000 (D) Minimum value of a  b is 1999
40. If f : R  R be differentiable function such that ( f ( x )) 7  x  f ( x ) . Then
2
(A)  f 1 ( x)dx  3
0
(B) f ( x ) is increasing x  R
d
(C) ( f 1 ( x)) at x  2 is 449
dx
(D) Let g ( x ) be the inverse of f ( x ) . Then g ''(1)  42
Page | 10
41. To the parabola y  4 x three real and distinct normals are drawn from the point ( , 2) . Then  can
2
be
17 19
(A) 6 (B) (C) 1 (D)
2 2
42. a , a
If 1 2 3 , a ,..., an is sequence of positive numbers which are in A.P. with common difference ' d ' and
a1  a4  a7  ....  a16  147 then,
(A) a1  a6  a11  a16  98 (B) a1  a16  49
16
 49 
(C) a1  a4  a7  ....a16  6a1  45d (D) Maximum value of a1a2 ....a16 is  
 2 

43. An in complete frequency distribution is given as follows

Variable
Frequency
10  20 20  30 30  40 40  50 50  60 60  70 70  80 Total
12 30 x 65 y 25 18 229
Given that the median value is 46 and x, y are missing frequencies, where x and y are integers.
1  
( y  x ) and sum of all fractional parts of the equation ( y  x ){t}  2[t ]  3 is . Then  1  is ____
2  2 
(where {.} denotes Fractions part of x , [.] = GIF)
44. A four digit natural number is selected at random. The probability that the product of digits is 12, is k
, then sum of the digits 1/ k is _________
45. For a group of 200 candidates the mean and standard deviation of scores were found to be 40 and 15
respectively. Later on it was discovered that the scores 43 and 35 were misread as 34 and 53
respectively. Then the corrected standard deviation corresponding to the corrected figures is
46. Let the equation ( a  1) x 2  x (2b  3) be satisfied by three distinct values of x , where a, b  R . If
f ( x )  ( a  1) x3  (2b  3) x 2  2 x  1 and f ( g ( x))  6 x  7 , where g ( x ) is a linear function. Then the
value of f '(2023)  g '(2023) is
47. If f ( x ) is a polynomial function of degree 4 and leading coefficient is 1 and f (1)  10 , f (2)  20 ,
f (12)  f ( 8)
f (3)  30 . Then the value of is
1984000
x2 y 2
48. C is the centre of the hyperbola   1 and A is any point on it. The tangent at A to the hyperbola
4 1
meet the line x  2 y  0 and x  2 y  0 at Q and R respectively. Then the value of CQ  CR is
Page | 11
2
2 2 24
49. The sum of the series  2  4  .... terms _________
4 1 4 1 4  1
              
50. If | 1 | 1 , |  2 | 2 and (1 , 2 )  and b1  71  2   2 ; b 2   1   2 and (b1 , b 2 )   ,   and
3 2 
  (1 , 2 )  {3} . Then 12  422  32 is _____

Passage-I
A is a set containing n elements. A subset S1 of A is chosen. The set A is reconstructed by replacing
the elements of S1. Again, a subset S2 of A is chosen and again the set is reconstructed by replacing
the elements of S2. The number of ways of choosing S1 or S2 where
51. S1 and S2 have one element common is
(A) 3n–1 (B) n . 3n–1 (C) 2n–1 (D) n
52. S1  S2 = A is

(A) 3n (B) n . 3n (C) 4n (D) 4n–1
Passage-II
Let S be the set of first 18 natural Numbers. Then attempt the following.
53. The probability of choosing {x, y}  S such that x 3  y 3 is divisible by 3.
(A) 1/3 (B) 1/6 (C) 1/5 (D) 1/4
54. The probability of choosing {x, y, z}  S such that x, y, z are in A.P is
(A) 1/17 (B) 2/17 (C) 5/34 (D) 3/34
Page | 12
Paper - I I
JEE-ADVANCE -2018-P2- Model Important Instructions
PHYSICS:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
S ec – I(Q.N : 1 – 6) +4 -2 6 24
(partial marking scheme) (+1,0)
S ec – II(Q .N : 7 – 14) +3 0 8 24
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
S e c – III(Q .N : 15-18) Matrix Matching Type +3 -1 4 12

CHEMISTRY:
Total 18 60
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Q uestions with Multiple C orrect Choice
S ec – I(Q .N :19 – 24) +4 -2 6 24
S ec – II(Q .N : 25 –32) +3 0 8 24
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
S e c – III(Q .N : 33-36) Matrix Matching Type +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60
MATHEMATICS:
+Ve - Ve
Marks Marks
Q uestions with Multiple C orrect Choice
S ec – I(Q.N:37 – 42) +4 -2 6 24
S ec – II(Q .N :43–50) +3 0 8 24
(e.g. 6.25, 7.00, ‐0.33, ‐.30, 30.27, ‐127.30)
S ec –III(Q .N : 51-54) Matrix Matching Type +3 -1 4 12
Total 18 60
PHYSICS MAX.MARKS: 60
1. A train of mass M is moving on a circular track of radius ‘R’ with constant speed V. The length of the
train is half of the perimeter of the track. The linear momentum of the train will be
2MV
(A) 0 (B) (C) MVR (D) MV

2. When a block is placed on a wedge as shown in figure, the block starts sliding down and the wedge
also start sliding on ground. All surface are rough. The centre of mass of (wedge + block) system will
move

(A) Leftward and downward. (B) Rightward and downward.
(C) Leftward and upwards. (D) Only downward.
3. In the figure a wedge of mass M is placed at rest on a smooth horizontal surface. A small sphere of
mass m hits the inclined face of the wedge with horizontal speed v0. The impact is perfectly inelastic.
There is no friction anywhere and bodies are rigid.
v0 m
M 
Following four statements are given regarding this problem.
(i) After impact both bodies will be moving with same velocity along horizontal.
(ii) After impact the sphere will be moving only parallel to the inclined plane with speed v0cos as
observed from the ground.
(iii) Just after collision component of the velocity of the sphere along the plane is v0cos.
mv 0
(iv) After collision sphere will come to stop and wedge will move with the speed of .
M
(A) Only (i) is true (B) (i) and (ii) both are correct
(C) Only (iii) is correct (D) all four are wrong
Page | 3
4. A trolley is moving horizontally with a velocity of v m/s w.r.t. earth. A man starts running from one
end of the trolley with a velocity 1.5 v m/s w.r.t. the trolley. After reaching the opposite end, the
man turns back and continues running with a velocity of 1.5 v m/s w.r.t. trolley in the backward
direction. If the length of the trolley is L then the displacement of the man with respect to earth
measured as a function of time, will attain a maximum value of
4 2 5L
(A) L (B) L (C) (D) 1.5 L
3 3 3
5. A particle is projected from a smooth horizontal surface with velocity v at an angle  from horizontal.
Coefficient of restitution between the surface and ball is e. The distance of the point where ball strikes
the surface second time from the point of projection is
v 2 sin  (1  e 2 ) v 2 sin  (1  e3 ) v 2 sin  (1  e 4 ) v 2 sin  (1  e 2 )
(A) (B) (C) (D)
g g g g
6. Shown in the figure is two identical blocks connected through a massless rigid rod by hinge connection.
Upper block is free to move along horizontal groove. Lower block is free to move in vertical circle
about upper block. Lower block is imparted velocity v. Assume friction is absent.
(A) At highest point both block will have same speed when v is minimum to complete the circle

(B) Minimum v to complete circle is 8gL
(C) Minimum v to complete circle is 5gL
(D) Minimum v to complete circle is 4gL

7. A hollow sphere of mass m = 1kg and radius R = 1m rests on a smooth horizontal surface. A simple
pendulum having string of length R and bob of mass m = 1kg hangs from top most point of the sphere
as shown. A bullet of mass m = 1kg and velocity v = 2m/sec partially penetrates the left side of the
sphere. The velocity of the sphere just after collision with bullet is.
Page | 4
M
8. In the shown figure, a particle of mass strikes the block of mass M with velocity v0 and gets
10
attached to it. For what velocity v0 (in ms-1), the block B is just able to leave the ground? (Given M =
100 gm, K = 880 N/m)
M
10 A
M K
B
2M
9. A uniform cylinder rests on a cart with the axis vertical. The coefficient of static friction between the
cylinder and the cart is 0.9. If the cylinder is 4 cm in diameter and 10 cm in height, find the minimum
horizontal acceleration of the cart needed in m/s2 to cause the cylinder to tip over. Take g = 10m/s2.
10. Two wheels A and C connected by a belt B as shown in the figure. The radius of C is three times the
I
radius of A. What would be the ratio of the rotational inertias C if both the wheels have the same
IA
rotational kinetic energy?

11. A uniform rod has mass m = 2 kg and length l = 13m. One end of the rod is pulled with a constant
velocity of v0 = 34 m/s along a frictionless horizontal floor in the negative x direction. The other end
is moving along a parabolic fixed curve. The equation of the parabola is x2 = 20y. Find the angular
velocity of the rod (in rad/s) when the end point ‘B’ is at (10,5)
12. There are two identical small holes on the opposite sides of a tank containing a liquid. The tank is open
at the top. The difference in height between the holes is h. As the liquid comes out to the two holes,
the tank will experience a net horizontal force proportional to h N . N is equal to
Page | 5
13. The figure shows an isosceles triangular plate of mass m and base ℓ . The angle at the apex is 90°. The
apex lies at the origin and the base is parallel to X–axis. The moment of inertia of the plate about the
ml 2
z-axis is . Find the value of n.
n
14.    
A particle of mass 2 kg located at the position iˆ  ˆj m has a velocity 2 iˆ  ˆj  kˆ m / s .
2
The magnitude of its angular momentum about z-axis in kg.m /s is:

Each question has TWO (02) matching lists: LIST-I and LIST-II. FOUR options are given representing matching of elements
from LIST-I and LIST-II. ONLY ONE of these four options corresponds to a correct matching.
For each question, choose the option corresponding to the correct matching. For each question, choose the option corresponding
to the correct matching.
Full Marks : +3 If ONLY the option corresponding to the correct matching is chosen.

Negative Marks : –1 In all other cases.
15. Consider a cylinder of mass M and radius R lying on a rough horizontal plane. It has a plank lying on
its top as shown in figure. A force F is applied on the plank such that the plank moves and causes the
cylinder to roll. The plank always remains horizontal. There is no slipping at any point of contact
Column-I Column-II
I) The magnitude of acceleration of the plank P) 3MF cos 
3M  8m
II) The magnitude of frictional force acting on the plank Q) MF cos 
3M  8m 
8F cos 
III) Magnitude of acceleration of centre of mass of the cylinder R)
3M  8m
IV) The frictional force on the cylinder at the
4 F cos 
point of contact with the horizontal lane S)
3M  8m
The correct match is
(A) I-(R); II-(S); III-(P); IV-(Q) (B) I-(R); II-(P); III-(S); IV-(Q)
(C) I-(S); II-(R); III-(P); IV-(Q) (D) I-(P); II-(S); III-(Q); IV-(R)
Page | 6
16. Matching – I: A rod moves in the vertical plane against horizontal and vertical surface. The lowest
point P of the rod is pulled with a constant velocity v. At any angular position  of the rod, match the
following VQ=speed of point Q   angular speed of rod l= length of rod aQ=acceleration of point Q
Column I Column II
v
I) Q P) sec 
v
a
II) 2Q q) tan 
v

III) r) sec3 
v
v
IV) s) cot 
vQ
(A) I-(R); II-(S); III-(P); IV-(Q) (B) I-(R); II-(P); III-(S); IV-(Q)
(C) I-(Q); II-(R); III-(P); IV-(S) (D) I-(P); II-(S); III-(Q); IV-(R)
17. The cases in Column I match the velocity of efflux cross section of opening is very small in Column
II
Column I Column II


h
2 

I)  P) 2gh
h 2

Two immiscible liquids of density  & 2

h
2 


II) h 2 Q) 2.5gh

A perfectly fitting piston made of material of
density  which can slide without friction

h 
III) 
A solid cylinder of half the cross section of tankIs just R) 3gh
h
touching the water surface. Now it is pushed by a distance
2
downward (An external agent holds cylinder, vessel is large).
Arrangement is same as in option C but cylinder is pushed down by
IV) S) 3.5gh
a distance h
T) 4gh
(A) I-(R); II-(T); III-(P); IV-(S) (B) I-(P); II-(Q); III-(R); IV-(S)
(C) I-(P); II-(S); III-(Q); IV-(T) (D) I-(T); II-(S); III-(R); IV-(Q)
Page | 7
18. A particle of mass 1 kg is projected upwards with velocity 60 m/s. Another particle of mass 2 kg is just
dropped from a certain height Alter 2s, match the following: [Take g = 10 m/s2]
Column-I Column-II
(I) Acceleration of COM (P) Zero
(II) Velocity of COM (Q) 10 SI unit
(III) Displacement of COM (R) 20 SI unit
(S) None
(A) I-(R); II-(S); III-(P) (B) I-(P); II-(Q); III-(R)
(C) I-(P); II-(R); III-(S) (D) I-(Q); II-(P); III-(R)
CHEMISTRY MAX.MARKS: 60

19. Which of the following option(s) is/are correct?
(A) ‘x’ is a diketone (B) ‘y’ is a gemdiol

(C) ‘z’ is a conjugated diene (D) W and N are  -diketone and  -carboxylic acid
20. The correct statement(s) about the oxoacids, HClO4 and HClO, is(are)
(A) HClO4 is more acidic than HClO because of the resonance stabilization of its anion
(B) HClO4 is formed in the reaction between Cl2 and H2O
(C) The central atom in both HClO4 and HClO is sp3 hybridized
(D) The conjugate base of HClO4 is weaker base than H2O
21. Which of the following mixtures constitute a buffer?
(A) CH3COOH  CH 3COONa (B) Na 2CO3  NaHCO3
(C) NaCl + HCl (D) NH 4Cl  (NH 4 )2 SO4
Page | 8
22. When HCl(g) is passed through a saturated solution of common salt, pure NaCl is precipitated because
(A) HCl is highly soluble in water
(B) the ionic product [Na  ][Cl  ] exceeds its solubility product (K sp )
(C) the K sp of NaCl is lowered by the presence of Cl ions
(D) HCl causes precipitation
23. The plot given is not possible for
1
(A) 2nd order reaction  vs time
[A]
(B) 1st order reaction  t1/ 2 vs concentration
(C) Zero order reaction  t1/ 2 vs concentration
(D) nth order reaction  rate vs concentration
24. Which of the following are true about silicones?
(A) They are formed by hydrolysis of R 2SiCl2
(B) They are polymer, made up of R 2SiO2 units
(C) They are made up of SiO44  units
(D) They are macromolecules

25. Of the following compounds, how many would give positive test with Tollen’s reagent
26. One mole of an ideal monoatomic gas expands reversibly and adiabatically from a volume of ‘x’ litre
to 14 litre at 270 C . The value of ‘x’ will be [Given, final temperature 189 K and CV  3 / 2 R ]
27. The degree of hydrolysis of a mixture containing 0.1 N NH 4OH and 0.1 N HCN is 10 x . If K a  10 5
and K b  105 then ‘x’ is
28. The enthalpy of combustion of C and CO are – 393.5 kJ and – 283 kJ respectivley, the enthalpy of
formation of CO is (in kJ)
Page | 9
29. The dissolution of CaCl2  6H2 O in a large volume of water is endothermic to the extent of 3.5
kcal/mol. For the reaction CaCl2 (s)  6H 2O() 
 CaCl2  6H 2O(s) ; H is – 23.2 Kcal/mol. The
heat of solution of anhydrous CaCl2 in large quantity of water will be (in Kcal/mol)
30. The uncertainty in the position of an electron ( mass = 9.11028 g) moving with a velocity of
3.0  104 cm s 1 accurate upto 0.001% will be (in cm) (Use h in the uncertainty expression, where
4
27
h  6.626  10 erg  s )
31. On monochlorination of 2-methyl butane, the total number of chiral compounds is
32. The magnetic moment of K 3[Fe(CN)6 ] is found to be 1.7 B.M. How many unpaired electron (s) is/are
present per molecule

33. Match the following

Column-I
(I)
Column-II
(P) Oxidation
(II) (Q) Condensation
(III) (R) Nucleophilic addition
(IV) (S) Electrophilic substitution
(T) Nucleophilic substitution

(A) I-(QR); II-(PRT); III-(QR); IV-(RST) (B) I-(PQR); II-(RST); III-(PR); IV-(RST)
(C) I-(PR); II-(PT); III-(QS); IV-(ST) (D) I-(PR); II-(RT); III-(PR); IV-(RT)
Page | 10
34. Match the following column. Column-I with Column-II
Column-I Column-II
(I) N(SiH3 )3 (P) p  d back bonding
(II) N(CH 3 )3 (Q) sp3 -hybridization for underlined atom
(III) B2 H 6 (R) p  p back bonding
(IV) BF3 (S) Neither p  p nor p  d back bonding
(T) Underlined atom combines with Lewis base
(A) I-(QR); II-(PRT); III-(QR); IV-(RST) (B) I-(P); II-(ST); III-(PR); IV-(RST)
(C) I-(P); II-(QS); III-(QST); IV-(RT) (D) I-(PR); II-(RT); III-(PR); IV-(RT)
35. Match the following column. Column-I with Column-II
Column-I Column-II
(I) [Ma 3b 2c] (P) All stereoisomers are optically inactive
(II) [Ma 3b3 ] (Q) Number of geometrical isomers = 2
(III) [Ma 3bcd] (R) Number of geometrical isomers = 4
(IV) [Ma 4 bc] (S) Total 3 stereoisomers

(T) Only one enantiometric pair is possible

(A) I-(QR); II-(PRT); III-(QR); IV-(RST) (B) I-(PR); II-(ST); III-(PR); IV-(RST)
(C) I-(QS); II-(QR); III-(QST); IV-(RT) (D) I-(PS); II-(PQ); III-(RT); IV-(PQ)
36. Dilution processes of different aqueous solutions, with water, are given in Column-I. The effects of
dilution of the solution on [H  ] are given in Column-II. [Degree of dissociation ( ) of weak acid and
weak base is <<1; degree of hydrolysis of salt <<<1; [H  ] represents the concentration of H  ions]
Column-I Column-II
(I) (10 mL of 0.1 M NaOH + 20 mL of 0.1 M acetic acid) (P) the value of [H  ] does not change on
diluted to 60 mL
dilution
(II) (20 mL of 0.1 M NaOH + 20 mL of 0.1 M acetic acid) (Q) 
the value of [H ] changes to half of its
diluted to 80 mL
initial values on dilution
(III) (20 mL of 0.1 M HCl + 20 mL of 0.1 M ammonia solution) (R) 
the value of [H ] changes to two times of
diluted to 80 mL
its initial value on dilution
(IV) 10 mL saturated solution of Ni(OH) 2 in equilibrium with (S)  1
the value of [H ] changes to times of
excess solid Ni(OH) 2 is diluted to 20 mL (solid 2
Ni(OH) 2 is still present after solution)
(T) 
the value of [H ] changes to 2 times of
Match each process given in Column-I with one or more effects in Column-II. The correct match is
(A) I-(S); II-(Q); III-(R); IV-(P) (B) I-(S); II-(R); III-(Q); IV-(R)
(C) I-(P); II-(S); III-(T); IV-(R) (D) I-(P); II-(T); III-(S); IV-(P)
Page | 11
MATHEMATICS MAX.MARKS: 60
1 
37. Let f ( x )  lim log( ecos x e3cos x e5cos x ......... e(2n1) cos x ) and g ( x )   f ( x)  . Then which of the
n  3 
following are discontinuous points for the function g ( x ) ?
 3
(A) 0 (B) (C) (D) 2
2 2
38. To the parabola y 2  4 x at the point P(4, 4) normal cuts the parabola again at Q. Then PSQ is not
equal to
   
(A) (B) (C) (D)

39.
2 3 4 6
If the ratio of 6 term from beginning and 6 term from end in the expansion of ( x 3  2 x 2 )15 is
4 2
th th
, then the value of x is less than?

243
(A) 2 (B) 1 (C) ( 2)1/ 5 (D) ( 3)1/ 5
40. A student has a collection of blue and red marbles. The number of red marbles belong to the set
{20, 21, 22, …., 38}. If two marbles are chosen simultaneously at random from this collection, the
1
probability that they have different colours is . Then possible number of blue marbles is/are
2
(A) 21 (B) 36 (C) 38 (D) 15
41. A sequence a1 , a2 , a3 ,...., an of real numbers is such that a1  0 , | a2 || a1  1| , | a3 || a2 1| , …., | an |

is equal to | an1  1| , where the arithmetic mean of a1 , a2 , a3 ,..., an cannot be less than  , then find

the value of   
(A)     3 (B)   2
 
(C)     3 (d)  and  can be roots of a quadratic equation with rational coefficient
42. If a1  a 2  a3  a 4  a5  a6 , then the equation
 x  a1   x  a3  x  a 5   3  x  a 2  x  a 4   x  a 6   0 has
(A) three reals roots (B) a root in  , a1  (C) a root in  a1,a 2  (D) a root in  a 5 , a 6 
Page | 12
 
43. Let    and a function f ( x ) is defined as
3 2
 1x 2 (sin   sin 3  )  (5 x  2 ) | sin   sin 3  |n
lim
 n ; x Q
 (sin   sin 3  )  | sin   sin 3  |n
f ( x)  
 lim 1x (sin   sin  )  (5 x  2 ) | sin   sin  | ; x  Q
2 3 3 n
n (sin   sin 3  )  | sin   sin 3  |n


and f ( x ) is continuous at x  2 and x  3 . Then the value of 2  1 is _________
44. A line 3 x  y  8 touches a hyperbola at P(1, 5) meets its asymptotes at A and B. If AB  2 10 and
a a b
centre of the hyperbola is C(1, 1) and its eccentricity is . Then is
b 100
Yashpatil
45.
 TG~ @bohring_bot
The value of r 1
k
k
2 r  nC r ( k 1)
Cr 1
(where n  k ) is
 n
Cr  ( n  k  r 1)
Cn 1
r 0
xn a
46. A sequence is defined by x1  2 and xn1  for all n  1 and a101  , then b  a is ___
1  xn b
1 0 0 
47. Let matrix M  1 0 1  satisfies the equation M n  M n  2  M 2  I for n  3, 4,5, 6,....., where
0 1 0 
I  I33 . Then det(Adj M 50 ) is

n
1
r
r 1
48. The value of n
is
k
 (2n  2k  1)(2n  k  1)
k 1
   
49. Let three dimensional vector v satisfy the vector equation 2v  (v  (i  2 ˆj ))  2iˆ  kˆ and 3 | v | m ,
then the value of m is
Page | 13
 1  1 
50. Let a  (2iˆ  3 ˆj  6kˆ) , b  (6iˆ  2 ˆj  3kˆ) and c  C1iˆ  C2 ˆj  C3kˆ and the matrix
7 7
2 3 6
7 7      
7 a a a b a c
       
6 2 3 
A and A  AT  I , then a  b b  b b  c is equal to
7 7 7      
  a c b c c c
C1 C2 C3 
 

51. Four digit natural number is formed using, the digits from the set {0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5}, repetition of digits
is allowed
Column I Column II

(Conditions)
(I) Number formed is multiples of 3
(II) number formed contains exactly two different
(Number of natural numbers)
(P) 480
(Q) 540
digits
(III) Numbers formed contains exactly three different (R) 360
digits
(IV) Number formed is odd (S) 175
(A) I-(P); II-(R); III-(Q); IV-(S) (B) I-(P); II-(R); III-(S); IV-(Q)
(C) I-(R); II-(S); III-(R); IV-(P) (D) I-(R); II-(S); III-(R); IV-(Q)
52. There are 10 pairs of shoes in a cup board from which 4 shoes are taken at random. If P(E) denotes
the probability of the event E . Match the following:
Column I Column II
(I) P ( getting no pair) (P) 99
323
(II) P (getting at least one pair) (Q) 96
323
(III) P (getting exactly two pairs) (R) 224
323
(IV) P ( getting exactly one pair ) (S) 3
323
(A) I-(P); II-(R); III-(Q); IV-(S) (B) I-(P); II-(R); III-(S); IV-(Q)
(C) I-(R); II-(P); III-(S); IV-(Q) (D) I-(R); II-(S); III-(R); IV-(Q)
Page | 14
Page | 15
53. Match the following:-
I) The area of the figure bounded by y = x2 and y  x is P) 4/3
4
II)   x dx has the value ({x} denotes fractional part of x}
0
Q) 5/3
III) The area of the region for which 0 < y < 3 – 2x – x2 and x > 0 is R) 7/3
 /2
IV) 
 / 2
cos x  cos 3 x dx equals S) 1/3

(A) I-(S); II-(R); III-(Q); IV-(P) (B) I-(P); II-(R); III-(S); IV-(Q)
54. Match the following Column-I with Column-II
Column I Column II

I) The distance between the lines ( x  7 y ) 2  4 2( x  7 y )  42  0 is P) 2
II) If the sum of the distance of a point from two perpendicular lines Q) 7
in a plane is 1, then its locus is |x| + |y| = k, where k is equal to
III) If 6x + 6y + m = 0 is acute angle bisector of line x + 2y + 4 = 0 R) 3

and4x + 2y – 1 = 0, then m is equal to
IV) Area of the triangle formed by the lines y 2  9 xy  18 x 2  0 and S)1
y = 6 is

(A) I-(S); II-(R); III-(Q); IV-(P) (B) I-(P); II-(S); III-(Q); IV-(R)
Page | 16
Narayana IIT Academy 25-05-23_Sr.Outgoing_JEE-ADV_(2018_P1)_SGTA-5_Key & Sol.

Time: 3 Hrs SGTA-5 (Paper - I ) Max. Marks: 180
Answer Key
PHYSICS
1. (D) 2. (C) 3. (B) 4. (A) 5. (A) 6. (BC)
7. (6) 8. (8) 9. (4) 10. (5) 11. (5) 12. (5)
13. (4) 14. (4) 15. (A) 16. (C) 17. (D) 18. (A)
CHEMISTRY

19. (BC)
25. (7)
20. (C)
26. (3)
21. (BCD)
27. (291)
22. (ABC)
28.(4)
23. (AB)
29. (10)
24. (BCD)
30.(8)
31. (15) 32. (7) 33.(C) 34. (A) 35. (B) 36.(C)
MATHEMATICS
37. (BCD) 38. (ABCD) 39. (ABC) 40. (ABCD) 41. (ABD) 42. (ABCD)
43. (2) 44. (7) 45. (14.97) 46. (5) 47. (0.01) 48. (5)
49. (1) 50. (64) 51. (A) 52. (A) 53. (A) 54. (D)
Page | 1
Explanations
PHYSICS
1. (D)
2. (C)
For first collision v = 10 m/s.
 (5) 
t1 = = s
10 2
velocity of sep = e. velocity of opp.
v2 - v1 = 5 m/s
for second collision :
2π  5 
 t2  2 π
5
 total time: t  t  t 2

3. (B)
102 sin 60
Rcm = =5 3
g
m 3  m  n – 1 7 3
5 3 =
mn
n= 3
10 m/s
30º
O 3 A B
53
73
4. (A)
Total momentum is conserved along the horizontal direction; and so
u
M  m  M  m u
2
or M > 3 m.
5. (A)
Conceptual
6. (BC)
Conceptual
7. (6)
Applying conservation of energy between initial and final states
2 2
1  v  1  mg   mg 
2m    k    2mg  
2  2 2  k   k 
6mg 2
Solving we get v = k = 6 m/sec.
8. (8)
Conceptual
Page | 2
9. (4)
According to law of conservation of energy
1  k2  1 3
mgh  mv 2  1  2  or mg  3a  mv 2  or v  2 ga .
2  R  2 2
10. (5)
In ground frame

v
v’
M
MV '  MV
R  V  V '
R
 V
2
1 12
MV 2  MR 2 2
1 2 25 8 13
  1 
x 1 5 5
MV 2
2

11.
 13x  5 .
(5)
Page | 3
12. (5)
Component of its velocity parallel to the plane isv cos300
Let the stream strike the plane after time t. Then 0  v cos30  g sin 30 t
0 0
v cot 30
 t
g
2
Further x  vt  v cot 30
0
 3y
g
2 0
Or v cot 30  3  h  1 gt 2 
 
g  2 
3v 2  g v 2 cot 2 300 
  3h  
g  2 g2 
2 2 2
v 3v 5v
Or h  h
g 2 g 2 g
v2 x2
  x 5
4 3
13. (4)
L
Applying conservation of angular momentum about COM of rod, we get mv0    I 

2
L ML2 
Or mv0 
2 12
ML
Or mv0 
6
Since, the collision is elastic, kinetic energy is also conserved.
1 2 1 1
 mv0  Mv 2  I 2
2 2 2
ML2 2
Or mv0  Mv 
2 2

12
M
4
m
14. (4)
The MI of rod about axis PQ figure(a) and MI of rod about axis PQ figure (b) are same by symmetry.
m 2
 IPQ + IRS = IP’Q’ + IRS =
12
Page | 4
15. (A)
1 1  A2V2
AV
16. (C)
W = Increase in Gravitational Potential Energy of water and piston + Increase in Kinetic Energy of
Water
17. (D)
2 L
I   dm x 2   dx x 2  k  x3 dx
0 0
4
KL
I
4

x dx
18. (A)
5 5
L  mvr  mv  mv
1 3
2 2
2
CHEMISTRY
19. (BC)
Page | 5
20. (C)
21. (BCD)
22. (ABC)
23. (AB)
24. (BCD)
Above is a cyclic process hence U , H and S will be zero
As these are state functions.

25. (7)
q  25  2  50cal / mole
50
CV   5cal / mole / K
10
CP  5  2  7 cal / mole / K
26. (3)
27. (291)
28. (4)
In two and two path is possible
43 42
32 2 1
2  1.
29. (10)
30. (8)
Page | 6
31. (15)

32. (7)
33. (C)
34. (A)
35. (B)
36. (C)
Page | 7
MATHEMATICS
37. (BCD)
(A) a11  a22  a33  0
0  0  0  0  1 way
1  1  0  0  6 ways
2  1  1  0  3 ways
3  1  2  0  6 ways
0  2  2  0  6 ways
0  3  3  0  6 ways
1  1  2  0  3 ways
1  2  3  0  6 ways
 The required number of matrices = 37  76
(C) All diagonal elements are zero and 3 places above diagonal can be filled in 73
(D) Diagonal places and 3 places either above or below the diagonal places can be filled is 76 .
38. (ABCD)
Digits after decimal point came one among 9 non-zero digit or two among 9 non-zero digits etc.
 n(S )  9C1  9C2  ...  9C9  29  1  511
36
(A) n( E )  9C7 1  36  P ( E ) 
511
28 256
(B) n( E )  8C0  8C1  ....  8C8  28  P ( E )  

511 511
63
(C) n( E )  6C1  6C2  6C3  ....  6C6  26  1  63  P ( E ) 
511
32
(D) n( E )  5C0  5C1  5C2  ...  5C5  25  P ( E )  .
511
39. (ABC)
f ( a, b)  f ( a  1, b)  a  1
= f ( a  2, b)  ( a  2)  ( a  1)
=  
a( a  1)
= f (1, b) 
2
a( a  1)
= f (1, b  1)  (b  1) 
2
a( a  1)
= f (1, b  2)  (b  2)  (b  1)  .
2
=  
b(b  1) a (a  1)
= f (1,1)  
2 2
 ( a  b)(a  b  1)  2  1999
 ( a, b)  (2000,1999) or (1001,999) .
40. (ABCD)
f ( x)[( f ( x )) 6  1]  x
f (0)[( f (0)) 6  1]  0  f (0)  0
7( f ( x )) 6 f '( x )  1  f '( x )
f '( x)[7( f ( x )) 6  1]  1  f '( x)  0
 f ( x ) is increasing function.
( f ( x )) 7  x  f ( x )
Page | 8
1
x f ( x)
x  f ( x)  x  f 1 ( x )  x 7  x .
7 1
41. (ABD)
Use 27ak 2  4( h  2a) 3 and h  2a , where a  1 , h   , k  2
 27(1)(4)  4( h  2) 2 and   2
   5 and   2
   (5, ) .
42. (ABCD)
a1, a4 , a7  ....  a16  147  3(a1  a16 )  147  a1  a16  49
Again a1  a4  a7  a10  ....  a16
= a1  a1  3d  a1  6d  ....  a1  15d
= 6a1  45d  147 = 2a1  15d  49 .
a1  a6  a11  a16  a1  a1  5d  a1  10d  a1  15d .
= 4a1  30d = 2(2a1  15d ) = 2(49) = 98
Now using AM  GM
a1  a2  ....  a16
 ( a1a2 a3 ....a16 )1/16
16
8(a1  a16 )
 ( a1a2 a3 ....a16 )1/16 .
16

16
 49 
   a1a2 a3 ....a16 .
 2 
43. (2)
Frequency of the class 30-40 is x and that of 50-60 is y
 x  y  229  (12  30  65  25  18)  79
But given that median is 46 and the class 40-50 is the median class.
hN 
But median =     C 
f 2 
10(114.5  (12  30  x))
46  40 
65
72.5  x
46  40   10  x  72.5  39  33.5  34
65
 y  79  34  45 .
( y  x ){t}  3  2[t ]
11{t}  3  2[t ]
3  2[t ]
0 1
11
 t  3, 2, 1, 0,1
9 7 5 3 1
 {t}  , , , ,
11 11 11 11 11
25 1  
 Sum of {t}     1   2.
11 2  2 
Page | 9
44. (7)
Total cases = 9  103  9000  n( S )
Possible sets {1, 1, 2, 6}; {1, 1, 3, 4}; {1, 2, 2, 3}
4! 4! 4!
 n( E )     36
2! 2! 2!
36 2 1
 P( E )    .
9000 500 250
45. (14.97)
Given that n  200 , x  40 ,   15 .
1 n n
x   xi   xi  n  x  200  40  8000
n i 1 i 1
1 n 2
2   xi  x 2 .
n i 1
  x12  n( 2  x 2 )  200(225  1600)  36500
Corrected  xi  8000  34  53  43  35  7991
Corrected  xi  365000  (34)2  (53) 2  (43)2  (35)2  364109 .
7991
Correct mean =  39.955
200
364109
Correct standard deviation =  2   (39.955) 2 = 1820.54  1596.40

200
 2  224.14 .
 Correct standard deviation = 14.97
46. (5)
( a  1) x 2  (2b  3) x  0 is an identity
a 1  0  a  1 

 3   f ( x )  2 x  1 .
2b  3  0  b  
2
Let g ( x )  px  q .
f ( g ( x))  6 x  7 .
2( px  q )  1  6 x  7  2 p  6  p  3 and q  4
 g ( x)  3x  4 .
47. (0.01)
f (1)  1(10)  f (1)  10(1)  0
f (2)  10(2)  0
f (3)  10(3)  0
 x  1, 2,3 are the roots of f ( x)  10 x  0 .
 f ( x)  10 x  1( x  1)( x  2)( x  3)( x   )
Put x  12  f (12)  120  (11)(10)(9)(12   ) …. (1)
Put x  8  f ( 8)  80  (9)(10)(11)(8   ) …. (2)
From (1) + (2)  f (12)  f ( 8)  40  9  10 11 20
 f (12)  f ( 8)  990(20)  40
f (12)  f (8) 19840
   0.01 .
19840000 1984000
Page | 10
48. (5)
Let A(2, 0)  Equation of tangent at A is x  2
Solve the given asymptotes with x  2
y
C
x
A
 Q(2, 1), R(2, 1)

 CQ  CR  5  5  5 .
49. (1)
k k k
22 22  1  1 22  1 1
Tk  k
 k
 k
 k
.
42  1 42  1 42  1 4 2  1
k
22  1 1
Tk   .
2k 2k 2k
(2  1)(2  1) 4 1
1 1

Tk  k 1
 k
42  1 42  1
n 
1 1 
 Sn    k  k  and take as n   .
2
k 1  4  1 42 1 
1 1
 S  1   1.
42  1 4 1
50. (64)
 
b1  b 2  2  2  15  7  0
1 

   7,    14
 2 
 
 1  422  32  49  1  14  64 .
2
51. (A)
Required number of ways = nC1 . (3)n–1
52. (A)
Each element  S1  S2 in 3 ways
53. (A)
1 4 7 10 13 16
6c  (6c1 ) 2 1
2 5 8 11 14 17 probability  2 
18c2 3
3 6 9 12 15 18
54. (D)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 2(9c2 ) 3
probability   .
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18c3 34
Page | 11
Narayana IIT Academy 25-05-23_Sr.Outgoing_JEE-ADV_(2018_P2)_SGTA-5_Key & Sol

Time: 3 Hrs SGTA-5 (Paper - I I ) Max. Marks: 180
Answer Key
PHYSICS
1. (B) 2. (B) 3. (C) 4. (C) 5. (D) 6. (AB)
7. (1) 8. (1) 9. (4) 10. (9) 11. (2) 12. (1)
13. (6) 14. (8) 15. (B) 16. (C) 17. (B) 18. (D)

CHEMISTRY
19. (ACD) 20. (ACD) 21. (AB) 22. (BD) 23. (ABD) 24. (ABD)
25. (6) 26. (7) 27. (2) 28. (-110.5) 29.(-19.7) 30. (1.92)
31. (4) 32. (1) 33. (A) 34. (C) 35. (D) 36. (D)
MATHEMATICS
37. (ABCD) 38. (BCD) 39. (ABCD) 40. (ABD) 41. (ABCD) 42. (ACD)
43.(5) 44.(0.07) 45.(1) 46.(199) 47. (1) 48. (0.50)
49. (6) 50. (1) 51. (D) 52. (C) 53. (A) 54. (B)
Page | 1
Explanations
PHYSICS
1. (B)
If we treat the train as a ring of mass ‘M’ then its COM will be at a distance from the
2R
RCM = centre of the circle.

The linear Momentum of system = MVCM = MRCM 
2. (B)
friction force between wedge and block is internal i.e. will not change motion of COM. Friction force
on the wedge by ground is external and causes COM to move towards right. Gravitational force (mg)
on block brings it downward hence COM comes down.
3. (C)
Conceptual
4. (C)
Since velocity of man w.r.t trolley is greater than velocity of trolley w.r.t. earth, after the man turns
back displacement of the man will decrease, so maximum displacement will be at the moment when
man turns back.
L
 t
1.5V
L 5
 Displacement  (v  1.5v)t  2.5v  L
5. Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot
(D)
Conceptual
1.5v 3
6. (AB)
7. (1)
For the duration of collision the pendulum does not exert any force on the sphere in the horizontal
direction. Hence the horizontal momentum of bullet + sphere is conserved for the duration of collision.
Let v’ be the velocity of bullet and sphere just after the collision.
from conservation of linear momentum
(m + m) v’ = mv orv’ = = 1m/sec
8. (1)
From C.L.M.
M 11 v
v0  Mv  v  0 …(i)
10 10 11
For block B to leave ground
Page | 2
Mg
K(x0 + x) = 2 Mg (where x0 = )
K
Mg
 x …(ii)
K
M
10 A
M K
B
2M
From COE
11 1 1 
Mgx   K(x 0  x) 2  Kx 20 
10 2 2 
1 11
 0 Mv 2
2 10
88M
solving v 0  g
K
putting the value v0 = 1 ms–1.
9. (4)
5a  2 g  a  4 m / s 2
10.
(9)
As the belt does not slip, v p  vQ
i.e., rA A  rC C  as v  r  (i)
According to the given problem if rA  r , rC  3r , so Eq. (i)
 A  3C (ii)
If both the wheels have the same rotational kinetic energy, then
1 1
I A A2  I Cc2
2 2
2 2
I A  C   1  1 I
or         C 9
IC  A   3  9 IA
11. (2)
12. (1)
F  av 2 d
 
F  a v22  v12 d  a 2 g  h2  h1  d  2aghd
Page | 3
13. (6)
Moment of inertia of the segment of plate will be same as that of complete plate if axis of rotation is
same and mass of plate is taken same as that of segment.
14. (8)
L rp
=2 ̂−2 ̂−8
lz  8
15. (B)
The FBD & various parameters are shown in figure. From various dynamics Equation
F cos   f1  ma1
f1  f 2  Ma2

 f1  f2  R
1
MR 2
2

Solving above equation we get
4 F cos  3MF cos 
a2  , f1 
3M  8m  3M  8m
8 F cos  3MF cos 
a1  , f1 
 3M  8m 3M  8m
16. (C)
x 2  y 2  PQ2  Constant
2xx1  2yy1  0 x1  v
2xv  2yy1  0
1
y1  VQ 
VTan
2xv
y1  VQ   Tan  V
2y
VQ
 Tan
V
Similarly
V
 sec3 
V2

 sec 
V
V
 cot 
VQ
17. (B)
18. (D)
Conceptual
Page | 4
CHEMISTRY
19. (ACD)
20. (ACD)
21. (AB)
22. (BD)
23. (ABD)

24. (ABD)
25. (6)
26. (7)
q  0, T1V11  T2 V2 1
1
T1  V2  5
or   , 
T2  V1  3
 x=7
27. (2)
Salt is [WA – WB]
KW 1014
h  5 5
= 1014 1010  104  102 .
Ka  Kb 10  10
28. (110.5)
C  O 2 
 CO 2 ; H  393.5kJ …. (1)
1
CO  O2  CO2 ; H  283.0 kJ ….. (2)
2
1
C  O2  CO ; H  110.5kJ ….. (3)
2
Page | 5
29. (19.7)
30. (1.92)
p  m  v
0 .001
p  9 .1  10  28  3 .0  10 4 
100
P  2. 73  10 24
h 6 . 626  10 27
Hence x  
p  4  2 . 73  10  28  4  3 . 14
x  1. 92 cm .
31. (4)
The possible monochlorinated products of 2-methyl butane are
C
*
C
(+) and (–) forms
C *

32.
C
(+) and (–) forms
Therefore, a total of four chiral compounds are obtained.

(1)
Fe 26  4 s 2 3 d 6
Fe 3   3 d 5 4 s 0
     
Unpaired electron –hybridization
33. (A)
34. (C)
Page | 6
35. (D)
36. (D)
MATHEMATICS
37. (ABCD)
cos x 3cos x 5cos x (2 n 1) cos x

  ....
f ( x)  lim e 2 22 23 2n .
n 
cos x 3cos x 5 cos x
f ( x)     .... terms …. (1)
2 22 23
1 cos x 3cos x
f ( x)  2   .... terms …. (2)
2 2 23
cos x cos x
From (1) – (2)  f ( x)  cos x  cos x   2 ..... terms
2 2
cos x
f ( x )  cos x   3cos x .
1
1
2
 3
g ( x )  [cos x] is discontinuous at x  0, , , 2
2 2
38. (BCD)
Let P (t12 , 2t1 )  (4, 4)
2
 t1  2 , t2  t1   2  1  3
t1
Q(9, 6)
y 4 ,4)
)=(
2 ,2 t 1
P(t 1
x
S (1, 0)
Q(t12 , 2t2 )
Page | 7
4 6
m( SP )  m( SQ )    1
3 8

 PSQ  .
2
39. (ABCD)
T6 in ( x 3  2 x 2 )15 4 2

T6 in ( 2 x 2  x 3 )15 243
15
C5 ( x3 )10 ( 2 x 2 )5 4 2
  .
15
C5 ( 2 x 2 )10 ( x3 )5 243
5 5
 x3   2 
  2 
   .
 2x   3 
x5 2 2
   x5 
2 3 3
1/ 5
2
 x   .
3
40. (ABD)
Let the number of blue marbles is x and number of red marbles is y
xy 1 ( x  y )( x  y  1)

 ( x  y )   2 xy  .
C2 2 2
 ( x  y )( x  y  1)  4 xy  y 2  (2 x  1) y  ( x 2  x )  0
y  N discriminant must be perfect square
 D  (2 x  1) 2  4( x 2  x)
D  4 x2  4 x  1  4 x2  4 x
D  8 x  1 must be perfect square.
(A) x  21  168 + 1 = 169
(B) x  36  288 + 1 = 289
(C) x  38  304 + 1 = 305
(D) x  15  120 + 1 = 121
41. (ABCD)
Let us add one more number, an1 to the given sequence.
The number an1 is such that | an1 || an  1|
Squaring all the numbers, we have
a12  0
a22  a12  2a1  1
a32  a22  2a2  1
a42  a32  2a3  1 .


an2  an21  2an 1  1
an21  an2  2an  1
Adding the above equalities, we get
a12  a22  ....  an2  an21 = a12  a22  ....  an2  2(a1  a2  ...  an )  n
Page | 8
 2(a1  a2  ...  an )  n  an21  n

a  a  ...  an 1 
 1 2  
n 2 
So,   1 and   2 .
     3 ,   2 ,       3
 and  can be roots of a quadratic equation with rational coefficient.
42. (ACD)
Let f  x    x  a1   x  a 3  x  a 5   3  x  a 2  x  a 4   x  a 6 
Note that, f  x    as x  
f  a1   3  a1  a 2  a1  a 4   a1  a 6   0
Similarly, f  a 2   0, f  a 3   0, f  a 4   0, f  a 5   0, f  a 6   0
Thus, f(x) = 0 has a root in each of the following intervals  a1 , a 2  ,  a 3 , a 4  &  a 5 , a 6  . Thus f(x) = 0
has three real roots.
43. (5)
0  sin   sin3   1 and sin   sin3   1
  x 2 ; x Q
 f ( x)   1 and f ( x ) is continuous at x  2, x  3 .
5 x  2 ; x  Q

1 x 2  5 x  2 have roots 2, 3
1 x 2  5 x  2  0 
5
1

 5  1  1 and 2  6  2  6
1
 2  1  6 1  5 .
44. (0.07)
By properties PA = PB = 10
  1  3 
 A 1  10   ,5   10   (0,8)
  10  10 
  1  3 
B 1  10   ,5  10 10   (2, 2) .
  10  
Slopes of asymptotes are – 7 and 1
If angle between the asymptotes is  . Then
7  1 4
tan    .
1 7 3
b 4
 2 tan 1  tan 1
a 3
 2b 
  4 b 1
tan 1  a 2   tan 1    2b  a
 b  3 a 2
1 2 
 a 
b  a 2 (e 2  1)
2
5 a ab 7
b 2  4b 2 (e 2  1)  e      0.07 .
2 b 100 100
Page | 9
45. (1)
Denomiator = n
C0  ( n k 1)Cn1  nC1  ( n k 2) Cn 1  nC2  ( nk 3)Cn1  ....  nCk 1  nCn1  nCk  ( n 1) Cn1 .
= Coefficient of xn1 in n
C0 (1  x )n k 1  nC1 (1  x)n k  2  nC2 (1  x )nk 3 
....  nCk 1 (1  x)n  nCk (1  x )n1
= Coefficient of xn1 in n C0 (1  x )n k 1  nC1 (1  x )n k  2  nC2 (1  x) nk 3 
.......  nCk 1 (1  x)n  nCk 1 (1  x)n 2  nCk  2 (1  x )n3  ...  nCn (1  x) k 1 .
= Coefficient of xn1 in (1  x ) n  k 1[1  (1  x ) 1 ]n = (1  x) k 1 ( x  2) n
n n
= Coefficient of xn1 in  n
Cr 2r x n  r (1  x) k 1 =  2r  nCr  (k 1)Cr 1 .
r 1 r 1
r
N
  1.
Dr
46. (199)
x 1 1
xn1  n ,  1 .
1  xn xn 1 xn
Put n  1, 2, 3,..., n
1 1 1
 1   1
x2 x1 2

1 1 1 1
 1  11  2 
x3 x2 2 2
1 1 1 1
 1  1 2   3 
x4 x3 2 2
   
1 1 1 1
n   100 
xn1 2 x101 2
2
 x101  .
201
 b  a  201  2  199 .
47. (1)
M n  M n2  M 2  I
M 50  M 48  M 2  I
M 48  M 46  M 2  I
M 46  M 44  M 2  I
  
  
  
6 4 2
M M M I
M4 M2  M2 I
Added, M 50  25 M 2  24 MI
 25 0 0   24 0 0 
M 50   25 25 0    0 24 0 
   
 25 0 25  0 0 24
 1 0 0
M 50
  25 1 0   det(M 50 )  1 .
 25 0 1 
Page | 10
48. (0.50)
n n n n
k 1 1 1
Let A   =  ; B .
k 0 (2 n  2 k  1)(2n  k  1) k 1 2 n  2 k  1 k 1 2 n  k  1 r 1 r
1 1 1 1   1 1 1 
A      ...     ...   .
1 3 5 2n  1   n  1 n  2 2n 
1 1 1 1 1 1 1  1 1 1 1 
B  A      ...     ....        ...  
1 2 3 n n 1 n  2 2n   1 3 5 2n  1 
1 A 1
B A B    0.50 .
2 B 2
49. (6)
 
2v  (v  (iˆ  2 ˆj ))  2iˆ  kˆ ….. (1)
Take dot product of (1) with iˆ  2 ˆj

2v  (iˆ  2 ˆj )  2 .

| v  (iˆ  2 ˆj ) | 1
 
| v |2 (iˆ  2 ˆj ) 2 cos 2   1 (  is the angle between v and iˆ  2 ˆj )

| v |2 (5 cos 2  )  1
 
| v |2 5sin 2   5 | v |2 1 ….. (2)
From the equation (1)

 
| 2v  v  (iˆ  2 ˆj ) |2 | 2iˆ  kˆ |2
 
4 | v |2  | v |2 (iˆ  2 ˆj ) 2 sin 2   5

9 | v |2  6  m  6 .
50. (1)
 2C1  3C2  6C3 
 1 0 
7
 
6C1  2C2  3C3 
A  AT   0 1 .
 7 
 
 2C1  3C2  6C3 6C1  2C2  3C3 C12  C22  C32 
 7 7 
C12  C22  C32  1 
  C 
 2C1  3C2  6C3  0   c  1 (3iˆ  6 ˆj  2kˆ) and | c | 1
3
6C1  2C2  3C3  0 
 (3iˆ  6 ˆj  2kˆ)
 c .
7
51. (D)
For I  5 × 6 × 6 × 2 = 360
 4! 4!  5  3! 
For II  5C2    2   C1   2  1 = 175
 2!2! 3!   2! 
4! 5
For III  5C3 × + C2 [9 × 2 + 6] = 360
2!
52. (C)
20 18 16 14 224
I) P ( no pair ) = . . . 
20 19 18 17 323
Page | 11
224 99
II) P ( at least one pair ) = 1  
323 323
10
C 3
III) P ( exactly two pairs ) = 20 2 
C 4 323
 224 3  96
IV) P ( exactly one pair) = 1 -   
 323 323  323
53. (A)
1
I) Required area = 
0

x  x 2 dx  1/ 3
  x  dx    
4 4
II) x   x  dx
0 0
4 1 4
 x dx    x  dx    x  dx  7 / 3
0 0 0
1
1
 x3 
III) Area =   3  2x  x  dx  3 x  x 2   = 5/3
2
0  3 0
y
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot0 (1, 0)

y=4
x=-1
 /2
IV) 2 
0
cos x sin x dx  4 / 3
54. (B)
I) ( x  7 y ) 2  7 2( x  7 y )  42  0
 ( x  y )[ x  7 y  7 2]  3 2( x  y )  42  0
 ( x  y )[ x  7 y  7 2]  3 2( x  7 y  7 2)  0
 ( x  7 y  7 2)( x  7 y  3 2)  0
x  7 y  7 2  0 and x  7 y  3 2  0
7 2  3 2 10 2
 d | | 2
1  49 50
II) Let two perpendicular lines are coordinate axes.
Then, PM + PN = 1  h  k  1
Hence, the locus is x + y =1
Page | 12
But if the point lies in other quadrants also, then | x |  | y | 1 . Hence, value of k is 1.
III) Angle bisector between the lines x + 2y +4 = 0 and 4x + 2y – 1 = 0
x  2y  4 (4 x  2 y  1) ( 4 x  2 y  1)
  x  2y  4  
1 4 16  4 2
 2( x  2 y  4)   ( 4 x  2 y  1)
Since AA'  BB '  0 , so +ve sign gives acute angle bisector. Hence,
2 x  4 y  8  4 x  2 y  1  6 x  6 y  7  0  m  7
IV) We have, y 2  9 xy  18 x 2  0 or y 2  16 xy  3xy  18 x 2  0
 y ( y  6 x)  3x ( y  6 x)  0
 ( y  3x)  0 and y  6 x  0
The third line is y = 6. Therefore, area of the triangle formed by these lines,
0 0 1
1 1
 1 6 1  | 6  12 |  3units 2
2 2
2 6 1
Page | 13
OUTGOING SR’S DATE: 01/06/2023
JEE-ADVANCED-2014-P1-Model
Time: 3:00 Hrs SGTA-6 Max Marks: 180
2014-P1 MODEL
IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
PHYSICS
Sec – I(Q .N : 1 – 10) Questions with Multiple Correct Choice 3 0 10 30
Sec – II(Q .N : 11 – 20) Questions with Integer Answer Type 3 0 10 30
Total 20 60
CHEMISTRY
+Ve
Marks
- Ve
Marks
No.of
Qs
Total
marks
MATHS
Narayana IIT Academy 01-06-23_ OUT.Sr. _JEE-Adv_2014-P1_SGTA-6_Q.P
SECTION-1
1. A uniform capillary tube of inner radius r is dipped vertically into a beaker filled with water.
The water rises to a height h in the capillary tube above the water surface in the beaker. The surface
tension of water is  . The angle of contact between water and the wall of the capillary tube is  .
Ignore the mass of water in the meniscus. Which of the following statements is(are) true?
A) For given material of the capillary tube, h decreases with increase in r
B) For a given material of the capillary tube, h is independent of 
C) If this experiment is performed in a lift going up with a constant acceleration, then
h decreases
D) h is proportional to contact angle 
2. For an ideal gas
A) The change in internal energy in a constant pressure process from temperature T1 to
T2 is equal to nCV T2  T1  , where CV is the molar heat capacity at constant volume and n the number
of moles of the gas

B) The change in internal energy of the gas and the work done by the gas are equal in
magnitude in an adiabatic process
C) The internal energy does not change in an isothermal process
D) No heat is added or removed in an adiabatic process
3. An ideal gas is taken from the state A (pressure p , volume V ) to the state B (pressure
p / 2, volume 2V ) along a straight line path in the p  V diagram. Select the correct statements from
the following
A) The work done by the gas in the process A to B exceeds the work that would be done by it if the
system were taken from A to B along an isotherm
B) In the T-V diagram, the path AB becomes a part of a parabola
C) In the p  T diagram, the AB becomes a part of a hyperbola
D) In going from A to B, the temperature T of the gas first increases to a maximum value and then
decreases
4. The figure shows the p  V plot of an ideal gas taken through a cycle ABCDA. The part ABC is a
semi-circle and CDA is half of an ellipse. Then,
Page 2
p
A
3
2
D B
1
C
V
0 1 2 3
A) The process during the path A  B is isothermal
B) Heat flows out of the gas during the path B  C  D
C) Work done during the path A  B  C is zero
D) Positive work is done by the gas in the cycle ABCDA
5. One mole of an ideal gas in initial state A undergoes a cyclic process ABCA, as shown in figure. Its
pressure at A is p0 . Choose the correct option(s) from the following.

A) Internal energies at A and B are the same
B) Work done by the gas in process AB is p0V0 ln 4
p0
C) Pressure at C is
4
T0
D) Temperature at C is
4
6. Let v , vrms and v p respectively denote the mean speed, root mean square speed and most probable
speed of the molecules in an ideal monoatomic gas at absolute temperature T. The in an ideal
monoatomic gas at absolute temperature T. The mass of a molecule is m . Then,
A) No molecule can have a speed greater than 2v rms
B) No molecule can have speed less than v p / 2
C) v p  v  vrms
3
D) The average kinetic energy of a molecule is mv 2p
4
7. One mole of a monoatomic ideal gas undergoes a cyclic process as shown in the figure (where, V is
the volume and T is the temperature). Which of the statements below is (are) true?
Page 3
A) Process I is an isochoric process

B) In process II, gas absorbs heat
C) In process IV, gas releases heat
D) Processes I and III are not isobaric
8. An ideal monoatomic gas is confined in a horizontal cylinder by a spring loaded piston (as shown in
the figure). Initially the gas is at temperature T1 , pressure p1 and volume V1 and the spring is in its
relaxed state. The gas is then heated very slowly to temperature T2 , pressure p2 and volume V2 .
During this process the piston moves out by a distance x . Ignoring the friction between the piston
and the cylinder, the correct statements is/are

1
A) If V2  2V1 and T2  3T1 , then the energy stored in the spring is p1V1
4
B) If V2  2V1 and T2  3T1 , then the change in internal energy is 3 p1V1
7
C) If V2  3V1 and T2  4T1 , then the work done by the gas is p1V1
3
17
D) If V2  3V1 and T2  4T1 , then the heat supplied to the gas is p1V1
6
9. The piston is taken completely out of the cylinder. The hole at the top is sealed. A water tank is
brought below the cylinder and put in a position so that the water surface in the tank is at the same
level as the top of the cylinder as shown in the figure. The density of the water is  . In equilibrium,
the height H of the water column in the cylinder satisfies
Page 4
A)  g  L0  H   p0  L0  H   L0 p0  0 B)  g  L0  H   p0  L0  H   L0 p0  0
2 2
C)  g  L0  H   p0  L0  H   L0 p0  0 D)  g  L0  H   p0  L0  H   L0 p0  0
2 2
10. Consider a Vernier caliper in which each 1 cm on the main scale is divided into 8 equal divisions and
a screw gauge with 100 divisions on its circular scale. In the vernier calipers, 5 divisions of the
vernier scale coincide with 4 divisions on the main scale and in the screw gauge, one complete
rotation of the circular scale moves it by two divisions on the linear scale. Then
A) If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the vernier caliper, the least count of the
screw gauge is 0.01 mm
B) If the pitch of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the vernier caliper, the least count of the
screw gauge is 0.005 mm
C) If the least count of the linear scale of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the screw gauge
is 0.01 mm
D) If the least count of the linear scale of the screw gauge is twice the least count of the vernier
caliper, the least count of the screw gauge is 0.005 mm
SECTION-II
INTEGER TYPE
This section contains 10 questions. The answer to each question is a single digit integer, ranging from 0 to 9
(both inclusive).

11. Two soap bubbles A and B are kept in a closed chamber where the air is maintained at
pressure 8 Nm 2 . The radii of bubbles A and B are 2cm and 4cm, respectively. Surface tension of
nB
the soap-water used to make bubbles is 0.04 Nm 1 . Find the ratio , where nA and nB are the number
nA
of moles of air in bubbles A and B, respectively. [Neglect the effect of gravity]
0.1
12. A drop of liquid of radius R  102 m having surface tension S  Nm 1 divides itself into K
4
identical drops. In this process the total change in the surface energy U  103 J. If K  10 , then
the value of  is
13. A piece of ice (heat capacity = 2100 J kg 1 C 1 and latent heat  3.36 105 J kg 1 ) of mass m
gram is at 50 C at atmospheric pressure. It is given 420 J of heat so that the ice starts melting.
Finally when the ice-water mixture is in equilibrium, it is found that 1 g of ice has melted. Assuming
there is no other heat exchange in the process, the value of m is
14. Two spherical bodies A (radius 6cm) and B (radius 18 cm) are at temperatures T1 and
T2 , respectively. The maximum intensity in the emission spectrum of A is at 500 nm and in that of B
is at 1500 nm. Considering them to be black bodies, what will be the ratio of the rate of total energy
radiated by A to that of B?
Page 5
1
15. A diatomic ideal gas is compressed adiabatically to of its initial volume. If the initial temperature
32
of the gas is Ti (in kelving) and the final temperature is aTi ,the value of a is
16. Two spherical stars A and B emit black body radiation. The radius of A is 400 times that of B and A
 
emits 104 times the power emitted from B. The ratio  A  of their wavelengths  A and B at which
 B 
the peaks occur in their respective radiation curves is
17. One mole of a monoatomic ideal gas undergoes an adiabatic expansion in which its volume becomes
eight times its initial value. If the initial temperature of the gas is 100 K and the universal gas
constant R  8.0 J mol 1 K 1 , the decrease in its internal energy is 100P J then find the value of P
18. A metal is heated in a furnace where a sensor is kept above the metal surface to read the power
radiated (P) by the metal. The sensor has a scale that displays log 2  P / P0  , where P0 is a constant.
When the metal surface is at a temperature of 4870 C , the sensor shows a value 1. Assume that the
emissivity of the metallic surface remains constant. What is the value displayed by the sensor when
the temperature of the metal surface is raised to 27670 C ?

19. To find the distance d over which a signal can be seen clearly in foggy conditions, a railway engineer
uses dimensional analysis and assumes that the distance depends on the mass density  of the fog,
intensity (power/area) S of the light from the signal and its frequency f . The engineer finds that d is
proportional to S 1/ n . The value of n is

20. During Searle’s experiment, zero of the vernier scale lies between 3.20 102 m and 3.25 102 m of
the main scale. The 20th division of the vernier scale exactly coincides with one of the main scale
divisions. When an additional load of 2kg is applied to the wire, the zero of the vernier scale still lies
between 3.20 102 m and 3.25 102 m of the main scale but now the 45th division of vernier scale
coincides with one of the main scale divisions. The length of the thin metallic wire is 2m and its
cross-sectional area is 8 107 m 2 . The least count of the vernier scale is 1.0 105 m . The maximum
percentage error in the Young’s modulus of the wire is
CHEMISTRY Max Marks: 60

SECTION-1
21. Choose the correct option(s) for the following set of reactions
Page 6

22. In the following reaction, the major product is
23.
Page 7
Then the correct options is/are

O O OH CH O
3
CH CH
O
A) B B) C 
OH CH O O
3
CH 2OH CH

C) D  D) A
24. Which of the following is/are incorrect order with their particular property?
Page 8
CH 3
D) Ph  CH  CH 2  CH 2  Ph  C  CH 2  CH 3
(Reactivity towards E1 reaction)
CH 3 Br Br
25. Correct statement (s) among the following is
A) The pKa of – COOH group in an   amino acid is lower than the pKa of acetic acid
B) Proline is an example of aromatic heterocyclic ring containing amino acid
C) The pentaacetate of glucose does not react with hydroxylamine
D)   D      Glucopyranose and   D      Glucopyranose differ in their configuration at C2
position
26. With of the following statement(s) is(are) correct?
A) ' m ' of CH 3COOH increases linearly with concentration
B) The flow of electrons in the internal circuit of an electrochemical cell is from cathode to anode
C) For a metal ' M ' if EM0 / MI / I   EM0 / MCl / Cl  ; then K sp  MI   K sp  MCl 
D) Electrolysis of 1M NaCl  aq  for a very long time will give a mixture of Cl2 and O2 gases at the

27.
anode
The correct statement(s) for the reaction sequence given belwo is(are)
A) ‘Q’ will give positive Br2 / H 2 O test

B) ‘R’ on reaction with NaNO2 / HCl gives ‘X’
C) Major products ‘P’ & ‘S’ are identical
D) ‘Q’ is less reactive than ‘S’ towards Friedel-Crafts alkylation reaction
28. Consider the following unbalanced reaction
RCONH 2  Br2  NaOH  RNH 2  Na2 CO3  H 2O  NaBr
The correct statement(s) regarding this reaction is(are)
A) The mechanism of this reaction involves migration of ‘R’ to electron deficient nitrogen
B) 4-methoxy benzamide is more reactive than benzamide towards this reaction.
C) The stoichiometric coefficient of NaOH in the simple balanced equation of this reaction is 4
*
D) When a mixture of MeCONH 2 and PhCO N H 2 is subjected to this reaction, a mixture of
* *
MeNH 2 , Me N H 2 , PhNH 2 & Ph N H 2 is obtained.
Page 9
29. Consider the following electrochemical cells
Cell-I: Pt / H 2 1atm  / HA  0.1M  || Ag   0.1M  / Ag ; E1
Cell-II: Pt / H 2 1atm  / HB  0.1M  || Ag   0.1M  / Ag ; E2
Cell-III: Pt / H 2 1atm  / HC  0.1M  || Ag   0.1M  / Ag ; E3
Cell-IV: Pt / H 2 1atm  / HD  0.1M  || Ag   0.1M  / Ag ; E4

HA,HB,HC and HD are all weak acids and cell potentials are in the order
E1  E2  E3  E4 . Select the correct statement(s)? (Assume molarity = molality)
A) Dissociation constant of HD  HA
B) If 0.1M aq. solution of above four acids is considered separately, then aq. HA has highest freezing
point.
C) Order of dissociation constant: HA > HC > HB > HD
D) If 0.1M aq. solution of above four acids is considered separately at 270 C , aq. HD has the highest
osmatic pressure
30. Compound on the reactant side can be converted to compound on the product side (as the chief
product) by which of the following sequence of reagents?

A) i ) LiAlH 4 ; ii ) SOCl2 ; iii) Mg / Et2O; iv ) Me2CO; v) H 3O  ; vi) PCl5 ; vii ) EtOK / 
B) i )SOCl2 ; ii )  Me2CH  2 Cd ; iii) NaBH 4 / EtOH ; iv) SOCl2 ; v )t  BuOK / 
C) i )MeOH / H  , ; ii) DIBAL  H  work up; iii ) Me2CHMgBr ; iv) H  / 
D) i )Me2CHLi; ii) H 3O  ; iii) Al2O3 / 
SECTION-II
INTEGER TYPE
(both inclusive).
31. Question Stem
Page 10
Degree unsaturation of compound B is______

32. How many of the following aquesou solutions will exihibit higher boiling points than
0.001M hydrazine?
1) 0.015 M urea 2) 0.01 M KNO3 3) 0.01 M Na2 SO4 4) 0.015 M glucose
33. A 5.0 m mol dm3 aqueous solution of KCl has a conductance of 0.55 mS when measured in a cell
x
of cell constant 1.3 cm1 . The molar conductivity of this solution is x mSm 2 mol 1 . Then find .
2
34. The total number of enantiomeric pairs possible with molecular formula C5 H10O is

35. How many of the following compounds are more basic than aniline?
36. Efficiency of the following cell is 84%

A  s   B 2  aq  
 A2  aq   B  s  ; H  285KJ . The standard electrode potential of the cell is
 0.31 y V . The value of ‘y’ is_____

37. Degree of unsaturation of X is
38. Among the following how many are correct orders
Page 11
a) Reactivity in base catalyzed hydrolysis
39. The limiting molar conductivities at 250 C of HCl , NaCl and NaA are
426 1cm 2 mole 1 ; 1261cm 2 mole 1 and 831cm 2 mole 1 respectively. The conductivity of 0.001M
acid  HA  solution is 3.83 10 5 1cm 1 . The pH of the acid solution is
40. How many of the following acids have less pKa value than formic acid?
[ FCH 2COOH , CCl3COOH , CHCl2COOH , O2 NCH 2COOH ,
NC  CH 2COOH , ClCH 2 COOH , ClCH 2CH 2 COOH ,
BrCH 2COOH , C6 H 5COOH , C6 H 5CH 2 COOH , CH 3COOH ,
CH 3CH 2 COOH , H 2C2 O4 , Picric acid, C6 H 5OH ]
MATHS Max Marks: 60

SECTION-1
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot (ONE OR MORE OPTIONS CORRECT TYPE)

41. Which of the following is / are positive
A) log sin1 tan1 B) log cos1 1  tan 3 C) log log10 5  cos   sec   D) log tan150  2sin180 
42. If x  sin     .sin      , y  sin      .sin     , z  sin      .sin      , then:
A) x  y  z  0 B) x3  y3  z 3  3xyz C) x  y  z  0 D) x3  y3  z 3  3xyz
43. If 2a  2 tan100  tan 500 ; 2b  tan 200  tan 500
2c  2 tan100  tan 700 ; 2d  tan 200  tan 700 . Then which of the following is/are correct?
A) a  d  b  c B) a  b  c C) a  b  c  d D) a  b  c  d
44. If   sin x cos3 x and   cos x sin3 x , then:
   
A)     0 ; for all x in  0,  B)     0 ; for all x in  0, 
 4  4
   
C)     0 ; for all x in  0,  D)     0 ; for all x in  0, 
 2  2
45. If 2 cos A  cos B  cos3 B and 2 sin A  sin B  sin 3 B , the possible value of sin  A  B  is/are
1 1 1 1
A) B) C)  D) 
2 3 2 3
Page 12
46. If z1  5  12i and z2  4 , then
A) maximum of  z1  iz2  is 17 
B) minimum z1  1  i  z2  is 13  4 2
z1 13 z1 13
C) minimum of is D) maximum of is
4 5 4 3
z2  z2 
z2 z2
47. If in rectangular hyperbola normal at any point P meet the axes in G and H and C be the centre of
hyperbola, then
A) PG  PH B) PG  PC C) PH  PC D) GH  2 PC
48. Let Q  x   0 be a quadratic equation having roots  and  . If Pn   n   n , then choose the
correct options(s).
P100  2 P98
A) If Q  x  x 2  6 x  2 then 6
P99
P15 P16  P14 P16  P152  P14 P15

B) If Q  x   x 2  x  4 then  16
P13 P14
P17 P20  5 2 P17 P19

C) If Q  x   x 2  5 2 x  10  0 then

5
P18 P19  5 2 P182
P17 P20  5 2 P17 P19

D) if Q  x   x 2  5 2 x  10  0 then 1
P18 P19  5 2 P182
f  n 1
49. Given f 1  2 and f  n  1  n  N , then
f n 1
1 f  2013
A) f  2015    B)  f  2012    9 C) f 1001  2 D) f  2015   3
2
50. In ABC , 3sin 2 B  4sin B sin A  16sin 2 A  8sin B  20sin A  9  0, then
A) sin 2 A  sin 2 B  sin 2 C  2 B) cos 2 A  cos 2 B  cos 2C  1
C) cot A  cot B  cot C  3 D) sin 2 A  sin 2 B  sin 2C  3
SECTION-II
INTEGER TYPE
(both inclusive).
51. If tan A and tan B are the roots of the quadratic equation, 4 x2  7 x  1  0 , then evaluate
4sin 2  A  B   7 sin  A  B  .cos  A  B   cos 2  A  B 
Page 13
52. A1 A2 A3 ........A18 is a regular 18 sided polygon. B is an external point such that A1 A2 B is an equilateral
triangle. If A18 A1 and A1B are adjacent sides of a regular n sided polygon, then n is equal to
 3   5 3   7 5   9 7 
53. The value of  1  tan tan   1  tan tan    1  tan tan    1  tan tan  is
 8 8  8 8   8 8   8 8 
equal to
54. Given that for a, b, c, d  R , if a sec  2000   c tan  2000   d and b sec  2000   d tan  2000   c ,
 a 2  b2  c 2  d 2  0
then find the value of   sin 20
 bd  ac 
cos 240 sin1620

55. The value of   cos1620 is equal to:
2 tan 330 sin 2 57 0 sin1800  cos180 tan 90
2sin 6 x  
56. The complete set of values of x satisfying  0 and sec 2 x  2 2 tan x  0 in  0,  is
sin x  1  2
 a, b    c, d  , then find the value of 

cd 

 ab 
57. The range of value’s of k for which the equation 2cos4 x  sin 4 x  k  0 has atleast one solution is

    . Find the value of  9     .
x2 y2
58. If a variable tangent of the hyperbola   1 , cuts the circle x2  y 2  4 at point A, B and locus
9 4
of midpoint of AB is 9 x 2  4 y 2    x 2  y 2   0 is
2
59. The vertices of a quadrilateral lie on the graph of y  ln x and the x-coordinates of these vertices are
 91 
consecutive integers. The area of the quadrilateral is ln   and the x  coordinate of the leftmost
 90 
vertex, is k , then k  10 is equal to
  1 x  1 
x
60. lim   1    eln  1    is equal to

x  
 x   x  
Page 14
Sec: OUT.SR-IIT_STAR MODEL (A) SGTA-6 Date: 01-06-23
Time: 03:00 Hrs 2014_P1 Max. Marks:180
KEY SHEET
PHYSICS
1 AC 2 ABCD 3 ABD 4 BD 5 AB
6 CD 7 BCD 8 ABC 9 C 10 BC
11 6 12 6 13 8 14 9 15 4
16 2 17 9 18 9 19 3 20 4
CHEMISTRY
21 C 22 D 23 ABCD 24 AB 25 AC

26 D 27 ABC 28 ABC 29 ABD 30 AC
31 8 32 4 33 7 34 4 35 4
36 4 37 6 38 7 39 4 40 9
MATHS
41 BD 42 AB 43 ABD 44 AC 45 BD
46 ABCD 47 ABCD 48 ABD 49 ABC 50 ABD
51 1 52 9 53 0 54 2 55 2
56 6 57 7 58 1 59 2 60 0
PAPER SETTER ::(SLATE BUILDING_PEDDA AMBERPET)

S.NO NAME SUBJECT PHONE
1 SRI ANANTH SIR PHYSICS 9004310117
2 SRI AKHIL SIR CHEMISTRY 9833777540
3 SRI ASHISH SIR MATHS 9839914688
OUTGOING SR”s DATE: 01/06/2023
2014-P2-Model
SGTA-6
01-06-2023_SR OUTGOING _JEE ADV_2014-P2_SGTA-6(PAPER-II)QP FINAL
Time: 3:00 Hrs Max Marks: 180
PHYSICS
Marks for Marks for
No of Total
Section Question type correct wrong
questions marks
answer answer
SEC-I(Q No 1 –10) 10 3 -1 30
Choice
Questions with Comprehension
SEC-II(Q No 11-16) Type 6 3 -1 18
(3 Comprehensions – 2 +2+2=6Q
SEC-III(Q No 17–20) Matrix Matching Type 4 3 -1 12

Total 20 60
CHEMISTRY
Marks for Marks for
No of Total
questions marks
answer answer
SEC-I(Q No 21 –30) 10 3 -1 30
Choice
SEC-II(Q No 31-36) Type 6 3 -1 18
Total 20 60
MATHEMATICS
Marks for Marks for
No of Total
questions marks
answer answer
SEC-I(Q No 41 –50) 10 3 -1 30
Choice
SEC-II(Q No 51-56) Type 6 3 -1 18
Total 20 60
Narayana IIT Academy 01-06-23_ OUT.Sr.IIT- _JEE-Adv_2014-P2_SGTA-6_PAPER-II
SECTION-I
This section contains 10 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A),(B),(C) and (D) for its
answer, out of which ONLY ONE option can be correct.
1. In an experiment to determine the acceleration due to gravity g, the formula used of

7R  r
the tome period of a periodic motion is T  2 . The values of R and r are
5g
measured to be  60  1 mm and 10  1 mm respectively. In five successive
measurement the time period is found to be 0.52 s. 0.56 s, 0.57 s, and 0.59 s. The lease
count of the watch used for the measurement of time period is 0.01 s. Which of the
following statement(s) is (are) true?
A) The error in the measurement of r is 10%
B) The error in the measurement of T is 3.57%
C) The error in the measurement of r is 2%
D) The error in the measurement of g is 11%
2. A length scale  l  depends on the permittivity    of a dielectric material,

Boltzmann’s constant  kB  , the absolute temperature T  , the number per unit volume
 n  of certain charged particles, and the charge  q  carried by each of the particles.
Which of the following expression  s  for l is are) dimensionally correct?
 nq 2   k T   q2   q2 
l   l   B2  l   2/3  l   1/3 
A)   k BT  B)  nq  C)   n k BT  D)   n k BT 
3. The spring balance A reads 2 kg with a block M suspended from it. A balance B reads
5 kg when a beaker with liquid is put on the pan of the balance. The two balances are
now so arranged that the hanging mass in inside the liquid in the beaker as shown in
the figure. In this situation.
Sec:O UT..Sr. IIT—ST A R M O D E L-A Page 2

Tol l F ree H elp li ne No.
1800 419 1828
A) The Balance A will read more than 2 kg

B) The balance B will read more than 5 kg
C) The balance A will read less than 2kg and B will read more than 5kg
D) The balances A and B will read 2 kg and 5 kg respectively
4. Consider a thin square plate floating on a viscous liquid in a large tank, The height h
of the liquid on the tank is much less than the width of the tank. The floating plate is

pulled horizontally with a constant velocity u0 . Which of the following statements is
(are) true?
A) The resistive force of liquid on the plate is inversely proportional to h
B) The resistive force of liquid on the plate is independent of the area of the plate
C) The tangential (shear) stress on the floor of the tank increase with u0
D) The tangential (shear) stress on the plate varies linearly with the viscosity  of the
liquid.
5. A Solid sphere of radius R and density  is attached to one end of massless spring of
force constant k . The other end of the spring is connected to another solid sphere of
radius R and density 3 . The complete arrangement is placed in a liquid of density
2  and is allowed to reach equilibrium. The correct statement(s) is (are)
4 R3  g
A) The net elongation of the spring is
3k
8 R3  g
B) The net elongation of the spring is
3k
C) The light sphere is partially submerged

1800 419 1828
D) The light sphere is completely submerged
6. Two spheres P and Q of equal radii have densities 1 and  2 , respectively. The spheres
are connected by a massless string and placed in liquids L1 and L2 of densities  1 and
 2 and viscosities  2 , respectively. They float in equilibrium with the sphere P in
L1 and sphere Q in L2 and the string being taut (see figure.) If sphere P alone in L2 has
terminal velocity VP and Q alone in L1 has terminal velocity VQ , then

VP 1 VP 2
 
2 1
C) VP .VQ  0 D) VP .VQ  0
VQ VQ
A) B)
7. From the following statements concerning ideal gas at any given temperature T, select
the correct one (s)
A) The coefficient of volume expansion at constant pressure is the same for all ideal
gases
B) The average translational kinetic energy per molecule of oxygen gas is 3kT , k
being Boltzmann constant
C) The mean-free path of molecules increases with decrease in the pressure
D) In a gaseous mixture, the average translational kinetic energy of the molecules of
each component is different
8. Cv and C p denote the molar specific heat capacities of a gas at constant volume and
constant pressure, respectively. Then,

A) C p  Cv is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a monoatomic ideal gas
B) C p  Cv is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a monoatomic ideal gas

1800 419 1828
Cp
C) is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a monoatomic ideal gas
Cv
D) C p .Cv is larger for a diatomic ideal gas than for a monoatomic ideal gas
9. A container of fixed volume has a mixture of one mole of hydrogen and one of helium
in equilibrium at temperature T. Assuming the gases are ideal, the correct state is/are
A) The average energy per mole of the gas mixture is 2RT
6
B) The Ratio of speed of sound in the gas mixture to that in helium gas is
5
1
C) The ratio of the speed of helium atoms to that of hydrogen molecules is
2
1
D) The ratio of the rms speed of helium atoms to that of hydrogen molecules is
2
10. During the melting of a slab of ice at 273 K at atmospheric pressure

A) Positive work is done by the ice-water system on the atmosphere
B) Positive work is done on the ice-water system by the atmosphere

C) The internal energy if the ice-water increases
D) The internal energy of the ice-water system decreases
SECTION-II
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
This section contains 3 Paragraph of questions. Each paragraph has 2 multiple choice questions based on a
paragraph. Each question has 4 choices (A),(B),(C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE IS
correct.
Paragraph for Questions 11 & 12

When liquid medicine if density  is to be pit in the eye, it is done with the help off
dropper. As the bulb on the top of the dropper is pressed, a drop forms at the opening
of the dropper. We wish to estimate the size of the drop. We first assume that the drop
formed at the opening is spherical because that requires a minimum increase in its
surface energy. To determine the size, we calculate the net vertical force due to the
surface tension T when the radius of the drop is R. when this force becomes smaller
than the weight of the drop, the drop gets detaches from the dropper
11. If the radius of the opening of the dropper is r ., the vertical force due to the surface
tension on the drop of radius R (assuming r  R ) is
2 r 2T 2 R 2T
A) 2 rT B) 2 RT C) R D) r

1800 419 1828
12. If r  5  10 m ,   10 kg m , g  10ms 2 , T  .011Nm 1 , the radius of the drop when it
4 3 3
detaches from the dropper is approximately.

3 3 3 3
A) 1.4  10 m B) 3.3  10 m C) 2.0  10 m D) 4.1 10 m
In the figure a container is shown to have a movable (without friction) piston on top.
The container and the piston are all made of perfectly insulating material allowing no
heat transfer between outside and inside the container. The container is divided into
two compartments by a rigid partition made of a thermally conducting material that
allows slow transfer of heat.

The lower compartment of the container is filled with 2 moles of an ideal monoatomic
gas at 700 K and the upped compartment is filled with 2 moles of an ideal diatomic
gas at 400 K. The heat capacities per mole of an ideal monoatomic gas are
3 5 5 7
CV  R, C P  R , and those for an ideal diatomic gas are CV  R, C P  R .
2 2 2 2
13. Consider the partition to be rigidly fixed so that it does not move. When equilibrium is
achieved, the final temperature of the gases will be.
A) 550 K (b) 525 K (c) 513 K (d) 490 K
14. Now consider the partition to be free to move without friction so that the pressure of
gases in both compartments is the same. Then total work done by the gases till the
time they achieve equilibrium will be
A) 250 R (b) 200 R (c) 100 R (d) -100 R
In electromagnetic theory, the electric and magnetic phenomena are related to each
other. Therefore, the dimensions of electric and magnetic quantities must also be
related to each other. In the questions below, [E] and [B] stand for dimensions of
electric and magnetic fields respectively, while  0  and  0  stand for respectively, [L]
and [T] are dimensions of length and time, respectively, all the quantities are given is
SI units.
(There are two questions based on above)
15. The relation between [E] and [B] is

A)  E    B   L  T   E    B   L  T   E    B   L  T   E    B   L  T 
1 1 1 1
B) C) D)
1800 419 1828
16. The relation between [ 0 ] and [ 0 ] is

[0 ]   0  L  T  [0 ]   0  L  T  [  0 ]   0   L  T  [  0 ]   0   L  T 
2 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2 2
A) B) C) D)
SECTION-III
(Matching List Type)
This section contains four questions, each having two matching lists (List-1 & List-II). The options for the
correct match are provided as (A),(B),(C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
17. Match of the following for the given process
Column I Column II

(A)
(B)
Process J  K
Process K  L
(p) (p) Q  0
(q) (q) W  0
(C) Process L  M (r) (r) W  0
(D) Process M  J (s) (s) Q  0
A) A  s; B  p, r; C  p; D  q, s B) A  p; B  p, r ; C  q; D  r , s
C) A  s; B  p, r; C  q; D  q, r D) A  p; B  q, r ; C  r ; D  p, q
18. Column I gives some devices and Column II gives some processes on which the
function of these devices depend. Match the device in Column I with the processes in
Column II
Column I Column II
(A) Bimetallic strip (p) radiation form
a hot body
(B) Steam engine (q) energy
conversion
(C) Incandescent lamp (r) Melting
(D) Electric fuse (s) Thermal
expansion of
solids
A) A  s; B  q; C  p, q; D  q, r B) A  p; B  q; C  r , s; D  p, q
C) A  q; B  r ; C  q, s; D  q D) A  p; B  q; C  r , s; D  p, q

1800 419 1828
19. One mole of a monatomic ideal gas is taken along two cyclic processes
E  F  G  E and E  F  H  E as shown in the p  V diagram
The processes involved are purely isochoric, isobaric, isothermal or adiabatic. Match
the paths in List I with magnitudes of the work done in List II and select the correct
answer using the codes given below the lists.
Column I Column II
(A) GE (p) 160 p0V0 ln 2
(B) GH (q) 36 p0V0
(C) F H (r) 24 p0V0
(D) F G (s) 31 p0V0
A) A  q; B  p; C  r ; D  s B) A  r ; B  q; C  s; D  p

20.
C) A  s; B  r; C  q; D  p D) A  p; B  q; C  r , s; D  s
Column I contains a list processes involving expansion of an ideal gas, Match this
with Column II describing the thermodynamic change during this process. Indicate
your answer by darkening the appropriate bubbles of the 4  4 matrix given in the
ORS.
Column I Column II
(A) An insulated container has two chamber (p) The
separated by a valve. Chamber I contains an temperature of
ideal gas and the Chamber II has vacuum. the gas
The valve is opened decreases
(B) An ideal monoatomic gas expands to twice its (q) The

1
original volume such that its pressure p  2 , temperature of
V the gas
where V is the volume of the gas increases or
remains
1800 419 1828
constant
(C) An ideal monoatomic gas expands to twice its (r) The gas loses
original volume such its presser p 
1 heat
V 4/3
(D) An ideal monoatomic gas expands such that (s) The gas gains
its pressure p and volume V follows the heat
behaviour in the graph.
A) A  p; B  p, q; C  r , s; D  s B) A  q; B  p, r ; C  p, s; D  q, s
C) A  q; B  p, s; C  r , s; D  q D) A  p; B  p, q; C  s; D  q

PART-II_CHEMISTRY
Section-1
Max Marks : 60
(One or more options correct type)

This section contains 10 Multiple Choice questions. Each Question has Four choices (A),
(B), (C) and (D). Out of Which Only One is correct
21.

1800 419 1828
22.
A) 1 B) 2 C) 3 D) 4
23.
A) 4 B) 6 C) 8 D) 7
24.

1800 419 1828
Select the correct option
A) AC B) AB C) ABD D) ACD
25.
A) 70 B) 30 C) 60 D) 40
26.

A) ACD B) ABCD C) AD D) AB
27
A) 69 B) 31 C) 46 D) 54

1800 419 1828
28.
29.

A) AC B) ABC C) ABD D) AD

1800 419 1828
30.
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot Section-2

(Paragraph Type)
This section contains 3 paragraphs each describing theory, experiment, data etc. Six
questions relate to three paragraphs with two questions on each paragraph. Each question
pertaining to a particular paragraph should have only one correct answer among the four
choices A, B, C and D.
Paragraph for Questions 31 &32
31.
32.

1800 419 1828
Paragraph for Questions 33&34
33.
34.
Paragraph for Questions 35&36

1800 419 1828
35.
36.
Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot Section-3

This section contains four questions, each having two matching lists (List-1&List-II). The
options for the correct match are provided as (A), (B),(C) and (D) out of which ONLYONE
is correct.

1800 419 1828

37.

1800 419 1828
38.

1800 419 1828
39.

1800 419 1828
40.

SECTION-I
This section contains 10 multiple choice questions. Each question has 4 options (A),(B),(C) and (D) for its
answer, out of which ONLY ONE option can be correct.
41. If cot 3   cot 2   cot   1 , then which of the following is/are correct
A) cos 2 tan   1 B) cos 2 . tan   1 C) cos 2  tan   1 D) cos 2  tan 2  1
42. Identify the correct options:
sin 3  3 23  sin 3  13 14 
A)  0 for    ,  B)  0 for    , 
cos 2  8 48  cos 2  48 48 
sin 2    sin 2  13 14 
C)  0 for     , 0  D)  0 for    , 
cos   2  cos   48 48 
43. The equation sin 4 x  cos 4 x  sin 2 x  k  0 must have real solutions if:
1800 419 1828
1 3 1 1 3
A) k  0 B) k  C)   k  D)   k 
2 2 2 2 2
44. The possible value(s) of ‘  ’ satisfying the equation
sin 2  tan   cos 2  cot   sin 2  1  tan   cot  where   0,   is/are:
 7 
A) B)  C) D)
4 12 5
45. If z is a complex number satisfying z  1  z  2 , then which of the following is/are correct?
2
1  13 1 5
A) maximum value of z is B) maximum value of z is
2 2
1 5 1 2
C) minimum value of z is D) minimum value of z is
2 2
x2 y2
46. If the line 3 y  x  3 and x  2  0 are tangents to the ellipse 2  2  1 , then
a b
1 7 3
A) Eccentricity of the ellipse is B) Eccentricity of the ellipse is
2 3 7
5 5
C) Length of latus rectum of the ellipse is D) Area of the ellipse is 2 sq.units
3 3
     3 
47. If cot  3  7   tan  5     1 ,    0,   ,    0,  and L  2 2 sin   , then which is/are
 3  3 

correct?
A) Number of integral values of L is 2
C) Number of irrational values of L is 4
B) Number of integral Values of L is 3
D) Number of irrational values of L is 3
48. Consider the parabola y  4 x . Let S be the focus of the parabola. A pair of tangents drawn to the
2
parabola from the point P   2,1 meet the parabola at P1 and P2 . Let Q1 and Q2 be the points on
the lines SP1 and SP2 respectively such that PQ1 is perpendicular to SP1 and PQ2 is perpendicular to
SP2 . Then, which of the following is/are true?
3 10
A) SQ1  2 B) Q1Q2  C) PQ1  3 D) SQ2  1
5
49. Let  Tn  be a sequence such that Tn3  2Tn  Tn1n  N , and T1  1 , then
100 100
A)  T
n 1
n
3
 Tn  1  T101  99 B)  T
n 1
n
3
 Tn  1  T101  100
100
 Tn 1

 T  2   T100
100
 T
2
C) n D)  Tn2   2100
n 1 n 1  n 
50. If . denotes greatest integer function, then choose the correct options(s)
 sin x   x2  x   5 x 2  2 x  1
A) lim  1 B) lim  2  0 C) lim  2   5 D) lim  7 x  22  1
x0
 x  x  x  x
  x 
 x  x 1  x 
SECTION-II
(PARAGRAPH TYPE)
This section contains 3 Paragraph of questions. Each paragraph has 2 multiple choice questions based on a
paragraph. Each question has 4 choices (A),(B),(C) and (D) for its answer, out of which ONLY ONE IS
correct.
1800 419 1828

Consider a right angle triangle ABC right angle at B such that AC  8  4 3 and AB  1 . A line
through vertex A meet BC at D such that AB  BD . An arc DE of radius AD is drawn from vertex A
to meet AC at E and another arc DF of radius CD is drawn from vertex C to meet AC at F. On the
basis of above information, answer the following questions.
51. tan A  cot C is equal to:
A) 3 B) 1 C) 2  3 D) 3  1
 AC 
52. log AE   is equal to
 CD 
A) 2 B) 1 C) 0 D) – 1
Consider f , g and h be three real valued function defined on R. Let
f  x   sin 3x  cos x, g  x   cos 3x  sin x and h  x   f 2  x   g 2  x  .
53. The length of a longest interval in which the function y  h  x  is increasing is:
   
A) B) C) D)
8 4 6 2
54. General solution of the equation h  x   4 is: ( n  I )
   
A)  4n  1 B)  8n  1 C)  2n  1 D)  7 n  1
8 8 4 4

3 
Let f : R   ,   be a surjective quadratic function with line of symmetry 2 x  1  0 and f 1  1
4 
f  x  f x dx
55. If g  x   then  is equal to
2 g ex   2
A) sec 1  e  x   C B) sec 1  e x   C C) sin 1  e  x   C D) sin 1  e x   C
(where C is constant of integration)
ex
56.  f  e x  dx
SECTION-III
This section contains four questions, each having two matching lists (List-1 & List-II). The options for the
correct match are provided as (A),(B),(C) and (D) out of which ONLY ONE is correct.
57. Match Column I with Column II

1800 419 1828
Column-I Column -II

A)    
If 1  tan 50 1  tan100 ..... 1  tan 450  2 k 1  P) 0
then ‘k’ equals

B) Sum of positive integral values of ‘a’ for which Q) 2
a 2  6 sin x  5a  0x  R is
C)  1  4 1 
4 R) 5
a   a  4 2
 a  a 
The minimum value of 2
is
 1 1
 a  a   a  a2
2
 
D) 3 S) 4
x  k 
2
Number of real roots of the equation 0
k 1
is
A) A  S ; B  R; C  P; D  Q B) A  R; B  S ; C  Q; D  P
C) A  S ; B  R; C  Q; D  P D) A  S ; B  R; C  Q; D  P

Column-I Column -II

A) If x, y   0, 2  , then total number of ordered pair P) 4
 x, y  satisfying sin x cos y  1 is

B) If f  x   sin x  cos x  kx  b decreases for all real Q) 0
values of x , then 2 2k may be

C) The number of solution of the equation R) 2

  
sin 1 x 2  1  cos 1 2 x 2  5   2
is
D) The number of ordered pair  x, y  satisfying the S) 3
equation sin x  sin y  sin  x  y  and x  y  1 is
A) A  P; B  Q; C  R; D  S B) A  P; B  R; C  S ; D  Q
C) A  P; B  Q; C  S ; D  R D) A  R; B  Q; C  S ; D  P
Column-I Column -II

1800 419 1828
A) Minimum value of y  sec x  cos x for permissible
2 2 P) 7
real values of x is equal to

B) If m, n are positive integers and Q) 4
m  n 2  41  24 2 , then  m  n  is equal to:

C) 3 33 A 5A R) 2
If cos A  ; then the value of sin sin is equal
4 11 2 2
to
D) 16 25 81 S) 1
If 7 log a  5log a  3log a  8 then the value of
15 24 80
a16 equal to
A) A  R; B  S ; C  P; D  Q B) A  R; B  P; C  S ; D  Q
C) A  R; B  P; C  S ; D  Q D) A  P; B  R; C  Q; D  S
60. Consider a line L :  x  y   (where   R )

Match List I with List II select the correct answer using the code given below the list

A)
Column-I
The positive value of  or which sum of intercepts of L P) 1
Column -II
on axes is zero, is
B) If L is tangent to y  e x 2  x 2 at x  2 , then the value Q) 15
8
of  is
C) If L is tangent to  y  tan  x  0 at x  1 , then the R) 1
value of  is
D) The positive value of  for which L touches the circle S) 5
x 2  y 2  4 x  8 y  19  0 , is
A) A  P; B  S ; C  R; D  Q B) A  P; B  R; C  S ; D  Q
C) A  Q; B  R; C  P; D  S D) A  S ; B  P; C  Q; D  R

1800 419 1828

SGTA 2023-No Password

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SGTA 2023-No Password

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FINAL EXCLUSIVE JEE ADVANCED REVISION TEST SCHEDULE -(FOR RANK GETTING SCORE & TARGET 10K)

SEMI GTA-1 (2010-P1 &P2)

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

O rg a nic ch e mistry: M ore focus o n pre p ara tio n

SEMI GTA-2 (2015-P1 &P2)

SEMI GTA-3( 2016-P1 &P2)

SEMI GTA-4 (2017-P1 &P2)

O rg a nic ch e mistry: Pre p ara tio n a n d pro p erties

E xcess pressure in b u b ble a n d

SEMI GTA-6 (2022-P1 &P2)

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

2. Which of the following compound is aromatic

A) -610 KJ mol 1 B) -850 KJ mol 1 C) +120 KJ mol 1 D) +152 KJ mol 1

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

11. 3 Center  2e  bond is present in

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

14. Actual shape of the molecule BrF5 is similar to the molecule

16. The shape of SF5 can be

A)  only B)  and  only C) V only D) &

18. The correct statement among the following is

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

10.49 17.77 30.20 51.44 65.02 220.42 309.60 372 424.4

21. Find the total +M groups attached to the benzene

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

(Atomic numbers: N  7, F  9, S  16, Br  35, Te  52, Xe  54 )

MATHEMATICS: Max. Marks: 84

Let p, q, r  R  and 27 pqr   p  q  r  and 3 p  4q  5r  12 , then p 3  q 4  r 3 is equal to

The number of distinct terms in the expansion of  x  y 2    x 2  y  is

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

38. Let x  111....11,

41. If a, b, c are non-zero real numbers such that 3  a 2  b2  c 2  1  2  a  b  c  ab  bc  ca  , then

43.Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

Paragraph for Questions 44, 45 and 46:

44. Which of the following is incorrect

45. Which of the following is incorrect

46. Which of the following is correct

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

53. Let An ,  n  N  be a matrix of order  2n  1   2n  1 , such that aij  0,  i  j and

PHYSICS: Max. Marks: 84

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

A) 2gR B) 13gR C) 11gR D) gR

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

A) The electric field is zero

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot (PARAGRAPH TYPE)

70. Speed of the revolving particle at point B will be

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

74. The value and location of image charge will be

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

6) A 7) D 8) A 9) BCD 10) ABC

11) BC 12) ABC 13) ABCD 14) D 15) B

16) D 17) B 18) C 19) 6 20) 3

21) 3 22) 4 23) 4 24) 4 25) 1

Yashpatil TG~ @bohring_bot

29) D 30) C 31) A 32) C 33) D

34) C 35) C 36) A 37) ACD 38) ACD

39) ABCD 40) ACD 41) BD 42) D 43) A

44) A 45) C 46) C 47) 7 48) 7

49) 0 50) 1 51) 4 52) 9 53) 2

54) 3 55) 1 56) 6

62) B 63) A 64) B 65) BCD 66) BC

67) BC 68) BC 69) C 70) B 71) A

72) C 73) A 74) B 75) 2 76) 6